This book is part of Pearson’s exciting Content Update Program,

which provides content updates for major technology

improvements!

▶ As Microsoft® makes significant updates to Windows 10,

sections of this book will be updated or new sections will be
added to match the updates to the software.

▶ The updates will be delivered to you via a free Web Edition

of this book, which can be accessed with any Internet
connection. See inside back cover for details.

▶ This means your purchase is protected from immediately

outdated information!

For more information on InformIT’s Content Update program,

see the inside back cover or go to i n f o r m i t . c o m / c u p

If you have additional questions, please email our

Customer Service department at informit@custhelp.com.

Register Your Product and Save 35%

After you register your product as described in the back of the book you will
automatically receive a coupon for 35% off your next purchase on informit.com,
valid for 30 days. Look for your code in your InformIT cart or the Manage
Codes section of your account page.
 My
Windows 10
SECOND EDITION
®

Katherine Murray

800 East 96th Street,

Indianapolis, Indiana 46240 USA
 ii

My Windows® 10, Second Edition Editor-in-Chief

Greg Wiegand
Copyright © 2018 by Pearson Education, Inc.
All rights reserved. No part of this book shall be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, Senior Acquisitions
or transmitted by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or Editor
otherwise, without written permission from the publisher. No patent liability is assumed
Laura Norman
with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Although every precaution
has been taken in the preparation of this book, the publisher and author assume no
Development Editor
responsibility for errors or omissions. Nor is any liability assumed for damages resulting
from the use of the information contained herein. Charlotte Kughen
ISBN-13: 978-0-7897-5980-1
ISBN-10: 0-7897-5980-2
Managing Editor
Library of Congress Control Number: 2017962805 Sandra Schroeder
Printed in the United States of America
1 18 Editorial Services
The Wordsmithery LLC
Trademarks
All terms mentioned in this book that are known to be trademarks or service marks have Indexer
been appropriately capitalized. Que Publishing cannot attest to the accuracy of this
Cheryl Lenser
information. Use of a term in this book should not be regarded as affecting the validity
of any trademark or service mark.
Proofreader
Microsoft and/or its respective suppliers make no representations about the suitability
of the information contained in the documents and related graphics published as part of
Gill Editorial Services
the services for any purpose. All such documents and related graphics are provided “as
is” without warranty of any kind. Microsoft and/or its respective suppliers hereby disclaim
Technical Editor
all warranties and conditions with regard to this information, including all warranties Laura Acklen
and conditions of merchantability, whether express, implied or statutory, fitness for a
particular purpose, title and non-infringement. In no event shall Microsoft and/or its Editorial Assistant
respective suppliers be liable for any special, indirect or consequential damages or any
damages whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an action of
Cindy J. Teeters
contract, negligence or other tortious action, arising out of or in connection with the use
or performance of information available from the services.
Designer
The documents and related graphics contained herein could include technical Chuti Prasertsith
inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically added to the information
herein. Microsoft and/or its respective suppliers may make improvements and/or Compositor
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described herein at any time. Partial Bronkella Publishing
screenshots may be viewed in full within the software version specified.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the Graphics
U.S.A. and other countries. Screenshots and icons are reprinted with permission from the TJ Graham Art
Microsoft Corporation. This book is not sponsored or endorsed by or affiliated with the
Microsoft Corporation.

Warning and Disclaimer

Every effort has been made to make this book as complete and as accurate as possible,
but no warranty or fitness is implied. The information provided is on an “as is” basis. The
author and the publisher shall have neither liability nor responsibility to any person or
entity with respect to any loss or damages arising from the information contained in this
book.

Special Sales
For information about buying this title in bulk quantities, or for special sales
opportunities (which may include electronic versions; custom cover designs; and content
particular to your business, training goals, marketing focus, or branding interests), please
contact our corporate sales department at corpsales@pearsoned.com or (800) 382-3419.
For government sales inquiries, please contact governmentsales@pearsoned.com.
For questions about sales outside the U.S., please contact intlcs@pearson.com.
Contents at a Glance
Introduction . .......................................................................................................................................1
Chapter 1 Hello, Windows 10! ...................................................................................................................11
Chapter 2 Connecting and Managing Your Desktop and Devices ................37
Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks ...............................................53
Chapter 4 Using Cortana: Your Personal Digital Assistant .......................................85
Chapter 5 Personalizing Windows 10. ..........................................................................................107
Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—For Yourself and Your Family. .......129
Chapter 7 Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps . ................................157
Chapter 8 Working with Your Files in File Explorer and OneDrive. ............179
Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge. ................................................203
Chapter 10 Staying in Touch (and in Sync) with Windows 10 . ...........................237
Chapter 11 Bringing Out Your Inner Artist with Photos and Paint 3D. .....259
Chapter 12 Getting Your Groove on with Favorite Music and Shows . ......275
Chapter 13 Entertainment for the Gamer in You . ..............................................................287
Chapter 14 Caring for Your Computer and Updating Windows. ......................301
Index. .....................................................................................................................................................313
 Table of Contents
Introduction 1
Versions of Windows 10 ...........................................................................................2
Highlights of Windows 10 Creators Update ...........................................2
What You’ll Find in This Book ...............................................................................4
Let’s Begin . ...........................................................................................................................8

1 Hello, Windows 10! 11

Exploring Windows 10 Creators Update ................................................12
Logging In to Windows 10..................................................................................12
Touring the Windows 10 Desktop ...............................................................13
Getting Started with Windows 10................................................................14
Getting Around with the Mouse, Keyboard, and Pen ................18
Using the Mouse..........................................................................................................19
Selecting Multiple Items.......................................................................................19
Getting to the Menu ................................................................................................20
Using the (Real) Keyboard ..................................................................................21
Using Speech with the Keyboard .................................................................25
Using a Pen with the Keyboard......................................................................25
Displaying the Emoji Keyboard ......................................................................26
Using Touch in Windows 10...............................................................................27
Using Single Tap ...........................................................................................................28
Tap and Hold ...................................................................................................................28
Swiping Right .................................................................................................................29
Swiping Left .....................................................................................................................29
Swiping Up and Down ...........................................................................................30
Using Pinch Zoom ......................................................................................................31
Getting Help in Windows 10 .............................................................................32
Using the Tips App.............................................................................................33
Shutting Down or Putting Windows 10 to Sleep ...........................34
Goodnight, Windows 10 ...............................................................................35
Shutting Down Windows 10 .....................................................................35
 Table of Contents v

2 Connecting and Managing Your Desktop and Devices 37

Adding Devices in Windows 10 ......................................................................38
Viewing Installed Devices....................................................................................39
Removing a Device....................................................................................................40
Connecting to Wireless Networks ................................................................41
Connecting to an Available Network................................................42
Linking Your Phone to Windows 10............................................................43
Adding Your Phone to Windows 10 ...................................................43
Managing Your PC Power.....................................................................................44
Turning On the Battery Saver ..........................................................................45
Changing Your Power Settings .......................................................................47
Resetting Windows 10 ............................................................................................48
Resetting Your PC................................................................................................49

3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks 53

Exploring the Windows 10 Desktop ...........................................................54
Learning About the Windows 10 Desktop ...................................54
Using the Windows 10 Start Button...................................................56
Using the Start Menu ......................................................................................57
Working with the Start Menu ..................................................................58
Changing User and Profile Information in the
Start Menu . .......................................................................................................................59
Adding App Tiles to the Start Menu ..........................................................60
Removing App Tiles from the Start Menu ............................................61
Resizing App Tiles .......................................................................................................61
Turning Off Live Tile Updates...........................................................................62
Using Tablet Mode .....................................................................................................63
Making the Change Manually .........................................................................63
Using the Start Menu with Touch ................................................................64
Tweaking the Start Menu with Touch ......................................................65
Setting Tablet Mode Options ...........................................................................65
Tailoring the Taskbar ................................................................................................67
Adding Apps to the Taskbar......................................................................68
Using Jump Lists ..................................................................................................69
 vi My Windows 10

Working with Windows..........................................................................................70

Window Basics ...............................................................................................................70
Moving a Window.......................................................................................................71
Resizing a Window .....................................................................................................72
Arranging Windows ..................................................................................................73
Using Task View .............................................................................................................75
Displaying and Using Task View.............................................................75
Working with Notifications and the Action Center ......................75
Checking Notifications ...........................................................................................76
Turning Notifications Off and On .................................................................77
Using Ink with Windows 10................................................................................77
Displaying the Windows Ink Workspace ................................................78
Creating a Sticky Note ............................................................................................79
Setting Reminders......................................................................................................80
Creating and Using Multiple Desktops....................................................80
Creating a New Desktop...............................................................................81
Adding Apps to the New Desktop ......................................................81
Closing a Desktop...............................................................................................82

4 Using Cortana: Your Personal Digital Assistant 85

Getting Started with Cortana...........................................................................87
Leaving a Wake-up Call .........................................................................................87
Learning the Cortana Tools ................................................................................89
Searching with Cortana .........................................................................................90
Seek and Find with Cortana ......................................................................90
Using Cortana’s Notebook ..................................................................................92
Exploring the Cortana Notebook ................................................................93
Personalizing Cortana’s Info ..............................................................................94
Adding to Cortana’s Skills ....................................................................................95
Expanding Cortana’s Skills ..........................................................................96
Setting Tasks with Cortana .................................................................................99
Having Cortana Find Your Phone. ............................................................ 101
Managing Cortana Permissions ................................................................. 101
Managing Your Permissions .................................................................. 102
Setting Notifications . .................................................................................. 103
 Table of Contents vii

5 Personalizing Windows 10 107

Selecting a New Desktop Background . .............................................. 108
Displaying Personalization Settings....................................................... 108
Choosing a New Background Picture ................................................... 109
Selecting a Color Background ..................................................................... 110
Creating a Custom Color .................................................................................. 110
Adjusting Colors in Windows 10................................................................ 111
Choosing Accent Colors and Transparency............................. 112
Setting a Night Light in Windows 10 . .................................................. 113
Personalizing the Lock Screen..................................................................... 114
Choosing a New Lock Screen Picture ................................................... 115
Adding a New Lock Screen Picture On-the-Fly............................ 116
Creating a Slideshow ........................................................................................... 117
Stopping the Show................................................................................................ 118
Choosing a Windows 10 Theme. ............................................................... 118
Displaying Themes......................................................................................... 119
Customizing the Start Menu . ....................................................................... 120
Modifying the Most Used List...................................................................... 120
Changing Start Menu Settings ................................................................... 122
Resizing the Start Menu.................................................................................... 123
Tweaking Additional System Settings.................................................. 124
Changing the Time ........................................................................................ 124
Changing Your Account Picture. ....................................................... 125

6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and

Your Family 129
Customizing Your Login . .................................................................................. 130
Changing a Password .......................................................................................... 131
Creating a PIN Logon........................................................................................... 134
Creating a Picture Password.......................................................................... 135
Working with Security and Maintenance in Windows 10... 137
Reviewing Your System Status .................................................................... 138
Changing Security and Maintenance Alerts................................... 140
Using Windows Defender ................................................................................ 141
Checking Out the Windows Defender Security Center ....142
Scanning for Risks with Windows Defender ........................... 143
 viii My Windows 10

Checking Your Windows Firewall.............................................................. 145

Checking the Firewall.......................................................................................... 145
Changing Firewall Settings ............................................................................ 146
Working with Windows SmartScreen ................................................... 147
Working with User Accounts ........................................................................ 148
Adding a User ............................................................................................................. 148
Switching Users ........................................................................................................ 151
Maintaining Your Privacy. ................................................................................ 152
Choosing Privacy Settings ...................................................................... 153
Setting Location Privacy . ......................................................................... 154

7 Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps 157

Getting Started with Apps . ............................................................................ 158
Checking Out Your Apps on the Start Menu.................................. 159
Pinning Apps to the Start Menu and the Taskbar ..................... 159
Finding and Starting Apps . ............................................................................ 160
Finding an App.......................................................................................................... 160
Launching an App from the Start Menu............................................ 161
Moving, Grouping, and Removing Apps ........................................... 162
Moving Apps on the Start Screen ............................................................ 162
Creating an App Group ..................................................................................... 163
Naming App Groups ............................................................................................ 164
Removing an App from the Start Menu............................................. 164
Working with Apps ................................................................................................ 165
Exploring an App Window .............................................................................. 166
Exploring a Windows 10 Universal App.............................................. 167
Working with an App .......................................................................................... 168
Snapping Apps.......................................................................................................... 169
Closing Apps. .............................................................................................................. 171
Closing Selected Apps........................................................................................ 171
Using the Task Manager .................................................................................... 171
Getting Apps from the Microsoft Store............................................... 173
Searching for an App ................................................................................... 174
Reviewing and Installing an App...................................................... 174
 Table of Contents ix

Managing Your Apps. .................................................................................. 175

Overseeing Your Finances in the Microsoft Store. ............ 176
Uninstalling Apps. .......................................................................................... 177

8 Working with Your Files in File Explorer and

OneDrive 179
Getting Started with File Explorer. .......................................................... 180
Starting File Explorer............................................................................................ 180
Touring the File Explorer Screen ............................................................... 181
Working with Quick Access............................................................................ 182
Checking Out This PC .......................................................................................... 183
Using the Ribbon..................................................................................................... 184
Learning the Ribbon Layout ......................................................................... 185
Showing and Hiding the File Explorer Ribbon ............................. 186
Managing Your Files and Folders . ............................................................ 188
Finding Files and Folders ................................................................................. 189
Selecting Files and Folders ............................................................................. 190
Viewing File Information .................................................................................. 191
Tagging Files................................................................................................................ 192
Arranging Folder Display ................................................................................. 193
Any Folder Works .................................................................................................... 193
Copying, Moving, and Sharing Files and Folders ....................... 194
Copying Files ............................................................................................................... 195
Sharing Files................................................................................................................. 196
Compressing and Extracting Your Files............................................... 198
Using Files On-Demand with OneDrive.............................................. 199
Working with OneDrive in the Taskbar ....................................... 201

9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge 203

What’s New About Microsoft Edge?....................................................... 204
Getting to Know Today’s Microsoft Edge . ........................................ 204
Starting Microsoft Edge .................................................................................... 206
Exploring Microsoft Edge ................................................................................ 206
Browsing and Searching the Web ............................................................ 208
Starting at the Top ......................................................................................... 208
Navigating the Web . .................................................................................... 209
 x My Windows 10

Opening a New Tab............................................................................................... 210

Pinning Open a Tab ............................................................................................... 211
Displaying and Hiding Tabs ........................................................................... 211
Searching in Microsoft Edge ......................................................................... 212
Using Cortana in Searches .............................................................................. 213
Adding Search Providers .................................................................................. 214
Personalizing Your Browsing......................................................................... 216
Choosing a Theme ................................................................................................. 216
Magnifying and Reducing the View ....................................................... 217
Selecting Your Start Page................................................................................. 217
Using the Hub ............................................................................................................ 218
Working with Extensions ................................................................................. 219
Adding an Extension............................................................................................ 219
Turning On Extensions ....................................................................................... 221
Using Extensions ..................................................................................................... 221
Saving Your Favorites . ......................................................................................... 222
Adding a Favorite .................................................................................................... 222
Importing Favorites from Other Browsers........................................ 223
Saving and Working with Web Content. ............................................ 224
Reading Clearly in Reading View .............................................................. 224
Adding eBooks .......................................................................................................... 225
Reading eBooks in Your Browser Window........................................ 226
Saving Articles to Your Reading List ...................................................... 227
Adding Notes to Web Pages ......................................................................... 228
Printing Web Content.......................................................................................... 229
Securing Your Browsing Experience. ..................................................... 229
Blocking Cookies ............................................................................................. 230
Clearing Browsing Data............................................................................. 232
Saving Passwords and Form Entries .............................................. 234

10 Staying in Touch (and in Sync) with Windows 10 237

Calling and Messaging with Skype . ....................................................... 238
Starting Skype.................................................................................................... 238
Signing In to Skype ....................................................................................... 239
 Table of Contents xi

Exploring the Skype Window ....................................................................... 240

Finding and Adding Contacts...................................................................... 241
Communicating with Skype.......................................................................... 242
Using the New People Hub . .......................................................................... 243
Getting Ready to Use the People Hub ................................................. 243
Finding People Hub Contacts ...................................................................... 244
Checking In................................................................................................................... 245
Managing Contacts with the People App. ....................................... 246
Getting Started with the People App ................................................... 246
Using the People App ......................................................................................... 247
Adding a New Contact ....................................................................................... 248
Staying in Touch Through Email . .............................................................. 248
Launching Mail.......................................................................................................... 249
Checking Out the Mail Window................................................................. 249
Composing an Email Message .................................................................... 250
Adding an Email Account ................................................................................ 252
Organizing Your Email ........................................................................................ 254
Keeping Your Dates Straight with the Calendar App . ........... 255
Checking Appointments .......................................................................... 255
Adding a New Appointment . .............................................................. 256

11 Bringing Out Your Inner Artist with Photos

and Paint 3D 259
Viewing and Organizing Your Photos . ................................................. 260
Starting the Photos App ................................................................................... 260
A Look Around the Photos App Window .......................................... 261
Viewing Your Photos ............................................................................................ 262
Editing and Enhancing Photos ................................................................... 263
Importing Photos.................................................................................................... 264
Working with Creations ..................................................................................... 265
Adding Your Own Creations .......................................................................... 266
Viewing and Editing Creations ................................................................... 267
Paint 3D: Adding Artistic Dimension . ................................................... 268
Getting Started with Paint 3D ............................................................. 268
Exploring the Paint 3D Window......................................................... 269
 xii My Windows 10

Creating with Paint 3D . ............................................................................. 270

Adding Mixed Reality .................................................................................. 271
Saving Your Objects in Paint 3D ........................................................ 271

12 Getting Your Groove on with Favorite Music

and Shows 275
Your Music, Your Way . ......................................................................................... 275
Getting Started with the Groove Music App ................................. 276
Learning the Groove Music App Window......................................... 277
Playing an Album in Groove Music......................................................... 278
Creating Playlists ..................................................................................................... 279
Finding and Watching Your Favorite Shows ................................... 280
Launching the Movies & TV App............................................................... 281
Exploring the Movies & TV App Window........................................... 281
Finding New Movies & TV Shows ............................................................. 282
Playing and Pausing Shows . ........................................................................ 283

13 Entertainment for the Gamer in You 287

Exploring the Xbox App . .................................................................................. 287
Starting the Xbox App and Signing In................................................. 288
Learning the Xbox App Window ............................................................... 288
Playing a Game with the Xbox App . ..................................................... 290
Using the Game Bar .............................................................................................. 290
Choosing Game Settings.................................................................................. 292
Broadcasting as You Play .................................................................................. 294
Finding and Downloading New Games ............................................. 296
Checking Network Status ................................................................................ 298

14 Caring for Your Computer and Updating Windows 301

Checking for Windows Updates. ............................................................... 302
Checking for Updates ......................................................................................... 302
Setting Advanced Update Options......................................................... 303
Backing Up and Restoring Your Files ..................................................... 304
Backing Up Your Files with File History ....................................... 304
Restoring Files . .................................................................................................. 306
 Table of Contents xiii

Troubleshooting Your Computer . ............................................................ 308

Launching a Troubleshooter ................................................................. 308
Optimizing Your Computer ............................................................................ 309
Optimizing Your Hard Disk ..................................................................... 309
Encrypting Your Device ..................................................................................... 311
Changing Encryption Settings ............................................................ 311

Index 313
 xiv About the Author

About the Author

After writing about technology for 35 years, Katherine Murray is still a
computer geek. This is a fascinating time to be writing about technology.
She has seen personal computing change from big, slow, cryptic desktop-
hogging machines to small, sleek smart devices we easily can tap our way
through. She has worked with every version of Microsoft Windows there’s
been, loving some versions (such as Windows 7) and loathing others.
(Remember Windows Vista or, worse, Windows ME?) Katherine was part of the
thumbs-up crowd when it came to Windows 8.1 but watched as Microsoft’s
vision tanked because users weren’t quite ready for such a huge change
in the way we work with our computers. Windows 10 Fall Creators Update
represents the best of what Microsoft has learned about the balance of
features, flashiness, and functionality, with even a little fun thrown in.
In addition to writing about technology, Katherine works as a hospice
chaplain and pastors a Quaker church in Noblesville, Indiana.
 Acknowledgments xv

Dedication
May the technology we use help us to create deeper, truer, kinder, and more
creative connections with one another.

Acknowledgments
Thanks to all on the Que team for another great collaborative project. I
appreciate all who were involved, from start to finish. Special thanks to Laura
Norman for being so great to work with; to Charlotte Kughen for all her
friendly help and great edits and questions along the way; and Laura Acklen,
technical editor, for her good catches and funny notes.
 xvi Reader Services

We Want to Hear from You!

As the reader of this book, you are our most important critic and commenta-
tor. We value your opinion and want to know what we’re doing right, what
we could do better, what areas you’d like to see us publish in, and any other
words of wisdom you’re willing to pass our way.
We welcome your comments. You can email or write to let us know what you
did or didn’t like about this book—as well as what we can do to make our
books better.
Please note that we cannot help you with technical problems related to the
topic of this book.
When you write, please be sure to include this book’s title and author as well
as your name and email address. We will carefully review your comments and
share them with the author and editors who worked on the book.
Email: feedback@quepublishing.com
Mail: Que Publishing
ATTN: Reader Feedback
800 East 96th Street
Indianapolis, IN 46240 USA

Reader Services
Visit our website and register this book at informit.com/register for
convenient access to any updates, downloads, or errata that might be
available for this book.
Introduction
It’s taken a couple of generations (as least as far as software devel-
opment goes), but with Windows 10 Creators Update, Microsoft is
realizing some of the visionary features promised when the first
blush of Windows 8 turned things upside-down. From the outset
of this new approach to operating systems, developers envisioned
a seamless computing experience that was consistent, smooth,
and easy to use whether users were working on tablets, desktops,
or phones. Developers also pictured an operating system that was
built to help us spend our time on the things we’re most interested
in—social media, gaming, and creative efforts—without compro-
mising anything in terms of productivity and security.
In the Creators Update of Windows 10, made available in September
2017, Microsoft delivers a slate of features designed to help users
be more creative, take advantage of the latest technologies (such
as virtual media and gaming enhancements), and streamline online
tasks. Additionally, changes to the Cortana digital assistant mean
 2 Introduction

users can access supportive services within apps; use touch to interact in new
ways; and personalize the look, feel, and function of the operating system.
This book shows you all these new and enhanced features in Windows 10
Creators Update and provides all the coverage you need for essential tasks.
Whether this is your first experience with the “new” Windows 10 or you’ve
been following along since the first iteration of Windows 8, chances are that
you’ll be pleased (if not fascinated) by the tools and changes you’ll find in
these pages.

Versions of Windows 10
Windows 10 is available in two basic versions: Windows 10 Home and
Windows 10 Pro. All the essential features are available in both versions; for
example, the Start menu, live tiles, Cortana, Windows Ink, Microsoft Edge,
game support, and numerous security features are part of the operating
system no matter which version you use.
Beyond that, Windows 10 Pro offers additional features for those who will be
using Windows 10 for professional tasks. Pro offers the additional security
features of Windows Information Protection and Bitlocker and includes a
number of business management tools, such as Mobile Device Management,
group policy, Windows Store for Business, dynamic provisioning, shared PC
configuration, and more. Additionally, Windows 10 Pro includes high-end
networking and enterprise-level tools such as Domain Join, Remote Desktop,
Enterprise Mode Internet Explorer, and Client Hyper-V.
Microsoft has recently introduced one more version of Windows 10, known as
Windows 10 S. This version is a streamlined version of the operating system
that focuses on security and efficiency without all the bells and whistles that
can reduce system processing time.
Whichever version of Windows 10 you are currently using, the Windows 10
Creators Update will be installed automatically through Windows Updates.

Highlights of Windows 10 Creators

Update
Windows 10, as the operating system of your desktop, tablet, and phone, is
charged with many vital tasks that keep things running optimally and make
sure you and your family—and the files and processes you use—are as safe
 Highlights of Windows 10 Creators Update 3

as possible. Among the changes are new features that help boost your cre-
ativity, simplified processes that make picking up where you left off easier,
enhanced security and privacy controls, and choices for personalization that
enable you to tweak Windows 10 to work the way you do.
Specifically, you’ll find these new and enhanced features in Windows 10 Cre-
ators Update:
• The Fluent Design is being used by Windows 10 app developers and
is included in the Windows 10 interface as well. This gives your apps a
consistent look and feel whether you’re working on a desktop, tablet, or
phone.

• The new Night Light feature dims the blue ratio of your screen after 9:00
p.m., which makes it easier on your eyes in darker environments. You can
customize this feature to the schedule you prefer.

• Significant Cortana improvements bring the value of the digital assis-

tant into apps you use every day. From within your favorite app (or the
Microsoft Edge browser), you can ask for help and Cortana will spring
into action. Cortana can also respond to commands to turn on or off your
PC, change the volume, and play songs from Groove music.

• Creators Update also includes social improvements, such as the My

People Hub, which enables you to keep up to three of your favorite
contacts pinned to the hub on your taskbar so you can communicate
easily with them throughout the day. There is also expanded support for
shared experiences that enables you to share content, games, and sites
across devices and with friends.

• Big enhancements in Microsoft Edge offer a way to set tabs aside (giving
you more screen space), and you can preview tab thumbnails before you
select them. Now you can now read PDFs and ePub files in the browser
without needing an ereader app. To go along with the ebook feature,
Windows Store includes thousands of ebooks you can download and
read in Edge. The browser also includes a read-aloud feature so that you
can listen to an audio book while you work on other things.

• Now Windows 10 has 3D support, thanks to Paint 3D and Remix 3D. Both
creative tools enable you to create designs on the fly and extend your
creation by showing it in different dimensions and environments. It’s
easier than you might think!
 4 Introduction

• Developers have focused on streamlining the behind-the-scenes pro-

cessing in Windows 10 so that downloads happen faster, videos stream
longer and without interruption, and the overall drain on the processor
is lessened by significantly reducing the processing load. You’ll notice
that you spend less time waiting and more time being productive. This
efficiency also extends to OneDrive, which now grabs the file you need
“on demand,” even though you can see all your OneDrive files in your File
Explorer window. This reduces the amount of storage space you need on
your computer or device, and the faster processing retrieves the file you
need instantly, with no lag time.

• Gaming has gotten significant attention in Windows 10 Creators Update

and has been given its own category in the Settings window. You can use
the Game bar to control game flow, start live game broadcasting with
Beam, and capture live audio and video of your gameplay.

• Windows 10 Creators Update is more secure than ever, with new ransom-
ware protections, enhancements to Windows Defender Advanced Threat
Protection that add specialized protection tools, and improvements to
Defender’s Antivirus tool.

What You’ll Find in This Book

In this book, you’ll discover what you need to know to accomplish all the
basic tasks you want to do with Windows 10 Creators Update. The book
focuses first on the features you’re most likely to want to know up front; then
it explores some of the more specialized tasks, such as working with File
Explorer, navigating Microsoft Edge, and unboxing all the apps. The chapters
unfold like this:
• Chapter 1, “Hello, Windows 10!” gets you started with the basics of
Windows 10 and introduces you to all the key new features of the operat-
ing system. You learn how to use touch gestures, as well as the mouse
and keyboard, to navigate with Windows 10 Creators Update. You also
find out how to put Windows 10 to sleep, wake it up, and power down
your computer, which you can now use Cortana and voice commands to
do.

• Chapter 2, “Connecting and Managing Your Desktop and Devices,” shows

you Windows 10 functions in different domains—desktop, tablet, and
phone. You find out how to add your phone to your Microsoft account
so you can have a seamless experience no matter which device you may
 What You’ll Find in This Book 5

be using. You also find out about input improvements for the mouse,
keyboard, and pen, and you learn about improvements in the process for
adding new devices to Windows 10. You’ll also find out how to set app
notifications, make sure you have Internet access, learn about managing
your PC’s power, and find out how to refresh or reset your system.

• Chapter 3, “Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks,” introduces you to

the feel and functionality of the user interface in Windows 10. You take
a tour of the desktop, as well as tablet mode, and learn how to set up
Windows 10 to work the way you want it to. You find out how to tailor
the Start experience so you have access to the apps and features you
want most, and you see out how to manage the tools that are part of
your daily life.

• Chapter 4, “Using Cortana: Your Personal Digital Assistant,” introduces you

to Cortana. Here you learn how to set up Cortana to work the way you
do; teach Cortana to recognize your voice, and use voice commands to
carry out basic tasks. You discover how Cortana can work alongside you,
listening for commands as you create, research, produce, compile, or
work with favorite apps, data, and sources.

• Chapter 5, “Personalizing Windows 10,” covers all kinds of personaliza-

tion features, beginning with customizations for the Lock screen, color
schemes, profile picture, badges, notifications, and accessibility features.
You find out how to set up the new Night Light feature, explore the new
categories in Settings, and tweak the way apps work in the background.
You also learn how to create multiple desktops in Windows 10 so that
you can set up the apps and features for different people or places in
your life.

• Chapter 6, “Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family,”

helps you ensure that your computer is as safe as possible by setting
a password, customizing your login, creating user accounts, adding a
PIN logon, setting location privacy, and telling Windows 10 how—or
whether—you want apps to share your information. You’re introduced
to the new privacy tools so you can make nuanced choices about what
you want to share online. You also find out about Windows Hello, which
uses biometric login features to recognize faces, irises, and thumbprints.
Additionally, in this chapter, you learn about setting up and using Family
Safety features to safeguard your kids online.

• Chapter 7, “Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps,” introduces

you to the redesigned Microsoft Store and shows you how to find, down-
6 Introduction

load, install, and update the apps that interest you. You find out how
inking is now available in many popular apps and see how various apps
work together to get you instant access to the information you need. This
chapter also explains how to update apps and organize them on your
system so that you easily can find the ones you need when you need
them. This chapter also shows you the big new changes in the Microsoft
Store—including thousands of ebook titles—and how to search for new
apps you want to try.

• Chapter 8, “Working with Your Files in File Explorer and OneDrive,” spot-
lights the tasks you need to know to organize your files and folders in
Windows 10 Creators Update. Saving files to the cloud has become a big
thing in recent years, and OneDrive is Microsoft’s answer to in-the-cloud
storage. In Windows 10, you can choose which folders you want to sync
to the cloud so you can access the files you need easily, no matter which
computer or device you may be using. You also find out about the new
OneDrive on-demand file retrieval process, which opens only the file you
need at a given time (freeing up storage space on your local computer
or device). Along the way, you find out how to manage the changes in
File Explorer and discover how easily you can copy, move, and share your
files with others.

• Chapter 9, “Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge,” introduces the

many new feature improvements in Microsoft’s leading-edge browser.
You’re introduced to the new strategy for getting tabs out of the way
(to give you more screen space), thumbnail previews for tabs, optimized
processing for faster downloads and longer, smoother video stream-
ing and browsing, and more. Also covered are the tools you use to read
ebooks (PDFs or ePub files) in your Edge browser window, as well as
the read-aloud feature that turns your ebook into an audio book. With
Microsoft Edge, you can annotate web pages and share them easily with
friends in your social media circles. You can use Edge’s reading mode to
clearly view the content on the pages that interest you (skipping the ads
and formatting that are distracting).

• Chapter 10, “Staying in Touch (and in Sync) with Windows 10,” walks you
through the dramatic makeover of the Mail app and helps you set up
the People app and learn how to add contact information for friends
and family. You’ll also learn about the Calendar app and find out how to
use Skype to stay in touch with those on your Contacts list. This chapter
also introduces the new My People hub, which you can use to keep close
those contacts whom you regularly communicate with throughout the
day.
 What You’ll Find in This Book 7

• Chapter 11, “Bringing Out Your Inner Artist with Photos and Paint 3D,”
introduces you to tools in the Windows Photos app and showcases the
new Paint 3D app and the Remix 3D community. These fun and creative
tools take artistry to a whole new level by enabling you to design, create,
and place 3D designs into different landscapes and perspectives.

• Chapter 12, “Getting Your Groove on with Favorite Music and Movies,”
shows you the ins and outs of the Windows 10 popular music service.
You learn how to find the artists and albums you like, download music,
play it the way you like, create playlists, and more. The chapter also intro-
duces the Groove Music Service, explains how to create custom radio
stations, and shows you how to play your favorite songs—by voice com-
mand—from the Windows 10 Lock screen. In addition, this chapter also
shows you how to find, save, and watch your favorite shows and movies
using Windows 10.

• Chapter 13, “Entertainment for the Gamer in You,” uncovers the exciting
new features in gaming. After a focus on basics—finding the game you
want to play, launching it, and managing game play settings—you learn
about game broadcasting with Beam, working with the new Game bar,
turning on game mode to optimize your experience, and even recording
audio and video while you play.

• Chapter 14, “Caring for Your Computer and Updating Windows,” gives you
some basic pointers on how to regularly back up your files, update your
copy of Windows, and use Windows 10 system tools to improve your
computer’s performance and clean up your hard drive. In Windows 10
Creators Update, you have more control over how and when Windows
is updated; this chapter shows you how to make that call. You also learn
about the updates to Windows Narrator (now with Braille support).

The chapters are organized so that you can jump in and read about whatever
interests you most, or you can choose to go through the book sequentially.
Along the way are tips, notes, and two kinds of sidebars: Go Further, which
gives you additional information about getting more from the topic at hand,
and It’s Not All Good, which lists common pitfalls and trouble spots to watch
out for.
 8 Introduction

Let’s Begin
Because Windows 10 Creators Update is an upgrade, it is delivered to your
Windows 10 computer or device as part of the automatic update cycle. If
you’re curious and want to speed things along, you can choose Settings, click
Update & Security, and choose Windows Update. Click or tap the Check for
Updates button, and Windows 10 searches to see whether any new updates
are available for your system.

Which Version of Windows 10 Do I Have?

To find out which version of Windows 10 you’re currently using, click or tap
the Start button, click or tap Settings, choose System, and then click or tap
About. Scroll down to the Windows Specification settings to see which edition
of Windows 10 your computer is running, which version (1703 or later is the
Creators Update), and which OS build.

After the update is finished (it takes only a few minutes), you’re prompted
to restart your computer, and the update wraps up a few final details. Then,
when you see the colorful image of the Windows 10 Lock screen, the process
is complete. That’s where you begin exploring Windows 10 Creators Update.
This page intentionally left blank
The Start menu gives
you access to all your
favorite apps.

Tablet mode displays

the app tiles full
screen.
In this chapter, you learn how to get started
with Windows 10 and use touch, mouse, pen,
and keyboard to perform tasks such as

1
➔ Exploring Windows 10 Creators Update
➔ Getting around with the mouse, keyboard, and
pen
➔ Using touch in Windows 10
➔ Getting help in Windows 10
➔ Shutting down or putting Windows 10 to sleep

Hello, Windows 10!

If you’ve been one of those Windows 7 hold-outs (and you’re not
alone!), waiting to try the latest version of Microsoft’s Windows
operating system until it seemed to stabilize and the bugs appeared
to be worked out, now’s your chance. Windows 10 is all that the
developers of Windows 8 were hoping for when they first told us
about all the great flexibility, the features that enable us to focus on
what we love best, and the time-saving and click-reducing proce-
dures that we could accomplish with a flick of the finger.
Windows 10 Creators Update, the latest version of Microsoft’s inno-
vative approach to the popular Windows operating system, offers
new features designed to help you be more creative, stay safer (with
new privacy tools and enhanced security features), and have more
fun—with better browsing, expanded game support, 3D design
tools, enhanced music and media tools, and more.
This chapter introduces you to Windows 10 and spotlights some of
the new features you’ll work with as you use apps, save files, share
data, and enjoy media and games. This chapter also shows you how
to get help when you need it, put your computer to sleep (no sing-
ing required), and power down the system completely, when you’re
ready to do that.
 12 Chapter 1 Hello, Windows 10!

Exploring Windows 10 Creators Update

The latest version of Windows 10 will download and be installed to your com-
puter automatically, so there’s nothing you really need to do to get it.
The Windows Update utility restarts your computer after installation is com-
plete. When your computer restarts, Windows 10 quickly appears on your
screen, and it might walk you through a series of Express Setup questions
(which help the operating system get you connected to the Internet, set your
sharing preferences, and set up some surfing security features in Microsoft
Edge). One of those questions asks you how you want to use your OneDrive
account, which is the app that stores your files in the cloud. You can follow
along with the onscreen prompts to set things up to your liking. After you
finish answering all the necessary questions, Windows 10 lets you know that
you are ready to begin, and the Windows 10 Lock screen appears.

Logging In to Windows 10
As the operating system for your com-
puter, Windows 10 tells your hardware
how to interact with the apps you use
to communicate with others, work on
files, and enjoy media. That means that
when you press the Power button to start
your computer or device, Windows 10
launches and begins doing its work. The
following are the simple steps for starting
your computer and logging in:

1. Press the Power button on your PC

or device. After the system boots,
your Windows 10 Lock screen
appears, showing a beautiful land-
scape.

2. Click the screen (or swipe up if you

have a touch-capable computer) or
press any key to display the login
page.

3. Enter your password and either

press Enter or click the Submit 1 2
arrow (not shown). Windows 10
logs you in.
 Exploring Windows 10 Creators Update 13

Additional Sign-in Choices

Windows 10 offers other ways you can sign in if you like, although all you see
on the login page is the Microsoft account you used when you first set up
Windows 10. You can create a four-digit PIN for logging in; set up a feature
called Windows Hello to enable face, fingerprint, or iris recognition; or cre-
ate a picture password. You find out how to set up all these sign-in choices in
Chapter 6, “Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family.”

What Is a Microsoft Account?

During installation, Windows 10 asks you to log in to a Microsoft account, which
is an email address and password that enables you to log in to all kinds of
Microsoft services—such as OneDrive, Outlook.com, Skype, Xbox, and more—
using a single login. When you log in to your Windows 10 computer or device
using your Microsoft account, your preferences, such as screen backgrounds,
app tile preferences, and even your browser favorites, are synced across all the
devices you access using your Microsoft account.

Touring the Windows 10 Desktop

The screen you see when you first log in to Windows 10 depends on the type
of computer you’re using. If you’re using a desktop PC, you see the Windows
10 desktop, with a large Recycle Bin in the upper-left corner of the screen and
a set of tools (beginning with the Start button on the left) across the bottom
of the screen.
The Start button displays the Start menu, which gives you access to all the
apps on your computer or device (complete with live tiles). Just to the right
of the Start button, you see a search box that reads Type Here to Search. This
is also where you’ll find Cortana lurking, waiting to act on your voice com-
mands. You learn about the Start menu and discover how to set up Cortana
in Chapter 3, “Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks.”
In the middle of the taskbar, you see a few tools “pinned,” which means they
always stay visible as icons on the taskbar so you can find and use them eas-
ily. On the far right of the taskbar, you see the new My People hub icon, a
set of icons giving you the status of various settings on your computer. (For
example, the icons shown here represent network settings, volume, One-
Drive, and Windows Ink Workspace.) To the right of the date and time, you
see the Notifications tool, which lets you know when there are actions you
 14 Chapter 1 Hello, Windows 10!

need to take for Windows 10 or various apps on your system and shows you
the number of notifications that have arrived since you last checked.
Windows 10
Recycle bin desktop

Start
button
Search box Taskbar My People hub Notifications
(and Cortana) pinned icons System icons

Personalizing Your Start Experience

Windows 10 enables you to change the Start experience so it works in the
way you’re most comfortable with. By default, the Start menu appears when
you click or tap the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen. You can
customize the options that appear in the lower portion of the menu so that
the apps you use most often are within easiest reach. If you prefer, you can also
have Windows 10 start up with the Start screen in full-screen tablet mode. See
Chapter 3 to learn how to personalize your start experience.

Getting Started with Windows 10

As you begin exploring the new operating system, what are some of the
first things you’re likely to want to try? This section covers some of the big
features in Windows 10, which are described in more detail throughout this
book. (I’ve provided the chapter locations so you know where to go for more
information.)
 Exploring Windows 10 Creators Update 15

Live tiles continually show

updated information.

• Use the Windows 10 Start menu—The Start menu serves as a central

point, giving you lots of information about friends, colleagues, weather,
email, and more. You can see at a glance the number of email messages
you have, what your day’s appointments look like, and what the news
headlines are. You can also start your favorite apps, play media, change
system settings, and even customize the look of Windows, all from this
one screen. You find out how to tweak the look of the Start menu in
Chapter 5, “Personalizing Windows 10.”

• Launch and work with apps—The colorful tiles on the Windows 10 Start
menu represent apps, or programs, you can launch with a simple click or
tap. Some apps display “live” information and update on the Start menu,
and others don’t. You learn how to work with, organize, and get new
apps in Chapter 7, “Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps.”

Arrange Apps Your Way

You can easily group, name, and work with clusters of apps so that you can find
what you need quickly. You learn how to do this in Chapter 7.
16 Chapter 1 Hello, Windows 10!

• Browse the Web with Microsoft Edge—Microsoft Edge is Microsoft’s

web browser, which replaced Internet Explorer 11. (You can still down-
load and install IE if you want.) Edge integrates easily with the Cortana
digital assistant and is able to display personalized search information,
as well as support handwritten notes on web pages. Edge also includes
a reading mode that suppresses the display of formatting and advertise-
ments to make reading web content easier. You find out more about
using Microsoft Edge in Chapter 9, “Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft
Edge.”

• Stay in contact with friends and family—The new My People hub can
pull together your closest contacts so they are available throughout the
day for quick communication.

The My People hub keeps your

favorite contacts close.
 Exploring Windows 10 Creators Update 17

• Find new favorites in the Microsoft Store—The Microsoft Store is greatly

improved in Windows 10, including thousands of new apps and even more
ebooks, ready for downloading. In the Microsoft Store, you can find apps of
all kinds, free and otherwise. You find out more about browsing and shop-
ping in the Microsoft Store in Chapter 7.

• Listen to your favorite music or watch a show—The improved Groove

Music app, and the Groove Music Service, make it easy for you to play
your favorite songs in any combination you like. You can create your own
radio stations, playlists, and more. And the Movies & TV app gives you
a way to watch your favorite movies and shows—binge-watching at its
best.

• Go for a little gaming—More and more, in our hectic and stressful

world, a game gives us a way to quiet our minds and have some fun.
Windows 10 has a slate of games and new gaming features that make
gameplay easier and more seamless than ever. You can play solo or
broadcast your game and play along with friends.

New Windows 10 Game

bar in Xbox app
 18 Chapter 1 Hello, Windows 10!

• Use Windows 10 your way—In Windows 10, you can see all the apps
you have installed by scrolling through them in the Start menu. This is
similar to the All Programs functionality in the Windows 7 Start menu. All
the apps are all organized in alphabetical order. You can scroll through
the list by dragging the scrollbar and then clicking the app you want to
open.

Move to an App Quickly

If you’re scrolling through the apps list and want to move quickly to another
part of the alphabet, click or tap one of the alphabetical letters to display a grid
of letters, and then choose the beginning letter of the apps you want to see.
This action takes you directly to that letter in the list—no scrolling required.

Click or tap a Scroll through

letter to display the list to review
a letter grid. your apps.

Getting Around with the Mouse,

Keyboard, and Pen
If you’re using a desktop computer or a docked tablet with a mouse and
keyboard, chances are that mouse techniques are old hat and you know your
way around a keyboard. What you might not know, however, are some of the
particulars of Windows 10. That’s what this section is all about.
 Getting Around with the Mouse, Keyboard, and Pen 19

Using the Mouse

The mouse can get you anywhere you
want to go in Windows 10, and the
mouse has been our trusted naviga-
tional companion for decades now. Even
tablet users often attach a “real” mouse
and keyboard when they sit down to do
serious work on their computers.

In Windows 10, you use the mouse for

all the common tasks: starting apps,
finding and opening files, choosing
program settings, working with media,
playing games, and so on. Here are
some of the common techniques you
might already be using: 2 3

1. Click the Start button to display

the Start menu.

2. Use the vertical scrollbar to scroll

through available apps.

3. Right-click the app tile in the Start

menu to display a context menu
for that app. From there, you can
click the option you want to use.

4. Click an app name or an app tile

1 4
to launch the app.

Selecting Multiple Items

In File Explorer, you can use the mouse and keyboard together to select mul-
tiple items at once. If you want to choose several files in a folder, for example,
you can click the first item and then press and hold the Shift key and click
the last item you want to select. All items between the two clicked items are
selected.
If you want to select multiple items that aren’t next to each other, click the
first item and then press and hold the Ctrl key; then click all the other items
you want to include.
 20 Chapter 1 Hello, Windows 10!

Mouse Shortcuts for Navigating Windows 10

To do this: Do this:
Unlock your Lock screen. Click any mouse button.
Scroll through the Start menu. Click All Apps and drag the vertical scrollbar on
the right side of the left column in the menu.
Show “power user menu.” Right-click the Windows 10 Start button.
Display app context menu on the Start menu. Right-click the app tile.
Change or personalize settings for your Right-click anywhere on the desktop and click
Windows 10 desktop. Display Settings or Personalize.
Display Task view. Click the Task View icon in the Quick Launch
area of the desktop taskbar.

Getting to the Menu

If you know what you’re looking for in Windows 10 and want to get right to it,
you might enjoy using what some people are calling the “power user menu” that
appears when you right-click the Start button. You can also display it by pressing
Windows+X on your computer keyboard or your tablet’s onscreen keyboard.
The list of features includes many of those you might have seen in the Win-
dows Control Panel previously: Apps and Features, Mobility Center, Power
Options, Device Manager, Run, and more. Click the feature you want to use,
or, to hide the feature list, tap or click anywhere outside the list.

Right-click the Start

button to display
the power user
menu.
 Getting Around with the Mouse, Keyboard, and Pen 21

Using the (Real) Keyboard

For some of the things you’ll do in Windows 10, you’ll want a real, live key-
board. Sure, you can type a quick memo or answer an email message on your
tablet using the onscreen keyboard. But when you need to write a 10-page
report for a departmental meeting or you have lots of work to do storyboard-
ing the next team presentation, chances are you’ll want to use a traditional
keyboard with real keys to press.
In addition to using touch and the mouse, you can use your keyboard for
navigating in Windows 10. When you use your keyboard to navigate the Start
menu, move among apps, and manage windows, you use special keys, short-
cut key combinations, and function keys.

• The Windows key, commonly located on the lowest row of your keyboard
on the left side between the Ctrl and Alt keys, takes you back to the Start
menu no matter where you are in Windows 10.

• You can use the Page Up and Page Down keys as well as the arrow keys
to move among apps if you’re on the Windows 10 Start screen.

• You can use the Tab key to move from option to option.

• You can press key combinations (such as Ctrl and the letter assigned to a
specific menu option) to perform operations.
 22 Chapter 1 Hello, Windows 10!

Keyboard Shortcuts for Navigating Windows 10

To do this: Do this:
Unlock your Lock screen. Press any key on the keyboard.
Display the Settings app. Press Windows+I.
Open the Search window. Press Windows+Q.
Display the Start menu. Press the Windows key.
Lock Windows 10. Press Windows+L.
Display power user commands. Press Windows+X.
Display Task view. Press Windows+Tab.
Cycle through open apps. Press Alt+Tab.
Create a new desktop in Windows 10. Press Windows+Ctrl+D.
Switch between desktops in Windows 10. Press Windows+Ctrl+left arrow (or right arrow).
Close the current desktop. Press Windows+Ctrl+F4.
Minimizes an app. Press Windows+Down.
Maximizes an app. Press Windows+Up.
Open Control Panel. Press Windows+X+P.

A Keyboard Is a Keyboard Is a Keyboard…Right?

Depending on the type of computer you are using, you might notice some
differences in the ways certain keys appear on your keyboard. The keyboard
mentioned here is a “basic” keyboard layout. Your keyboard might or might
not have a separate numeric keypad, function keys across the top, and a set of
cursor-control keys that are separate from the alphanumeric keys. Additionally,
you may notice that your Delete key or Backspace key is in a slightly different
place than on other keyboards you see. Take the time to learn where to find the
common keys on your Windows 10 keyboard; when you know the lay of the
land, finding the right key at the right time will be second nature.
 Getting Around with the Mouse, Keyboard, and Pen 23

Using a Touch Keyboard 1 2

If you’re using a touch device, you
might not plan to type whole books
on your onscreen keyboard, but it’s
nice to know you can use it when
you need it. Windows 10 helps you
with your typing by adding auto-text
that offers word suggestions as you
type; it also extends the function of
the keyboard by including child keys
that appear on the keyboard when
you press and hold a specific key. 3
This gives you easy access to the keys
you need.

Begin by launching an app that 4

requires you to type something on
your tablet. For example, you might
open the Mail app and start a new
message. Then follow these steps to
display and work with the Windows
10 touch keyboard:

1. Tap in the To area. The full key-

board appears along the bottom
half of your screen.
2. Type the email address of the per-
son to whom you want to send
the message.

3. Tap in the subject line and use the

keyboard to enter the topic of the
message.

4. Press and hold a key to display

child keys for some keys—for
example, vowels that can have
different accents, such as the vow-
els a, e, i, o, and u, and punctua-
tion characters such as the period
(.), apostrophe (’), and question
mark (?).
 24 Chapter 1 Hello, Windows 10!

Choosing a Keyboard
Windows 10 gives several types of
touch keyboards to use, and you can
easily change the keyboard as you’re
using it. The standard keyboard
offers all the basic keys you need and
gives you the option of switching
to show numbers and punctuation;
the thumbs keyboard groups the
keyboard on both sides of the screen
so you can type with your thumbs
on a tablet or other touch device.
The extended keyboard displays all
alphanumeric keys, as well as punc-
tuation keys, Alt, Ctrl, and more.

1 2
Child Keys Aren’t Available
on the Extended Keyboard
If you want to use child keys on
your onscreen keyboard, choose
the standard or thumbs keyboard,
because child keys don’t appear
when you’re using the extended
keyboard.

1. If you want to change the type

of keyboard displayed, tap the 3
keyboard button in the upper-left
corner of the keyboard.

2. A set of four choices appears. You

can choose from the onscreen
touch keyboard, a thumbs key-
board, a drawing tablet, or the
standard keyboard. Tap the key-
board you want to use.

3. You can also change your

keyboard settings by tapping
Language Preferences, Typing
Settings, or Keyboard Tips.
 Getting Around with the Mouse, Keyboard, and Pen 25

Using Speech with the

Keyboard
2
In Windows 10 Creators Update, you also
can dictate your content right into the app
open on the screen. In the upper-left cor-
ner of the touch keyboard, the Microphone
icon is the tool you need.
1. With the touch keyboard displayed,
tap the Microphone icon. A red
Listening indicator appears.

2. Speak the text you want to add. It

appears at the cursor position.

3. When you’re finished entering text, 1

say “Stop dictating,” and the red indi-
cator disappears.

Using a Pen with the

Keyboard
Are you getting the feeling that the
keyboard isn’t just for typing anymore?
Developers know you’re likely to use
Windows 10 on a variety of computers
and devices (at least, they hope you will),
so having more than one input option is
essential. If you find it easier to handwrite
1
notes or other content, you can use your
pen to input information in common
Windows 10 apps.

1. Choose the writing pad in the

keyboard options. The writing pad
appears in place of the traditional
keyboard.

2. Use your pen to write the content

you want to add. Windows 10 con-
verts your handwriting to typed text.

3. When you’re finished, tap the check

2 3
mark.
 26 Chapter 1 Hello, Windows 10!

Repositioning the Keyboard

We all have our preferences for the way we like to type. Some prefer larger
keys that click; others have gotten used to texting on smartphones and spell at
lightning speed on the smallest of keys. Windows 10 gives you a new option for
tweaking your touch keyboard; now you can reposition the keyboard and move
it to any point onscreen that makes sense to you.

You might want to move the keyboard, for example, when you’re adding data
to a worksheet with information you want to show at the bottom of your dis-
play; or perhaps you’re trying to keep a chart and a table in view while you add
a note about the chart’s contents.

Using your finger or pen, drag the top of the touch keyboard in the direction
you desire. Release the keyboard in the new location.

Displaying the Emoji

Keyboard
As part of the touch keyboard,
Windows 10 includes a new emoji
keyboard that enables you to add
fun and flair to some of your apps.
Note that not all apps are able to
make use of the new keyboard, but
for the ones that can, you can to
choose from a sweeping range of
emojis in many colorful categories, as
well as 25 different languages.

1. On the touch keyboard, tap the

smiley face button. The emoji key-
board appears.
1
2. Click the category of emoji you
want to see.
3
3. Choose the emoji you want to
insert into your app.

2
 Using Touch in Windows 10 27

>>>Go Further
SAY WHAT?!
Windows 10 includes the Narrator accessibility feature, which reads the screen
so people with visual challenges can interact successfully with Windows 10.
Narrator has been around for several incarnations of Windows and offers natural-
sounding voices. (You can choose from three PC voices—two female voices and
one male voice.) You can also control the speed at which Windows narrates your
experience, which can be helpful if you’re just learning how to use voice to navi-
gate the operating system.

You can turn on Narrator as soon as you open the Lock screen, before you even
log in to your computer. Simply tap the Ease of Use button in the lower-right
corner of the login screen to begin the narration. You can also turn on Narrator
by pressing and holding the Windows key and tapping the Volume Up button on
your keyboard.

Microsoft Edge includes Narrator support as well, so users can listen to web con-
tent, understand links, and make choices about commands on web pages.

Using Touch in Windows 10

Because Windows 10 is designed to go with you no matter what device you
might be using—computer, tablet, smartphone—the operating system
needs to be able to interact with users in a variety of ways. One of the visions
behind the redesign of Windows years ago was the intention to make the
software touch-friendly, so people could seamlessly do what they wanted to
do across formats.
If you have a smartphone, you already know about touch. You tap the surface
of your phone to dial a friend’s number, you swipe through photos, you pinch
a web page to make the print larger (so you can read it on that small screen).
Windows even includes a “hands-free mode” for apps that support it.
If you use Windows 10 on a tablet or touch-enabled screen, you’ll notice you
can interact with Windows much the way you use your smartphone. How-
ever, for good measure (and for those readers who don’t go for the smart-
phones), this section introduces the gestures you’re likely to use most often
in Windows 10 and takes a look at the new gestures added into this release.
 28 Chapter 1 Hello, Windows 10!

Using Single Tap

You tap the screen to launch an app
on the Windows 10 Start screen,
select a setting, or choose an item to 2
display.

1. Launch Windows 10 on your tab-

let, and the Start screen appears.
2. Tap once quickly in the center of
the tile or icon. If you tapped an
application on the Start screen,
the program opens; if you tapped
a setting or an option, the item
is selected or displays additional
choices, if applicable.
1

Tap and Hold

In a mouse world, you can display a 1
context menu of options for differ-
ent objects (files, folders, and apps)
by right-clicking them. In the touch
world, the equivalent of that right-
click is a tap-and-hold gesture:

1. Tap and hold an app tile. Two

circles appear in the upper- and
lower-right corners of the tile.

2. Tap the lower circle displaying

the three dots. This displays the 2
context menu. Tap the option you
want to apply.
 Using Touch in Windows 10 29

Swiping Right
The swipe-right gesture enables you
to swipe open apps in from the left
edge of the screen and display them
in Task view. If you don’t have any
additional apps open, there will be
2
no app to swipe in. You can also use
the swipe-left gesture when you’re
using Microsoft Edge to browse the
Web.

1. Display the Windows 10 Start

screen on your tablet.

2. Touch a point toward the left side

of the Start screen and drag to
the right. Your open apps appear
as thumbnails in the center of the
display. 1

More About Task View

You learn more about working with
apps in Task view in Chapter 3.

Swiping Left
You use the swipe-left gesture to
display the Notifications panel in
Windows 10.

1. Display the Windows Start screen

on your tablet.

2. Touch the screen close to the

right edge and drag in to the left.
The Notifications panel scrolls in
from the right.
1 2
 30 Chapter 1 Hello, Windows 10!

Swiping Up and Down

You’ll use the swiping up and down
gesture when you want to work with
different apps. You also swipe up
and down when you are scrolling
through apps on the Windows 10
Start screen.
1
1. To swipe up on the screen, press
and hold and drag the display
upward.

2. To swipe down, touch the screen

and swipe down toward the bot-
tom of the screen.

Swipe Down to Close

One of the big criticisms of the
early release of Windows 8 was
that initially Windows develop- 2
ers didn’t provide a way to close
apps because Windows 8 actually
suspended apps not in use (which
meant that technically you didn’t
need to close them). In Windows
10, developers added a Close box
in the expected place (the upper-
right corner of the app window)
so that when you want to close
the app, you can tap or click the
Close box. To display the title bar
(which includes the Close box),
swipe down from the top of the
screen.
 Using Touch in Windows 10 31

Using Pinch Zoom

The pinch-zoom gesture enables you
to enlarge and reduce the size of the
content on the screen. When you
pinch your fingers together, the con-
tent reduces in size. When you want
to enlarge an area of the screen, you
2
use your fingers to expand the area,
and the screen magnifies along with
your gesture.

1. Display the app you want to use.

2. Reduce the size of the content

displayed by placing your thumb
and forefinger on the screen and
“pinching” the area together.

3. Enlarge an area of the screen by

placing your thumb and forefin-
1
ger together on the screen and
expanding the distance between
them (not shown).

Semantic Zoom
You might see this feature
referred to as semantic zoom, so
named because it enables you
to magnify a specific region of
the display without disturbing
other parts of the screen. If the
app you’re using was designed
for Windows 10, chances are that
it supports the pinch-zoom ges-
ture. That means you can use two
fingers to change the size of the
content displayed on the screen.
 32 Chapter 1 Hello, Windows 10!

>>>Go Further
NEW GESTURES IN WINDOWS 10
Early on in the development of Windows 10, developers announced several new
gestures that enable Windows 10 users to take better advantage of trackpad
capabilities. The Mac OS has had similar gestures for some time, but Microsoft
has come up with simplified versions. Note that not all trackpads will have the
capacity to allow these gestures, but if your system does, you might find these
handy:

• Three-finger swipe down—You can hide open windows and display the
Windows desktop by swiping down with three fingers on the trackpad.

• Three-finger swipe up—If you have recently hidden your windows (as
described in the previous gesture), you can return your windows to the
screen by using three fingers to swipe up on the trackpad. If you have not
previously hidden your windows, swiping up in this way displays Task view.

• Three-finger swipe right and left—You can page through open apps
(similar to using Alt+Tab to move through open apps) by swiping in from
the right or left using three fingers on your trackpad.

Getting Help in Windows 10

No matter where you are in Windows 10 or what you’re doing, help is always
within reach. Depending on the type of help you need—maybe just a quick
refresher on the task you haven’t done in a while—the best place to begin is
the Search box on your Windows 10 taskbar.
 Getting Help in Windows 10 33

3 4
1. Display the Start screen by click-
ing or tapping the Windows but-
ton.

2. Enter a word or phrase that repre-

sents what you need help with.

3. Click or tap a right arrow to dis-

play help options for the topic
you choose.
4. Click a category to determine
what kind of answer you’d like.

5. Choose to see a larger list of 1 2 5

search results.

Using the Tips App 3 2

The Tips app is another helpful tool
in Windows 10 that is designed to
give you the answers you need as
you work with your operating system
and apps. You’ll find the app under
T in the All Apps list in your Start
menu, or you can just type Tips in
the Search box and Windows 10 finds
it for you.

1. Click or tap the Windows button

to display the Start menu.

2. Scroll to the apps beginning with

the letter T.

3. Click or tap Tips.

1
 34 Chapter 1 Hello, Windows 10!

4. Click the type of tips you’d like to

4
see.

5. Click or tap a tile to find out more

about the topic.

Don’t See What You’re

Looking for?
If you scroll through tips but
aren’t seeing anything particularly
helpful, click in the Search box
at the top of the left column and
type a word or phrase describ-
ing what you’d like to know
5
more about. You might enter, for
example, how to set a reminder or
adding a new user account.

Shutting Down or Putting Windows 10 to

Sleep
Another common task you might want to do regularly with Windows 10 is
turn off your computer. In previous versions of Windows, Microsoft hid the
Power tool from view, but in Windows 10 it has been returned to a prominent
place. If you’re using the mouse, you’ll find the Power tool toward the bottom
of the Start menu; if you’re using tablet mode, the Power tool appears in the
lower-left corner of the screen.

Sleep Tight
With Windows 10 Creators Update, you can rely on Cortana to do the heavy lift-
ing for you. If your computer is on and idle, you can simply say, “Hey, Cortana!”
and the personal digital assistant awakens. You can then tell Cortana to “shut
down” or “sleep,” and the computer does what you request. You find out how to
set up Cortana to carry out this task for you in Chapter 4, “Using Cortana: Your
Personal Digital Assistant.”
 Shutting Down or Putting Windows 10 to Sleep 35

Goodnight, Windows 10 3
When you’re going to be away from your
computer for a period of time, but you aren’t
ready to turn everything off for the day, you
can put your computer in Sleep mode to
conserve energy and protect your files and
programs while you’re away.

1. Click or tap the Start button to display

the Start menu.

2. Click or tap the Power tool toward the

bottom of the menu. A list of options
appears: Sleep, Shut Down, Restart. 1 2
3. Click or tap Sleep.

Shutting Down Windows 10

Use the Shut Down tool when you’re ready to
turn your computer completely off.

1. On the Start menu, click or tap Power. 2

2. Click or tap Shut Down. If you have
any open, unsaved files, Windows 10
prompts you to save them before shut- 1
ting down.

Wake Up, Little Fella

One of the great things about Sleep mode is that it’s designed to help your
computer spring back to life quickly as soon as you’re ready. So even though it’s
a little distressing to see everything fade to black so quickly after you tap Sleep,
you’ll be pleased to know a simple tap of the Power button on your PC brings
everything back to full wakefulness almost instantly.

Starting Over
You have one more option when you tap or click Power. If you want to restart
your computer, you can tap or click Restart; Windows 10 powers down and then
starts again. You might be asked to restart your computer after you install an
app or make a system setting change.
 Windows 10 discovers
and adds your devices
automatically.

You can access

Settings from the
Start menu.
This chapter helps you get your computer
and devices ready to use with the following
tasks:

2
➔ Adding devices in Windows 10
➔ Connecting to wireless networks
➔ Linking your phone to Windows 10
➔ Managing your PC power
➔ Resetting Windows 10

Connecting and Managing

Your Desktop and Devices
One of the biggest stories about Windows 10 has been a long time
coming. The early promise was that the operating system would
provide a consistent look and feel across all your computers and
devices. The Windows 10 Creators Update takes a big step in that
direction, creating a sense of consistency whether you are using a
computer, a tablet, or a phone.
Windows 10 adjusts easily and instantly when you undock your
tablet and go. You might have been using Windows 10 as a desktop
computer, but when you undock the tablet and hit the road,
Windows 10 automatically goes into tablet mode, offering the same
functionality presented in the best way for the device you’re taking
along.
The fact that the software automatically takes care of this for you
means that you’ll be able to focus on the tasks at hand: calling up
a presentation, navigating your notes, and sharing important data
with clients or colleagues as needed. The screens in each format
have differences but are very similar to each other, giving you
 38 Chapter 2 Connecting and Managing Your Desktop and Devices

access to the same basic tools in different screen configurations built for each
device.
Windows 10 helps you easily prepare your PC and get things up and running.
Much of what happens behind the scenes doesn’t need your involvement at
all. For example, if you’re using Windows 10 on a computer with a keyboard
and a mouse, Windows 10 recognizes that and provides you with setup
options related to that usage scenario. If you’re using Windows 10 on a touch
device, it enables touch features so that the touch keyboard and other touch
features are within reach in all the tasks and tools you use in Windows 10.
When you log in with your Microsoft Account, your preferences for theme,
background, user preferences, and even browser favorites are saved so that
you have a fairly consistent experience across multiple devices. What’s more,
with the new Link Phone category in Settings, you can link your phone to
Windows 10 no matter which type of phone—Windows Phone, Android, or
iPhone—you are using. That way, you can easily access and share your favor-
ite music, photos, videos, and more—no matter where they reside.
You can also set up other devices to work with your Windows 10 computer.
This might include a tablet (one or many), your Xbox, or something else.
Windows 10 makes it easy to add devices and get them working smoothly
with the operating system. This chapter helps you explore those steps and
get things ready to run with Windows 10.

Before You Proceed

This chapter focuses on some simple setup tasks for your Windows PC that I
think you’ll want to get into right away. However, if you’re having a difficult
time navigating your way around, consider jumping ahead to Chapter 3,
“Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks,” and then come back when you’re
up to speed.

Adding Devices in Windows 10

Windows 10 includes an autodiscovery feature that scans for all devices con-
nected to your PC or your network. When Windows 10 detects those devices,
it then connects to those printers, TVs, Xbox systems, and more. This means
Windows 10 might be able to find and install all your computer peripherals
automatically, and you won’t need to do anything at all! Wouldn’t that be
nice?
 Adding Devices in Windows 10 39

The first step involves using Settings to see which devices Windows 10 has
already discovered and added to your system. You can then add a device if
you have one that isn’t included on the generated list or remove devices that
were installed but that you are no longer using.

Viewing Installed
Devices
You can take a look at the devices
2
Windows 10 has found and installed
automatically as part of your setup.
And then you can add a device or
remove devices that were added but
that you no longer need. To display
the list, follow these steps:

1. Click the Start button to display

the Windows 10 Start menu. (You
learn more about the Start button
1 3
in Chapter 3.)

2. Choose Settings.

3. Select Devices in the top row of

the Settings window.

4. Review the devices listed in the

center of the window.

Adding a Device
If Windows 10 missed one of the devices
you think should be on the device list,
you can scan again to see whether the 4
device is discoverable. Before you tap
or click Add Bluetooth or Other Device,
be sure the device is connected to
your computer or your home network
and turned on. After you select Add
Bluetooth or Other Device, Windows
10 scans your computer and shows any
found devices in a pop-up list. You can
then select the item you want to add to
the Devices list.
 40 Chapter 2 Connecting and Managing Your Desktop and Devices

Connecting Unrecognized Devices

If you connect your device to Windows 10 and the operating system doesn’t
recognize the device you added, Windows 10 displays a message that you need
to finish the setup in the Action Center. Click the link displayed in the message
to go to the Action Center, and follow the steps to download and install the
files needed to get your device running smoothly.

Removing a Device
You can remove a device you no
longer need from the Devices list.
Having extra devices in the Devices
list doesn’t do any harm, but if you
want to keep the list short so you can
easily find what you need, you might
want to take any unnecessary items
off the list.

1. Click the device you want to

remove from the list.

2. If you’re sure you want to remove

the device, click the Remove
Device button. Windows 10
removes the item from the list.
1 2

Troubleshoot USB
Connections
Typically you’re able to plug in a
device using your USB port, and
Windows 10 takes it from there.
On the off chance that something
happens and the USB port isn’t
responding properly, Windows 10
notifies you. To view the setting
or turn it off, display the Devices
page of Settings, click USB, and
uncheck the check box in the list
that will stop connected devices.
 Connecting to Wireless Networks 41

>>>Go Further
TROUBLESHOOTING HARDWARE DEVICES
As computers have gotten easier to use, by and large they have become self-
corrective. Most of the time, your printer, router, scanner, camera, and drawing
tablet function the way they’re supposed to. You plug them in to your Windows
10 PC, Windows finds the right drivers, and they’re ready for you to use. But once
in a while, devices have trouble. Your printer doesn’t print anything. Your router
is blinking, but you have no Internet connection. Windows doesn’t seem to be
recognizing your fitness tracker. When that happens, you can use one of the
Windows 10 troubleshooting tools to help you discover and fix the problem.

To access the troubleshooter, click the Search box to the right of the Start button
and type troubleshoot; this will bring up a list of results. Click Troubleshoot in
the results list to return the Troubleshoot screen in the Update & Security cat-
egory of Settings. Next, click Hardware and Devices in the list in the center and
then click Run the Troubleshooter.

Windows 10 now attempts to diagnose your PC’s problems. When a fix is found,
click Apply This Fix to apply the fix or Skip This Fix to skip the current suggested
fix and have Windows 10 continue troubleshooting. When the troubleshooter
has finished, Windows 10 displays a list of problems it was unable to fix auto-
matically. From here you can either click Explore Additional Options to see extra
information or click Close to close the troubleshooter.

Connecting to Wireless Networks

In today’s world, we’re almost always connected. We go from the corporate
network at work, to Bluetooth or mobile connectivity on the road, to Wi-Fi at
the neighborhood coffee shop. Windows 10 makes the change right along
with you, discovering networks in your area and giving you the capability
to connect (if you have the password or network key, of course) by tapping
the connection you want to make. You can easily switch among networks by
using the Network & Internet tool in Settings.
 42 Chapter 2 Connecting and Managing Your Desktop and Devices

Connecting to an
Available Network
Now in Windows 10 you can connect to
available wireless networks by using the
Networks tool in the notifications area in the
lower-right corner of your screen. You’ll find
the tool to the left of the Volume tool in the
system tray (on the right side of the taskbar).
When you click or tap the Networks tool,
Windows 10 displays a list of the wireless
networks in your vicinity. You can then con-
nect to the network of your choice by select-
ing it and entering a password if necessary.
3 1 2
1. Click the Networks tool in the notifi-
cations area on the right side of the
status bar to display the list of avail-
able networks.

2. Click the network you want to con-

nect to, and click Connect. If you
want to disconnect from a network to
which you’re connected, tap or click
the Disconnect button.

3. If you want Windows 10 to connect to

the network automatically whenever
it’s present, click or tap the Connect
Automatically check box.

Other Network Options

While you’re working in the Network &
Internet Settings window, you can also
extend the network connections currently
in place for your Windows 10 PC or device.
You can scroll down to Change Your
Network Settings and click HomeGroup to
set up a network group where other com-
puters and devices (including your Xbox
360 and Xbox One) can access files and
media on your computer.
 Linking Your Phone to Windows 10 43

Linking Your Phone to Windows 10

To help you work seamlessly no matter which device you’re using at the
moment, Microsoft has included a new Phone category in Windows 10 set-
tings that enables you to link your phone to Windows. This means you’re able
to share files among your devices and easily pick up where you left off when
you’re switching from laptop to phone to tablet and back again.
This is especially good news for you if you’re an Android or iOS user because
when you add the Microsoft Apps tool to your mobile device (Windows 10
will send you a link to that download when you link your phone in Settings),
you’re able to carry your work easily between devices.

Adding Your Phone to

Windows 10
1. Click or tap the Start button to
reveal the Start menu.

2. Click or tap Settings.

3. Click or tap Phone. 1 2 3

4. Click or tap Add a Phone. A dialog
box opens, asking you to enter
your mobile phone number.

4
 44 Chapter 2 Connecting and Managing Your Desktop and Devices

5. Type the mobile number of the

phone you want to add.

6. Click or tap Send. Windows 10

sends a text message to your
Android or iOS phone that
includes a link you can follow to
download the Microsoft Apps
tool.

7. Click Close to finish adding the

phone.

7 5 6

Hello, Windows Phone

If you are using a Windows Phone, Windows 10 Creators Update recognizes it automatically
if you have logged into the phone using your Microsoft Account.

You can see whether your phone is linked to your Microsoft account by choosing Phone
in the Settings window and then clicking Manage All Devices Linked to Your Microsoft
Account. Windows 10 shows you all the devices currently linked to your account and gives
you the means to change them if you’d like. You also automatically find your Windows Phone
listed under This PC in File Explorer when the phone is connected to your computer. That
means you can easily access files—such as photos, music, and more—stored on your phone,
in the same way you would access any flash drive or other device connected to your system.

Where’s the Windows Phone App?

Now, because Windows 10 Creators Update automatically integrates support for
Windows Phone, you no longer need a special app to manage the connection for you. So,
the Windows Phone App went away with this latest update because it’s no longer needed.

Managing Your PC Power

Thankfully, as computer makers continue to improve the hardware they offer,
our computers and devices are becoming more energy efficient. This is good
not only for our bank accounts, but also for our planet. We want the batteries
in our laptops, tablets, and smartphones to last as long as possible. The more
power we conserve, the more efficient our devices become, the longer our
power lasts—and that’s a good thing.
 Managing Your PC Power 45

One thing we’ve learned about “green tech” is that small changes can make
a big difference. Changing the brightness of your screen or turning off Wi-Fi
and roaming when possible can save a lot of behind-the-scenes processing.
Even reducing energy consumption on your home desktop PC can have tan-
gible benefits, such as reducing your electric bill. Those simple techniques,
added to steps such as thinking through what happens when you close your
laptop cover, can add up to smarter energy use for us all.
Windows 10 is the most energy-efficient version of Windows yet, with care-
ful attention paid to apps that are in the foreground. Apps that cycle to the
background and go into suspended mode have no impact on power usage
at all. And because Windows 10 boots so efficiently, you won’t experience any
lag time while you wait for an app to load. That’s a big change from the days
you could push the power button and then go to the kitchen to get a cup of
coffee while waiting for your computer to boot.

Turning On the Battery Saver

The Battery Saver app in Windows 10 enables you to control how your com-
puter or device uses power. By default, Windows 10 turns on Battery Saver
mode when power gets to 20%; but you can change that if you want. You can
also adjust the way your computer or device is using power on the fly—that’s
something new with Windows 10 Creators Update.

You can check your power status easily by

clicking the Power tool in the system tray on
the right side of the taskbar. If your comput-
er is currently plugged in, the status shows 2 3
100% power. If your computer is using the
battery, the status of the battery, the esti-
mated amount of time remaining, and an
active link to Battery Settings appear.

1. Click the Power tool.

2. Review the battery status.

3. Adjust the slider to reflect whether

you would prefer to save battery or
have better performance.

4. Click Battery Settings to see addi-

tional options. 4 1
 46 Chapter 2 Connecting and Managing Your Desktop and Devices

5. Drag the Battery Saver slider if

you want to change the percent-
5 8
age at which the battery saver
goes into effect.

6. Enable the Battery Saver Status

Until Next Charge setting if you
want to put your computer into
Battery Saver mode until the next
time it is charged.

7. Uncheck the Lower Screen

Brightness While in Battery Saver
check box if you want to turn
off the Battery Saver setting that
displays a lower percentage of 6 7 10 11
screen brightness. (This setting is
enabled by default.)

8. Click Battery Usage by App to

review how your various apps are
making use of your battery power.

9. Review how much battery life

your apps are using.

10. Choose whether you want to see

all apps or apps that have been
running within a period of time
you specify.

11. Click an app that you want to

change.

12. Click to remove the check in the

Let Windows Decide When This
App Can Run in the Background
check box if you want to manually
control the use of battery power.

12 9
 Managing Your PC Power 47

Changing Your Power 2

Settings
You can also manage the way your com-
puter uses power by choosing the power
settings you want Windows 10 to use.
The Balanced power plan balances usage
with performance, and you can change
that balance as needed while you work.
Making changes is as simple as pointing
and clicking.

1. Click in the Search box and type

power plan.
2. Click Choose a Power Plan in the
results list. The Power Options win-
dow appears.
3. Click Tell Me More About Power
Plans to learn more about what
goes into a power plan.
4. Drag the slider to change the
screen brightness. (The lower the
brightness, the more power you are
saving.)
5. Click Change Plan Settings to
change the power settings of your
current plan. 1

3 5
Screen’s So Bright I Gotta Wear
Shades
An easy way to adjust the brightness
on the fly in Windows 10 is to click the
power tool in the system tray and click
the Brightness control in the lower-left
corner of the pop-up box. Clicking the
tool cycles through brightness settings in
increments of 25; for example, if you click
the tool when the setting is 100% bright- 4
ness, the setting drops to 25%, and then
with each click it increases to 50% and
75% before returning to 100%.
 48 Chapter 2 Connecting and Managing Your Desktop and Devices

6. Choose when you want Windows

6 7
10 to turn off the display when
your computer is not in use. You
can choose different settings
for battery power or plugged-in
mode.

7. Select when you want the com-

puter to go to sleep after a period
of non-use.

8. Adjust the sliders to the level of

brightness you want for battery or 8 9
plugged-in mode.

9. Click Save Changes.

Wait, Reverse That

If you change the power settings and
then have second thoughts and want
to undo your changes, you can click the
Restore Default Settings for This Plan
link that appears in the same window
where you modify the plan settings.
Windows 10 returns the plan to its
default settings.

Resetting Windows 10
We all know—only too well—that computers sometimes have their off days.
Things slow to a crawl. Your apps hang. Programs aren’t launching the way
they should.
If you’re having problems consistently, Windows 10 gives you a tool that can
make things better quickly and easily. Now, instead of crossing your fingers
and rebooting—or perhaps arbitrarily choosing a Restore Point and hoping
your journey back in time will fix the trouble you’re having—you can use
Windows Reset to refresh your Windows 10 installation without wiping away
any files or settings.
 Resetting Windows 10 49

>>>Go Further
HEADACHE-FREE RESETS
One of the big changes behind-the-scenes in Windows 10 is the way the operat-
ing system uses and releases storage space to make Windows 10 less draining on
hard drives and easier to reset if the computer experiences problems.

Now because of the more efficient way Windows 10 works in the background,
you’re able to use Reset if you encounter bizarre Windows 10 behaviors; the
operating system can rebuild the needed files quickly, and your system is up and
running much faster than it would have been in previous releases of Windows.

2
Resetting Your PC
If you find that a few of your apps
aren’t working the way they should,
or your computer has been behaving
unreliably, you can reset your com-
puter to restore the program files
and settings to their original state
without losing your files, media, and
settings.

1. Click the Start button to display

the Start menu.
2. Click Settings. 1
3. Select Update and Security.

3
 50 Chapter 2 Connecting and Managing Your Desktop and Devices

4. Click Recovery.
4 5
5. In the Reset This PC area, click the
Get Started button if you want
to reset your PC and reinstall
Windows. You can choose wheth-
er you want to keep your files or
have Windows remove them and
start over.

6. In the Advanced Startup area,

click Restart Now to start
Windows from a USB drive or
DVD, to change your startup set-
tings, or to restore your files from
a system image you’ve previously
saved.
6
Rolling Back Windows 10
You might see a third option
in the Recovery screen of the
Settings window: Go Back to the
Previous Version of Windows 10.
This choice will appear for you
only if you’ve recently installed
Windows 10; after 31 days, the
files in the Windows.old folder will
be overwritten and your previous
version of Windows is no longer
available. This option is helpful
if you have recently installed or
upgraded Windows 10 and are
having problems with the soft-
ware; rolling back the installed
version and reinstalling will hope-
fully clear the problems.
 Resetting Windows 10 51

>>>Go Further
USING THE WINDOWS MOBILITY CENTER
If you are looking for one central location where you can find the settings that
control the way you use your computer on the road, you can go to the Windows
Mobility Center. You display the center by clicking in the Search box on the
task bar and typing mobility. Tapping or clicking the app opens the Windows
Mobility Center window.

You can change options for Brightness, Volume, Battery Status, Screen
Orientation, External Display, Sync Center, and Presentation Settings in the
Windows Mobility Center. Simply tap or click the control of the item you want to
change and select your choice.
 Start Search and Task Microsoft Store File Notifications area
button Cortana view Explorer
Microsoft Edge

The Start screen in

Tablet mode
In this chapter, you learn how to find your
way around the Windows 10 desktop by per-
forming tasks such as

➔ Exploring the Windows 10 desktop

➔ Using Tablet mode
➔ Tailoring the Taskbar
➔ Working with windows
➔ Using Task view
➔ Working with Notifications and the Action Center
➔ Using Ink with Windows 10
3
➔ Creating and using multiple desktops

Accomplishing Windows 10
Essential Tasks
Perhaps it’s the mark of progressive software in our day and age:
Windows 10 anticipates the tools you will need before you need
them. Case in point: If you start Windows 10 on your traditional
computer or laptop, the operating system knows to display the
operating system in Desktop mode, with the Start menu available
behind the Windows Start button in the lower-left corner of your
screen. If you launch Windows 10 on your tablet or touch device,
such as the Surface 4, the software automatically displays Windows
10 in Tablet mode, with the Start screen optimized (with larger tiles
and more space) so you can easily get where you want to go using
a fingertip or pen. Whether you will be using Windows 10 on a desk-
top or a touch device—or a combination of both—there are a set of
essential tasks you will perform as you launch and use apps, orga-
nize your files, check your social media accounts, and communicate
with friends, family, and colleagues.
In this chapter, you find out how to do those basic tasks whether
you’re using a desktop computer or a touch device. You learn how
to navigate your way around the interface, work with the Start
menu, tweak the taskbar to suit your liking, work with program
windows, use a pen with Windows 10, and even create multiple
 54 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

desktops (which sounds complicated but isn’t). By the time you finish this
chapter, you will know much more about how to navigate the essentials of
Windows 10 so that you can get on to the fun stuff.

Exploring the Windows 10 Desktop

If you’re using a computer or device connected to a mouse or keyboard, your
version of Windows 10 launches directly to the Windows 10 desktop. If you
have used a version of Windows prior to Windows 8, you are likely to feel at
home here: The majority of the screen is open space, with the Recycle Bin in
the upper-left corner, the Start button in the lower-left corner, a search box
and taskbar (containing icons for the tools you use often) along the bottom,
and on the far right side, the notifications and system tray tools.

Learning About the Windows 10 Desktop

By default, the Windows 10 Desktop is designed to optimize your space on
the screen so you can find what you need easily and still have plenty of space
to work with your open applications. You’ll probably spend much of your
clicking time in the lower-left corner of the screen; this is where you find the
Start menu, the Search box, and the tools you’ll use regularly, such as Task
view, Microsoft Edge (Microsoft’s new browser), File Explorer, the Microsoft
Store, and any other apps you pin to the taskbar.

Recycle
Bin

The Start Search and Microsoft Store File Notifications

button displays Cortana Microsoft Edge Explorer area
the Start menu Taskbar
 Exploring the Windows 10 Desktop 55

• You’ll use the Start button as your command center in Windows 10,
launching apps, changing settings, accessing your social media, and
more.

• The Search box and Cortana give you two unique and connected ways
to find information and items on the Web, on your computer, or in your
schedule. Search by default aggregates results from both online and
off; Cortana is your personal digital assistant that can listen and act on
your voice commands, whether you want to locate information, set an
appointment, find a restaurant, or something else.

• Task view enables you to see thumbnails of all your open apps so that
you can move directly to the one you want to work with next.

• Microsoft Edge is Microsoft’s new browser, a state-of-the-art replacement

for Internet Explorer. Edge takes advantage of the latest web technolo-
gies to give you a smoother, cleaner browsing experience online.

• File Explorer is the familiar tool you use to organize and manage your
files and folders in Windows 10.

• The Microsoft Store is your source for finding and downloading apps of
all types, as well as media and more.

• The Notifications area includes the new Notifications tool and displays
the Action Center, where you can see any messages Windows 10 has for
you. This area also enables you to make changes to your computer on-
the-fly; for example, you can check how much battery life you have left,
adjust the volume of media playback, adjust your wireless settings, or
display the onscreen keyboard.

• The Recycle Bin is where all your deleted files and folders go; while they
are stored in the Recycle Bin you can still retrieve them for use.

What Is Cortana?
Cortana is Microsoft’s answer to a personal digital assistant, ready to help
you with voice commands, searches, reminders, and more. After you enable
Cortana, you can say something like, “Cortana, wake me up in 15 minutes,” and
lean back in your chair for a quick nap. Cortana shares space with the Search
tool in Windows 10, and it can assist you on PC, tablet, and phone (where
Cortana has resided for some time). Chapter 4, “Using Cortana: Your Personal
Digital Assistant,” covers more about Cortana.
 56 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

Using the Windows 10 Start Button

The Windows 10 Start button, in the lower-left corner of the screen, opens
the Start menu. Right away, you’ll notice that the Windows 10 Start menu
isn’t your ordinary menu. Microsoft added the best of Windows 8.1 (the
updating app tiles) to what folks liked best about the Windows 7 Start menu
(the list of programs and the ability to view All Programs with a click of the
mouse) and put them together in one customizable menu for Windows 10.
When you click the Start button, the menu opens. On the left side, you see
your profile at the top, followed by a list of Most Used apps. Beneath that list
is an alphabetical list of all the apps installed on your system.
On the right side of the Start menu, you see colorful app tiles. You can group
and arrange these app tiles in any way you like. You can also change the size
of some app tiles (if the app developer has enabled this feature). You learn
how to work with app tiles on the Start menu later in this chapter.

To work with the Windows 10 Start

menu, follow these steps:

1. Click the Start button. The Start 2 3

menu opens.

2. Review the apps in the Most Used

list. You can launch these apps by
clicking the one you want to use.

3. Move the cursor to an app tile.

The tile highlights. To open the
app, click the tile.

1
 Exploring the Windows 10 Desktop 57

>>>Go Further
FOR THE ADVENTUROUS: POWER TOOLS
If you know your way around an operating system and want a quick way to
access some of the tools you are accustomed to using, you can use the “power
user” list of tools to find what you need. To display the list, right-click the Start
menu, and a list of choices appears that take you into the inner workings of
Windows 10. You can choose from Apps and Features, Mobility Center, Power
Options, Event Viewer, System, Device Manager, Network Connections, Disk
Management, Computer Management, and Windows PowerShell.

You can also access the Task Manager, Settings, File Explorer, Search, and Run
from the power user tools. At the bottom of the list are options that enable you
to shut down the computer or sign out and change to a different desktop if
you’ve created multiple desktops in Windows 10. Each of these options takes you
to a setting or tool that is discussed at various points throughout this book. But
the power user tools list gives you quick access to the tools you might need if
you’re comfortable finding your own way around in Windows 10.

Using the Start Menu

As you can see, the Windows 10 Start menu tries to give you a simple, graphi-
cal way to find what you need while still offering the flexibility and function-
ality that get you there quickly. Whether you prefer lists or tiles, you can use
the items you prefer and skip the ones you don’t. That’s not a bad system.
Microsoft also knows that to really enjoy and use the operating system in
the way it’s intended, you need to be able to make it your own. So the Start
menu is highly customizable. You can add new app tiles to the Start menu;
you can change the size of tiles and control whether they update with new
information. You also can group similar tiles and add a group name if you like.
Within the colorful Start menu are several options for the ways you work with
your system. You might want to click an app tile to launch a program, point to
an item on the Most Used list to display a set of options, change to All Apps
view, or put your computer to sleep.
 58 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

Working with the Start 3 2

Menu
1. Click the Start button. The Start
menu appears.

2. Launch an app by clicking the

app’s tile.

3. Alternatively, click an item in the

apps list to launch the tool or app.

4. Open the Start menu again and

then click the alphabetical head-
ing to collapse the apps list so
you can move quickly to another
part of the list. 1 4

Jumping Through the Alphabet

To move quickly to a specific app, click the letter in the apps list. This collapses
all apps and displays an alphabetical grid so you can click the letter that the
app name starts with. After you click the letter, the apps in that letter expand,
and you can click the one you want to launch. Simple.

Resizing the Start Menu

Because you are likely to have more favorite apps than those you can display in
the Start menu panel by default, Windows 10 gives you the option of expand-
ing the tile area. Simply hover the mouse along the right edge of the open Start
menu. When the cursor changes to a double-headed arrow, click and drag the
menu to the right, expanding the width of the displayed tile area.
 Exploring the Windows 10 Desktop 59

Changing User and 3

Profile Information in
the Start Menu
The Start menu displays your
Microsoft account profile picture
to the left of the apps list. You can
interact with your account settings
directly by clicking your account pic-
ture and choosing Change Account
Settings. You can also lock your
computer or sign out at that point, if
you like.

1. Click the Start button to display

the Start menu.

2. Click your profile picture on the 1 2

left side of the Start menu. A
menu appears.
4
3. Click Change Account Settings
if you want to update your
Microsoft Account information.
This action takes you to the
Accounts page of the Settings
window, where you can update
your account picture or change
other items.

4. Click Lock to lock your computer

so no one else can access it. (To
unlock your computer, sign in
using your Microsoft account and
password.)

5. To sign out of your computer,

click Sign Out.

5
 60 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

Adding App Tiles to the 2 3

Start Menu
Although Windows 10 provides a
selection of app tiles for you on the
Start menu by default, you can add
new tiles to the Start menu and
arrange them in the way that makes
the most sense to you. This enables
you to tweak your Start menu so the
apps you use most often are easily
within your reach.

1. Click the Start button to show the

Start menu and the alphabetical
listing of all apps installed on your
computer.

2. Right-click the app you want to

add to the app tiles. An options
list appears.

3. Click Pin to Start to add the app

as an app tile on the Start menu.

Organizing Apps in Start Menu Folders

A new feature in Windows 10 Creators Update enables you to organize your
app tiles in a way that makes sense to you without giving up a lot of real estate
on the screen. You can group your apps by creating an app group.

Simply drag and drop one app tile on top of another, and the two will be stored
in the same tile on the menu. You’ll be able to see small thumbnail versions of
the app tiles together in the group. To choose the app you want, simply click or
tap the group, and it opens so you can select the app you want to use.
 Exploring the Windows 10 Desktop 61

2 3
Removing App Tiles
from the Start Menu
In addition to adding your own favorite
apps to the Start menu, you might want
to remove some app tiles you never use.
This frees up space for app tiles you’ll
appreciate having around.
1. Click the Start button to show the
Start menu.

2. Right-click the app tile you want

to remove.

3. Click Unpin from Start.

Resizing App Tiles 1

One of the things that makes the Start
menu look so inviting is that the app
tiles are colorful and dynamic, offering a
variety of information—pictures, icons,
and some with live updates—all in dif-
ferent sizes. Depending on which app 2 3 4
you’re working with, you might be able
to change the size of the app tile to take
up more or less room on the menu.

1. Display the Start menu.

2. Right-click the app tile you want

to resize.

3. Click Resize. A list of size options

appears.

4. Click the size you want to apply to

the selected tile. 1

Not All Tiles Are Created Equal

The wrinkle in the mix when it comes to resizing app tiles has to do with what
the developer of the app included in the app’s capabilities. Some apps have a
variety of sizes available, and others have only a few.
 62 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

Resizing with Touch

If you are using Tablet mode and want to resize your app tiles, press and hold
the tile you want to resize. When you see two white circles on the corners of the
tile, tap the lower circle. A small options menu appears. Tap Resize and then tap
the size you want to assign the file from the submenu that appears.

Turning Off Live Tile

Updates
Some of the app tiles in your Start menu
have the capability to update information
as new content becomes available. You
can see this, for example, on the Money
app tile, which shows an image and a
headline from the most recent article post-
ed in that app. Likewise, your weather app
shows you a picture or icons forecasting
weather for the near future. Additionally,
app tiles such as Mail and Calendar display
helpful information, such as the number
of new email messages you’ve received or
upcoming appointments in your daily cal-
endar. If you find the updates distracting,
you can turn them off so that Windows 10
1 3
displays colorful, but static, tiles.

1. Show the Start menu and right-

click the app tile you want to
change live tile status for.

2. Click More to display additional

choices.

3. Click Turn Live Tile Off. The app tile

displays an icon and the name of
the tile but no longer shows an
image or updating information.
2
 Using Tablet Mode 63

Getting the Tiles Going Again

You can turn live tiles back on again by right-clicking them and choosing Turn
Live Tile On. Note, however, that not all app tiles are live tiles; this option is avail-
able only for those tiles that have Live Tile capabilities programmed into the app.

Using Tablet Mode

If you have a 2-in-1 tablet or you dock your tablet and connect it to a keyboard
and mouse, you might be switching back and forth from Desktop to Tablet
mode often. In most cases, Windows 10 makes this change automatically for
you. When you undock the tablet or flip the screen to use your 2-in-1 as a tablet,
Windows 10 adjusts itself so that the touch-optimized features are available.
You can specify whether you want Windows 10 to make that change instantly or
whether you want to be prompted before the change is made.
You can also manually choose Tablet mode, which is handy if you’re using a 2-in-
1 device but want to navigate by touch (whether or not the keyboard is active).

Making the Change

Manually
Windows 10 should make the change to
Tablet mode as soon as you undock your
computer. The operating system recog-
nizes that you’ve “gone mobile” and puts
the touch optimization features in place.
Depending on which setting you’ve
selected, you might see a notification in
the bottom-right corner of your screen,
asking whether you want to switch to
Tablet mode. You also have the option
to switch your computer to Tablet mode
manually. Here’s how to do that.

1. On the Windows 10 Desktop,

tap the Notifications icon in the
system tray to display the Action
Center. 1
 64 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

2. Tap Tablet Mode. The Start menu

changes to display a grid of app
tiles on the screen, and Windows
10 is now in Tablet mode.

Using the Start Menu

with Touch
When you’re using a tablet, the Windows
10 Start menu appears as a screen-
wide grid of tiles so that you easily can 2
choose what you want to use. Even
though the interface looks a bit dif-
ferent, all Windows 10 tools and tech-
niques are available to you by touch.

1 3 2
1. Tap the Expand button to display
a list of tools for working with
Windows 10 in tablet mode.
2. Tap All Apps to display the list of
apps installed on your device.

3. Tap Pinned Tiles to return to the

app tiles display on the Start
screen.

4. Tap Power to shut down the tab-

let, put it to sleep, or restart it.
4
My Desktop Is Blank
After you finish working with an app
and close it, you may find yourself look-
ing at a blank desktop. To display the
Start menu and the Expand button that
goes along with it, tap the Start button
in the lower-left corner of the screen.
The Start menu appears, offering you all
your familiar app tiles, and you can tap
the Expand button to display the left
column of the Start menu so you can
choose from among the apps that don’t
appear as tiles on the menu.
 Using Tablet Mode 65

Tweaking the Start

Menu with Touch
You can easily tweak the Start menu
to better fit the way you like to work.
At the top of the All Apps list on the
Start menu, you see the Most Used
list. You can remove items from that
list or add apps to it. You can also
add app tiles to the Start menu and
the taskbar to further personalize
your Start experience.
1 2 3 5
1. Tap the All Apps tool to display
all your installed apps in the Start
screen area.

2. Tap and hold an item on the Most

Used list that you’d like to remove.
A context menu appears.

3. Tap More.

4. To remove the item from the list,

choose Don’t Show in This List.

5. To add the item to the taskbar, 4

tap Pin to Taskbar.

Setting Tablet Mode

Options
You can choose a number of prefer-
ences for the way in which Windows 10
behaves when you either undock a tab-
let or switch your device to Tablet mode.
You’ll find the preferences in the Tablet
1
Mode tab of the System Settings.

1. Tap the Settings tool just above

the Power tool on the far-left
edge of the Start screen. The
Settings window opens.
 66 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

2. Tap System.
2
3. Tap Tablet Mode. In the center of
the window, you see four tablet
settings.

4. To choose which mode your com-

puter uses when you sign in, tap
the down arrow and select Use
Tablet Mode, Use Desktop Mode,
or leave Use the Appropriate
Mode for My Hardware selected.
(It’s the default.)

5. To choose whether you are

prompted before Tablet mode
is activated, tap the down arrow
and choose Don’t Ask Me and
Don’t Switch, Always Ask Me
2 6 4 5
Before Switching, or Don’t Ask Me
and Always Switch.

6. If you want app icons on the

taskbar to be hidden when you’re
working in Tablet mode, slide the
selection to On.

7. If you want to hide the taskbar

when you’re working in Tablet
mode, slide the selection to On.

3 7
 Tailoring the Taskbar 67

Edge Gestures for Tablets

Because touch is so important for devices running Windows 10, another new
feature makes the most of touchable areas on the screen. You can use the new
edge gestures to display helpful tools and perform common actions. Here’s
what the different gestures do:

• Swiping down in a short motion from the top of the screen, if performed on
the left or right side of the screen, places the open app in a frame and splits the
screen with other open apps.

• Swiping down in a long motion from the top of the screen closes the open app.

• Swiping in from the right side of the screen displays the Action Center.

• Swiping up from the bottom of the screen displays the taskbar if it is hidden from
view.

• Swiping in from the left side of the screen displays Task view, showing all
open and available apps.

Tailoring the Taskbar

The taskbar is a place for lots of activity on the Windows 10 desktop. By
default, just to the right of the Search box, you’ll find several icons: Task view,
Microsoft Edge, File Explorer, and Microsoft Store. You can start these pro-
grams by clicking or tapping those icons.
You can also add apps you use often to the desktop taskbar so you can
launch them. For example, if you record audio notes often, you might want to
add Sound Recorder to the taskbar; if you work with illustrations, you could
add Windows Paint. Any app you use regularly is a good candidate for the
Windows 10 taskbar.
 68 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

Adding Apps to the

Taskbar
Some people prefer to put their
favorite apps in the taskbar where
they are easily within reach. You
might think the Start menu serves
the same purpose, but if you can
save a click of the mouse, why not?
2 3 4
The process is simple. Begin by right-
clicking the app tile of the app you
want to add.

1. Click Start to display the Start

menu.

2. In either the All Apps list or the

app tiles area, right-click the app
that you want to add to the task-
bar.

3. Point to More.

4. Click or tap Pin to Taskbar.

Unpinning, After the Fact

If you want to remove a pinned
item from the taskbar, right-click 1
it and select Unpin This Program
from Taskbar. Instantly it’s gone—
like it was never even there.
 Tailoring the Taskbar 69

Using Jump Lists

Jump lists are popular features in
Windows that enable you to get right
to documents and files you’ve worked
with recently without opening menus
or launching new programs. A jump
list keeps track of the most recent files
you’ve worked with in a program you’ve
pinned to the taskbar. You can display
the list by right-clicking the icon on the
taskbar. You can then click the file you
want and move right to it. 3

Jump Lists in Start

As you saw earlier in this chapter,
Windows 10 also enables you to go
directly to jump lists for certain pro-
grams that are listed in the Most Used
list of the Start menu. You can point to
an item in the list and right-click, and
the short list appears over the menu so
that you can click the item you need.

1. Display the taskbar on the

Windows 10 desktop.

2. Right-click the program icon to

display the jump list for that pro-
gram.

3. To open one of the files in the

jump list, click or tap the one you
want to view.

2 1
Jump List Display
If you have only a few files in your jump
list, the files appear as thumbnails;
when you have a whole slew of files (the
default setting in Jump List Properties
is 10), you see a list of files instead of
thumbnails.
 70 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

Working with Windows

When you work with programs on the Windows 10 desktop, they appear
in the windows you are familiar with if you’ve used previous versions of
Windows. You can open, close, minimize, maximize, arrange, and resize the
windows. You can also click or tap the title bar of the window and move it
from place to place, and you can arrange more than one window on the
screen at the same time.

Window Basics
The windows you open on the Windows 10 desktop have a number of ele-
ments in common:

Quick Access Title

toolbar bar Ribbon Minimize Maximize

Close
Help

Status bar Vertical scrollbar

• The title bar displays the name of the program and may display the name
of the open file.

• The Minimize, Maximize, and Close buttons control the size of the win-
dow. Minimize reduces the window to the taskbar; Maximize opens the
window so that it fills the screen; and Close closes the window.
 Working with Windows 71

• The Quick Access toolbar gives you access to commands you might want
to use with the program. You can customize the Quick Access toolbar by
clicking the arrow on the right and selecting additional commands from
the list.

• Click the Help button to display help information related to the program
you are using.

• The Ribbon tabs offer different sets of tools related to the tasks you’re
likely to want to perform in the program.

• Click the Minimize Ribbon tool to reduce the display of the ribbon so
that only the tab names show. When the Ribbon is hidden, the tool
changes to Expand the Ribbon.

• You can click and drag the window border to resize the window.

Moving a Window
Moving a window is as simple as
clicking and dragging a window in
the direction you want it to go. You
can position the window where you
want it manually, or you can use a 2 1
tool to arrange the windows in an
orderly way. (You find out how to do
that in the next section.)

1. Tap and drag—or click and

drag—the window’s title bar.

2. Drag the window in the direction

you want to move it, and release
it in the new position.
 72 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

Resizing a Window
The easiest way to resize a window,
from small to large, is to use the
Maximize button in the window
controls in the upper-right corner
of the window. You can also resize a
window by positioning the pointer
on the window border or corner and
dragging in the direction you want
to resize the window. 1

1. Tap or point to a corner or side of

the window. The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow.

2. Drag the border in the direction

you want to resize the window,
and release the border (or the
mouse button) when the window
is the size you want it.

Switching to a Different
2
Window
While you’re working on the desktop,
you can easily have many windows
open onscreen at once. These windows
might be program windows or folders
of files. If you work with a number of
programs open at one time, you need to
be able to get to the program you want
when you need it. If several windows are
open on the screen, you can click any
part of the window you want to bring it
to the top, or you can click the taskbar
icon of the window you want to view.
Alternatively, you can click the Task View
tool to the right of the Search box in the
taskbar. This displays all open apps in
Thumbnail view so that you can click the
one you want to work with next.
 Working with Windows 73

Arranging Windows
Another important task when you
are working with multiple open win-
dows at one time is having the capa-
bility to arrange the windows the
way you want them to appear. If you
want to compare two documents, for
example, it would be nice to show
them side by side. You can arrange
windows the way you want on the
Windows 10 desktop.
1
1. Right-click the taskbar and select
Cascade Windows.

2. Right-click the taskbar and select

Show Windows Stacked.

3. Right-click the taskbar and click

Show Windows Side by Side.

3
 74 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

>>>Go Further
SHORTCUT KEYS FOR WINDOW WRANGLING
You can also work with the windows on your desktop without ever taking your
hands off the keyboard. Here are the shortcut keys you can use:

• Windows+Plus Sign (+) on the numeric keypad zooms in on the current

window.

• Windows+Minus Sign (–) zooms out on the current window.

• Windows+Up Arrow maximizes the current window.

• Windows+Down Arrow restores or minimizes the current window.

• Windows+M minimizes all open windows.

• Windows+E opens the Quick Access folder in File Explorer.

• Windows+D displays the desktop.

Quick-Changing Windows
You can change the size of a window quickly by double-clicking (or double-
tapping) the title bar. If the window was full-screen size (that is, maximized),
it returns to its earlier smaller size. If the window is smaller than full screen,
double-clicking the title bar maximizes it.

Old-Style Resizing
Sure, all these double-click tricks are fancy and fast. But if you prefer to choose
commands from menus, you can display a window’s control panel and select
the command you want—Restore, Move, Size, Minimize, and Close—from the
list of options. You can find the control panel for the window in the upper-left
corner; you can’t miss it because it resembles a small program icon (in Word,
you see a Word icon; in Excel, you see an Excel icon; and so forth).
 Working with Notifications and the Action Center 75

Using Task View

Windows 10 also includes a view called Task view, which enables you to navi-
gate quickly among open apps so that you can choose which one you want
to work with next. This serves as a simple alternative to Alt+Tab, which cycles
through open apps so that you can select the one you need. Task view, by
contrast, shows all the open apps as thumbnails on the screen at one time so
you can easily choose the one you want.

Displaying and Using

Task View
The tool you need for displaying Task
view is just to the right of the Search
box on the Windows 10 taskbar. 3

1. Click the Task View tool in the

taskbar. Your open apps appear
as thumbnails in the center of the
screen.

2. Click the image of the application

you want to use.

3. Alternatively, hover the mouse

over the right corner of an appli-
cation image to display the Close
box, and click the Close box to
1 2
exit the app.

Working with Notifications and the

Action Center
Another feature you’re likely to use often in Windows 10 is the Notifications
tool, which opens the Action Center along the right side of the screen. You’ll
notice that notifications also slide in from the right toward the bottom of the
screen—announcing their presence with a chime—whenever a new file is
posted to the cloud, you plug in a new device, you miss a phone call, or a set-
ting needs your attention.
 76 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

The Notifications tool resembles a small speech balloon, and it appears on

the far-right side of the taskbar. When you click the Notifications tool, the
Action Center panel opens, listing all the notifications in various apps and
settings. At the bottom of the Notifications panel, you have access to various
system settings, which enable you to tailor the functioning of your computer
easily without going through the Start menu to display the Settings window.

Checking Notifications
Windows 10 lets you know when a
new notification arrives by displaying
a small rectangular message box in
the lower-right corner of the screen.
In Windows 10 2017 Fall Creators
Update, you can see a small number
indicating how many new notifica-
tions you have received. You can also
click the Notifications tool at any
time to see a list of all recent notifica-
tions.

1. Click the Notifications tool in the

taskbar. The Action Center opens
on the right side of the screen.

2. Review the list of notifications. 1

3. To act on a notification, click it,

and a window opens taking you 3 2
to the app that needs your atten-
tion.
4. Remove a notification you no lon-
ger need by hovering the mouse
over the down arrow on the right
side. A close box appears above
the arrow. Click the X to remove
the notification.

5. To delete all notifications, click

Clear All.
4 5
 Using Ink with Windows 10 77

Turning Notifications Off

and On
If you find the notifications distracting
(or the sound annoying), you can turn
off notifications for a period of time
while you focus on the task at hand.
2
1. Right-click the Notifications tool
in the taskbar. A small context
menu appears.

2. Click Turn on Quiet Hours. When

you’re ready to turn on notifica-
tions again, click Turn Off Quiet
Hours.

Reducing Notification Clutter

You can make a few other changes 1
to your notifications if you want
to be interrupted less as you work.
Choose Don’t Show Number of New
Notifications or Don’t Show App Icons to
turn off the number or the source of the
notifications you receive.

Using Ink with Windows 10

Windows 10 has been designed from the ground up to allow you to use the
software in whatever way—and on whatever device—feels most comfortable
for you. Now in Windows 10 2017 Fall Creators Update, the Ink feature has
been dramatically improved. Not only can you easily use a pen to write, draw,
and select items on the screen, but in many cases you can also simply use
your finger to draw, highlight, and add other enhancements on the fly.

Getting Ready to Use Ink

If you have a pen, Windows 10 will likely recognize that by default. But if you don’t see
the Windows Ink Workspace tool on the right side of your taskbar, you can turn it on
by right-clicking the taskbar and clicking the Show Windows Ink Workspace button.
 78 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

Displaying the Windows

Ink Workspace
The Windows Ink Workspace tool is
in the notifications area on the right
side of the taskbar. When you click
or tap the tool, the Windows Ink
Workspace opens.

1. Click or tap the Windows Ink

Workspace tool.

2. Choose the tool you want to use. 1

Windows Ink Workspace gives
you the choice of creating a sticky
2
note, using the sketch pad, or
capturing and annotating a pic-
ture of your computer screen.

Drawing with Ink

Because the other two tools in
the Windows Ink Workspace—
Sketchpad and Screen Sketch—
have to do with drawing, you’ll
find more about those tools in
Chapter 11, “Bringing Out Your
Inner Artist with Photos and Paint
3D.”
 Using Ink with Windows 10 79

Creating a Sticky Note

Windows Ink enables you to easily
add sticky notes in places you need
reminders—perhaps you want to
remind yourself that it’s your day
to pick the kids up from soccer or
that you need 20 copies of your
PowerPoint presentation for tomor- 4 1 3 5
row’s board meeting.

1. Click Sticky Notes in the Windows

Ink Workspace (not shown). A
sticky note appears in the center
of your screen.

2. Using your pen or your finger,

write the item you want to
remember on the note.

3. Click or tap the Menu button to

change the color of the note.

4. Click Add Note if you want to cre-

ate another sticky note.

5. Click or tap Delete Note to delete

the sticky note. Windows 10 asks 2
you to confirm that you want to
delete the note; click Delete to
remove it.
 80 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

1
Setting Reminders
If you write a specific time on your
sticky note, the text for the time
changes color. This happens because
Windows 10 recognizes what you
wrote as a time, which means you
might want to add it to your calen-
dar and set a reminder so you won’t
forget.

1. Display the sticky note with the

time you want to set a reminder
for.

2. Tap the time. A small options bar

opens at the bottom of the note.
4 3 2
3. Tap Add Reminder. Windows 10
opens the Cortana panel, giving
you several options for setting the
reminder.

4. Tap to choose when you want to

be reminded.

5. Tap and select how often you

want to be reminded.

6. Tap or click Remind to save the

reminder.

5 6

Creating and Using Multiple Desktops

Another exciting feature in Windows 10 that is getting a lot of attention is its
multiple desktops. Now you can easily create separate desktops to organize
tasks, projects, and apps for different uses. For example, you might want to
create one desktop for “work” and one for “home.” You can create two desk-
tops and put the apps you use in each of those places on the different desk-
tops. Then when you get home, or you get to work, you can simply display
the desktop you want to use and have all your favorite apps right there.
 Creating and Using Multiple Desktops 81

Creating a New Desktop

Creating a new desktop is as simple 1
as a click. Here’s the process:

1. Display Task view by clicking the

Task View tool in the desktop
taskbar.

2. Click New Desktop. The desktop

appears as a thumbnail along the
bottom of the screen. The top of
the desktop is blank because you
need to add the apps you want to
use to the desktop.
2
Desktop Creation Shortcut
You can also create a new desktop
with a shortcut key combination:
Windows+Ctrl+D.

Adding Apps to the New

Desktop
After you create the new desktop,
you need to add the apps you want
to use there. You can use Task view
to determine which desktop is active
and move the apps you want to use 2
on the new desktop.

1. Display Task view by clicking the

tool in the desktop taskbar. As
you can see, open apps appear in
the center of the screen, and your
desktops appear at the bottom of
the screen. Make sure the original
desktop is selected.

2. Right-click the app in the original

desktop you want to move to the
1
new desktop.
 82 Chapter 3 Accomplishing Windows 10 Essential Tasks

3. Point to Move To.

3 4
4. Choose Desktop 2. The selected
app is moved to the second desk-
top.

Switching Among
Desktops
You can move back and forth
between multiple desktops by
using Task view and clicking the
desktop you want to use or by
pressing Windows+Ctrl+left arrow
or Windows+Ctrl+right arrow.

Closing a Desktop
When you’re ready to do away with
a desktop you’ve created, you can
remove it as easily as you would
close a file.
3
1. Click Task view to display the
open apps and desktops.

2. Hover the mouse over the desk-

top you want to close. 1 2
3. Click the Close box to close the
desktop.
This page intentionally left blank
 Cortana can find, store, and give
you directions to restaurants
with your favorite cuisine.

Cortana skills help you

get and share data with
apps and devices you use
throughout your day.
This chapter shows you how Cortana can help
personalize and streamline your computing
experience by demonstrating these tasks:

➔ Getting started with Cortana

➔ Searching with Cortana
➔ Using Cortana’s notebook
➔ Adding to Cortana’s skills
➔ Setting tasks with Cortana
➔ Having Cortana find your phone
➔ Managing Cortana permissions
4
Using Cortana: Your
Personal Digital Assistant
Windows 10 Fall Creators Update has given Cortana a big boost.
Although it first appeared as a functional assistant on Windows
Phone, Cortana’s early skills have been greatly expanded so that
now it can help you find information, make connections, and save
the things that interest you, no matter what app you are using or
what kind of information you seek.
Cortana now does a whole lot more than it used to. You can simply
talk to it and use voice comments to ask questions, such as, “Is the
movie Marshall good?” Cortana will respond with the average rating
for the movie (out of 10 stars) and give you links to more informa-
tion, including directions to the nearest theater where the movie is
playing.
Cortana also helps you schedule appointments, figure out a song
you heard on the radio, decide whether to wear a coat today, and
much more.
Cortana reduces the need to do a lot of typing as you look for
information. You can simply say, “Hey Cortana!” and then ask the
86 Chapter 4 Using Cortana: Your Personal Digital Assistant

question or give the command you want Cortana to help you with. If that
sounds too good to be true, try it a few times. Here are some of the tasks Cor-
tana can do for you:
• Open an app you want to use

• Give you the current weather

• Tell you the latest sports scores

• Read the headlines

• Find (and tell you about) top recipes

• Put your computer to sleep

• Locate the nearest Thai restaurant (and provide the directions to get you
there)

• Tell you a joke

• Set an alarm so you can have a quick nap

• Remind you of an upcoming event

• Increase or decrease the volume of your PC or device

• Keep track of your Microsoft account and your profile information

• Store information about your favorite places (stores, restaurants, and

more)

• Play a game with you (try saying, “Play movie game”)

• Tell you some trivia you can use to impress friends at a party

• Help you find the name of the song you like (just give it a few of the lyr-
ics)

• Do quick number conversions

• Play a song in your Groove Music app

• Track packages that are being shipped to you

 Getting Started with Cortana 87

Getting Started with Cortana

For the most part, Cortana works right off the bat without a whole lot of
intervention from you. Your computer does need to have a microphone if you
plan to use voice commands, of course, and if you want to wake Cortana up
by calling its name, you need to change a setting so that can happen.

Is This Thing On?

You can check to make sure Cortana will hear you by displaying Settings, choos-
ing Cortana, and clicking Talk to Cortana. Click the Check the Microphone link
at the top of the page. The Speech Wizard launches and walks you through
a series of steps, including repeating a phrase so the microphone can check
the function and sound level of your microphone. When Windows 10 tells you
everything is working properly, you’re ready to speak to Cortana.

Leaving a Wake-up Call

Turn on the “Hey Cortana” feature so
that Cortana hears you talking and
activates the Search box to the right
of the Windows 10 Start button.

1. Click or tap in the Search box.

2. Click or tap Settings. The Talk to

Cortana page of the Cortana set-
tings appears.

2 1
 88 Chapter 4 Using Cortana: Your Personal Digital Assistant

3. Set the Hey Cortana setting to the

3
On position.

4. If you want to be able to keep

your computer from sleeping so
you can use “Hey Cortana” when-
ever your computer is plugged in,
click this check box.

5. Choose whether you want

Cortana to respond to anyone
who says “Hey Cortana” or only to
you.

Keys, Not Commands 4 5

If you’d rather use a shortcut key
than a voice command to acti-
vate Cortana’s abilities, slide the
Keyboard Shortcut setting to the
On position. This enables you to
put Cortana into “listening mode”
by pressing Windows+C.

Cortana on Your New System

If you’ve just purchased a new computer or device that is running Windows 10
Fall Creators Update, Cortana is there to walk you through the process of set-
ting up your system.
Cortana explains each step of the process and asks you to answer “Yes” or “No”
as it sets up the various options to get you going. You can ask questions along
the way, and Cortana responds in kind. If you’d rather not have your computer
talking to you while you’re going through the setup process, you can always
click the sound icon to mute Cortana.
 Getting Started with Cortana 89

Learning the Cortana

Tools
When you click or tap in the Search
box to the right of the Windows Start
button, the Cortana panel opens.
Along the left side of the panel, you
see several tools. To learn the name
of each of the tools, you can click the
Expand tool at the top of the tools
row.

1. Tap Home to see a mix of current 1 2 3 4

information tailored to your local
area, including weather condi-
tions, top headlines, nearby res-
taurants, and more.

2. Tap Cortana’s Notebook to see

an overview of what you have
planned for today, as well as
favorite places, traffic conditions,
restaurants, headlines, and more.

3. Tap Devices if you have an Invoke

speaker designed specifically
to work with Cortana. (Think of
Amazon’s Alexa speaker.) Cortana
leads you through the setup pro-
cess.

4. Tap Collections to see favorites

you’ve saved in Books, Movies
& TV, Recipes, Restaurants, and
Shopping.

5. Tap Settings to see and change

Cortana settings as needed.

6. Tap Feedback to send Microsoft

your thoughts and suggestions
about Cortana.
6 5
 90 Chapter 4 Using Cortana: Your Personal Digital Assistant

Searching with Cortana

Once you’ve set up Cortana to hear you when you say, “Hey Cortana,” you
can ask for help in searching for anything. You can also ask a variety of other
questions that can help you organize and manage your day. Phrase your
question in a regular sentence-style question; Cortana asks for more informa-
tion if it doesn’t understand.

So What Is Microsoft Listening In On?

The user agreement language for Cortana tells you that Microsoft needs your
permission to collect and use your location information, as well as data about
your contacts, your voice input, information from your email messages and
texts, your browser history and search history, your calendar details, and other
information. Surely they need your shoe size, too? In this day and age, collect-
ing too much information makes some users wary, and that’s understandable.
But Microsoft is gathering usage data (and no doubt will be marketing products
in a way that makes good use of that data), and if you don’t mind the company
being up front about it, click I Agree and start having fun with Cortana.

You can take a look at the information Cortana is collecting by clicking Settings
in the navigation bar on the left of the Cortana panel and then clicking
Permissions & History. Click the Change What Cortana Knows About Me in the
Cloud link to review the interests, places, search history, and more information
Cortana has collected and saved to personalize your experience.

Seek and Find with Cortana

When you’re ready to search for something, you can wake Cortana up by
saying, “Hey Cortana!” Or, if you prefer (if someone is listening on the other
side of the cubicle wall), you can click in the Search box and type the word or
phrase you’re looking for.
 Searching with Cortana 91

1. Say, “Hey Cortana!” or click the

4 3
microphone icon on the right
side of the Search box. (If Cortana
doesn’t respond to your voice,
click the Settings tool in Cortana
and make sure the Hey Cortana
slider is set to On.)

Speak up!
After you’ve turned on the Hey Cortana
setting so the tool is able to respond to
your voice commands, Windows might
prompt you to set up your microphone.
If you see the Set Up Your Mic message
box, click Next, read the sentences the
prompt displays, and click Finish to
complete setting up your microphone.
Cortana should now be ready for your
voice commands.

2. When you see Listening displayed

in the box, tell Cortana what to
search for (for example, “Find a
Thai restaurant nearby”).

What’s That?
If Cortana isn’t hearing you properly, 2 1
click the small microphone tool on
the right side of the Search box. This
opens the Cortana tool, and you can tell
Cortana what you’re looking for.

3. Cortana instantly displays a

results page with a selection of
search results that match what
you’re searching for. Click the
result that looks most promising.

4. Click the map if you want to use

the Maps app to find the route to
the location.
 92 Chapter 4 Using Cortana: Your Personal Digital Assistant

Cortana: A Fount of Knowledge

You aren’t limited with Cortana to searching for restaurants or looking for
car reviews. You can ask Cortana what the weather will be like in Des Moines
tomorrow afternoon, suggest that it find the best prices for mid-sized rental
cars, or even ask it to find a new ringtone for your phone. Experiment with
Cortana and find out how helpful it can be to you. After you get over the awk-
wardness of speaking to your computer screen, it’s rather fun.

Using Cortana’s Notebook

The benefits of having a digital personal assistant like Cortana go beyond
simply finding information on things you’re curious about. Cortana also has
a notebook in which it collects resources and data related to more than a
dozen different topics. You’ll find that you can locate and customize informa-
tion gathered in each of the following topic areas:
• About me • Meetings & reminders

• Lists • News

• Reminders • Packages

• Collected services • Pick up where I left off

• Music • Shopping

• Connected home • Special days

• Skills • Sports

• Cortana tips • Suggested reminders

• Eat & drink • Travel

• Finance • Weather

• Getting around
 Using Cortana’s Notebook 93

Exploring the Cortana 2 4

Notebook
The Notebook is in the Cortana tools
along the left side of the Cortana
panel.

1. Click or tap in the Search box. The

Cortana panel opens.
2. Tap the Notebook tool. A list of
topics appears.

3. Drag the scrollbar to review the

entire list.

4. Tap or click the topic you’d like to

explore.

1 3
 94 Chapter 4 Using Cortana: Your Personal Digital Assistant

Personalizing Cortana’s
Info
You’ll notice that the various catego- 1
ries in the Cortana Notebook need
more information from you before
2
the results shown there will be very
helpful. For example, if you click the
Sports topic in the Notebook, you’ll
see the settings Cortana has in place
for that choice as well as a link that
invites you to add your own favorite
teams so Cortana can track them for
you.

1. Click in the Search box and tap

3
Notebook to display Cortana’s cat-
egories.

2. Click or tap the Eat & Drink cat-

egory and scroll down.

3. Tap the Add a Cuisine link. A list

of cuisine categories appears.

4. Tap or click the categories of cui-

sine you enjoy.

4
 Adding to Cortana’s Skills 95

5. Tap the Add button, and Cortana

adds the cuisine in the Cuisine
Preferences area of the Eat &
Drink category.

Adding to Cortana’s Skills

Cortana skills are new in Windows 10 Fall Creators Update, dramatically
expanding what Cortana can help you do, and opening the door for devel-
opers all over the world to create voice apps and tasks that Cortana can
incorporate.
The first skills available in Cortana had to do with travel, finance, and web-
based mail—offered by company names you will recognize—but they were
quickly followed by skills for music streaming, ticket purchasing, and restau-
rant reservations. The list of skills keeps growing. You can find a list of fea-
tured skills on the Microsoft website at www.microsoft.com/en-us/cortana/
skills/featured.
 96 Chapter 4 Using Cortana: Your Personal Digital Assistant

Expanding Cortana’s
Skills
The skills are in Cortana’s Notebook
in the Cortana panel. To get started,
you need to add at least one skill to
Cortana’s capabilities.

1. Click or tap in the Search box or

say, “Hey Cortana.”

2. Tap the Notebook tool or say,

“Open the Notebook.”

3. Tap or say, “Skills.”

1 2

3
 Adding to Cortana’s Skills 97

4. Click the Learn More About link.

Windows 10 opens the Edge
browser and displays a collection
of skills you can install.

5. Click the name of a skill you’d

like to add. A details panel opens
about that skill to provide more
information.

6. Say, “Hey Cortana” and read the

text just beneath the skill name 4
(in this case, “Ask Fitbit to tell me
about my activity summary”). 5

6
 98 Chapter 4 Using Cortana: Your Personal Digital Assistant

7. When Cortana ask for your per-

mission to access data in the skill
you’ve selected, say, “Yes” or click
the Yes button.

8. When prompted, click the

Authorize button (or say,
“Authorize”) to confirm the link
between Cortana and the skill
app. You can now receive infor-
mation from that skill by simply
asking Cortana about it. In this
example, if I say, “Hey Cortana, ask
Fitbit to tell me my activity sum-
mary,” Cortana tells me how many
steps I’ve walked, how many sets
of stairs I’ve climbed, and how
many calories I’ve burned so far
today.

New Skills All the Time

Microsoft is counting on develop-
ers to create a universe of voice
apps for Cortana (and already you
can find a healthy number of skills
in many different categories, and
the number increases continu- 7
ally). Click the link in Cortana skills
to review new featured skills peri-
odically for new additions.

8
 Setting Tasks with Cortana 99

Picking Up Where You Left Off with Cortana

Another slick new Cortana feature in Windows 10 Creators Update enables you
to start a task on one computer or device and finish it on another. This might
come in handy when you’re reading a major article for a presentation you’ll be
giving later this week, and you don’t have time to finish it before it’s time to
leave.

If you’ve turned on Cortana’s Help Me Pick Up Where I Left Off feature, you can
finish the article when you get home (as long as you log into your home com-
puter using the same Microsoft account you were using on the other computer
or device). The article appears as a link in your Action Center, bookmarked to
the place you left off.

Setting Tasks with Cortana

As you can see, Cortana really is more than a glorified search tool. She is
meant to be a personal digital assistant. She can help you with scheduling,
research, and more—just like a human assistant might. You can ask Cortana
to schedule tasks, create invitations, and more.

1. Click in the Search box or say,

1
“Hey Cortana!” to let the tool
know you have a request.

2. Speak the tasks you want Cortana

to perform, such as, “Wake me up
in 15 minutes.”

2
 100 Chapter 4 Using Cortana: Your Personal Digital Assistant

3
3. Cortana answers your request
telling you what action she has
taken.

4. You can edit the task created by

clicking or tapping it.

5. Click or tap the slider to turn the

alarm off.

6. Edit alarm settings by clicking or

tapping the alarm.

7. Tap and hold the alarm to display

a delete option; tap Delete to
remove it.

Cortana, Your Instant

Assistant
Cortana is also available right on
your Lock screen. So without even
swiping open Windows 10 or
typing in the password, you can
simply ask, “Hey Cortana, when is
my next appointment?” and the
tool locates the information and
tells you.

Cortana on the Lock screen gives

you a number of rotating sugges- 4 7
tions for the types of commands
or questions you might want to
offer. Also be sure to keep Cortana
Tips turned on (you can set this
in Cortana Settings and also in
Cortana Tips in the Notebook) so
you continue to get ideas on how
to improve and expand the way
you work with your personal digi-
tal assistant.

6 5
 Managing Cortana Permissions 101

Having Cortana Find Your Phone

Just like a real digital assistant who helps you locate your lost car keys or briefcase,
Cortana can help you locate your phone when you lose it.

1
1. Say, “Hey Cortana!” The Search
box becomes active and you see
the Listening message.

2. Ask, “Where’s my phone?” Cortana

responds that it will attempt to
find it for you. After a moment or
two, you hear a message notifica-
tion on your phone (if it is within
earshot), saying, “Cortana is look-
ing for this phone.” 2 4
3. When the phone is located, a
notification appears, telling you
Cortana has found your phone.
Click or tap Ring It to send a sig-
nal to your phone so that it will
ring.

4. Tap or click the map at the top of

the notification if you want to use
the Maps app to get directions to
where Cortana found your phone.

5. Click or tap Dismiss if you were

able to find the phone with the
notification sound and no longer
5 3
need the ring signal sent.

Managing Cortana Permissions

As you can imagine, with a personal digital assistant like Cortana, in order to
provide you with information relative to your likes and dislikes, your location,
and your interests, Cortana has to know a lot about you. In this day of cyber-
security concerns, you need to be able to manage how your information is
stored and used.
For that reason, you can choose how you want Cortana to gather information
on you and manage how it is used. You do this using Cortana settings.
 102 Chapter 4 Using Cortana: Your Personal Digital Assistant

Managing Your
Permissions
Microsoft has been working with a focus
on security and privacy across the last
several iterations of Windows 10, and
the overall security effort is coalescing
into an organized permissions-based
system. Now your Cortana settings
are organized as one part of a large
Windows-wide security system designed
to give you the flexibility you want to
control your information while balanc-
ing that with the permissions you need
to get to the information you seek.

You can view and change the permis-

sions Cortana uses to search for, display,
and update your information by choos-
ing Settings in the Cortana panel.

1. Click in the Search box or say,

“Hey Cortana.” The Cortana panel
opens.

2. Click Settings. 2 1

3. Click Permissions & History.

4. Click Change What Cortana Knows

3 6 4 5
About Me in the Cloud to view and
modify the types of information
Cortana stores about you.

5. Click or tap Manage the

Information Cortana Can Access
from This Device to limit what
Cortana will find and share about
your location, communications,
and browsing history.

6. Leave this set to on if you want

Cortana to be able to display
information you’ve stored in the
cloud in searches.
 Managing Cortana Permissions 103

7. Leave My Device History set to On

if you want Cortana to learn from
past searches and questions on this
device about the types of informa-
tion and topics that interest you.
8. Click or tap Clear My Device
History to erase past search data.
9. Set to Off if you want to stop
Cortana from keeping a history of
your searches.
7 8 9

Setting Notifications
One of Cortana’s strengths is that it can
use notifications to remind you of things
you want to be reminded about: upcom-
ing appointments, grocery items, work
tasks, and times for the kids’ after-school
practices. You can control how and
when Cortana notifies you about various
events in Cortana settings.

1. Display Cortana settings by clicking 2

in the Search box and choosing the
Settings tool. In the Settings win-
dow, click Notifications.
2. If you want Cortana to send
notifications to all your Windows
devices (tablet, computer, phone),
leave this set to On.
3. If you want Cortana to make sug-
gestions for items you might want
to add to your collections (for
example, when you search for a
specific recipe), leave this set to On.
1 3 4
4. Click Manage Notifications if you
want to leave notifications on
for some items but turn them off
for others. The collection choices
are Books, Movies & TV, Recipes,
and Shopping. By default, all are
turned On.
 104 Chapter 4 Using Cortana: Your Personal Digital Assistant

>>>Go Further
LIMITING CORTANA
Because Cortana can potentially add so much to your computing experience—
and because she is a seamless part of many of the apps you’ll use every day—
developers recommend that for the best use of Windows 10, you should let
Cortana do what she does best.

But not everyone likes this sort of thing. Unfortunately, in the previous version
of Windows 10 (Windows 10 Anniversary Update), Microsoft did away with the
option to disable Cortana. So no matter what you do, it continues operating to
some degree in the background.

But you can limit the permissions you give Cortana for gathering and storing
information about your computing activities. To put a check and balance on
Cortana’s power, you make changes in Cortana Settings:

• In the Talk to Cortana category, set Hey Cortana to Off and the Lock Screen
setting to Off.

• In the Permissions & History category, set Cloud Search, My Device History,
and My Search History settings to Off. Click the Clear My Device History but-
ton to remove past search data.

• In the Notifications category, set Notification Between Devices and Category

Notifications to Off.

You can reverse these settings at any time to restore Cortana to normal function-
ality. You can also provide feedback to Microsoft (by using the Feedback tool in
the Cortana panel) if you want to weigh in on how Cortana stores and uses your
information in future updates of Windows 10.
 Managing Cortana Permissions 105

Free Time with Cortana

Like any good assistant, Cortana isn’t all work and no play. In fact, you can play
games with Cortana (just say, “Hey Cortana, play movie game”), ask Cortana to
share some interesting trivia, or even ask it to tell you a joke. Here’s the result
when I said, “Hey Cortana, tell me a joke.” Not bad.
 Use Personalization settings
to change the way Windows
10 looks and behaves.

Add a new background or create a

slideshow using your own images.
In this chapter, you learn to change the way
Windows 10 looks and acts by doing the fol-
lowing tasks:

➔ Selecting a new desktop background

➔ Adjusting colors in Windows 10
➔ Setting a night light in Windows 10
➔ Personalizing the Lock screen
➔ Choosing a Windows 10 theme
➔ Customizing the Start menu
➔ Tweaking additional system settings
5
Personalizing Windows 10
We live in a time when we can personalize everything. We just like
things the way we like them—and Windows 10 is no exception. You
can personalize many things about the way Windows 10 operates
on your computer or device—changing your screen background,
adjusting colors, choosing a visual theme, customizing the way the
Start menu behaves, and so on. Now in Windows 10 Fall Creators
Update, you can use the new Night Light feature to take the bright
blue out of the light when you’re using your computer after dark.
This makes reading the screen easier on your eyes.
Windows handles some of this customization for you. If you’re using
a touch device, Windows 10 automatically appears in Tablet mode
so that your experience is optimized for touch. If you’re using a
desktop computer, your Windows 10 shows up to be mouse friend-
ly. You won’t have to do anything to choose one or the other.
This chapter shows you how to make these changes to create the
Windows 10 experience that’s right for you.
 108 Chapter 5 Personalizing Windows 10

Saving Your Changes—Not

You might notice the lack of a Save step in the tasks in this chapter. Yes, it’s a
little hard to get used to, but for many settings there’s no Save button when
you make changes to the Personalization settings discussed in this chapter.
Windows 10 saves your changes as you work, so you don’t need to take a spe-
cific action to complete the operation. When you’re done, just click or tap the
Close button on the active window. If you’re one of those people (like me) who
likes to wrap things up neatly, not having a Save button is a little disconcerting,
but we’ll get used to it (hopefully).

Selecting a New Desktop Background

Your Windows 10 Desktop background sets the backdrop for your whole
computing experience. You might be surprised to discover what a difference
a background makes. Try changing it, and you’ll see. Some images are ener-
gizing; others are relaxing.
You can use one of the images that are included with Windows 10 or choose
photos that have meaning for you. You can also choose a solid color instead
of a picture, if you like, or create a slideshow so you can see multiple images
instead of just one.

Displaying
Personalization Settings
1. Click the Start button to display
the Start menu.

2. Click Settings.

3. Click Personalization. The 1 2

Personalization settings appear. 3
The Background category is
selected by default.
 Selecting a New Desktop Background 109

1 2
Choosing a New
Background Picture
Windows 10 makes it easy for you
to substitute a new picture for the
image your background currently
displays. You can choose an image
provided with Windows 10, or you
can add one of your own. From the
Personalization screen, follow these
steps:
4 3
1. Click Background (assuming it’s
not already selected).

2. Click the Background arrow and

choose Picture.

3. Click a picture from among the

thumbnails displayed.

4. Alternatively, click Browse to find

and select a different picture.

5. Click the folder containing the

picture you want to use.

6. Select a picture in the right side of 5 6 7

the Open dialog box. 9
7. Click Choose Picture. The picture
you have added is applied to the
desktop in the Preview window
at the top of the Personalization
window.

8. Click the Choose a Fit arrow, and

choose how you want Windows
10 to place the photo on the
desktop. You can choose from Fill,
Fit, Stretch, Tile, Center, and Span.

9. Close the Personalization window. 8

 110 Chapter 5 Personalizing Windows 10

Selecting a Color 1 2 4
Background
If you’d rather not use a picture
for your desktop background, you
can choose a color you like for the
Windows 10 backdrop. From the
Personalization screen, follow these
steps:

1. Click Background if it is not select-

ed.

2. Select Solid Color from the 3

Background list.

3. Click the color you want to apply

to the background. The Preview
window shows the effect of the
change.

4. Click Close to exit Settings when

you have selected the color you
want.

1
Creating a Custom Color
New in Windows 10 Fall Creators
Update, you can create your own
custom color for your desktop
background. The tool you need
is in the Background page of the
Personalization settings.

1. Click Background if it is not select-

ed.

2. Click the Custom Color button.

You see a pop-up box with palette
of colors.

2
 Adjusting Colors in Windows 10 111

3. Click the color you want to use.

3
4. Drag the slider to make the color
lighter or darker.

5. Click Done to choose the color.

Coloring by Numbers
If you know the numeric value
of the color you want to use (for
example, the Red-Green-Blue val-
ues), click the More link in the Pick
a Background Color pop-up box
and enter the numeric values for
the hues. Click Done to save the
custom color to your palette.

Creating a Background
Slideshow
You can also create a slideshow
for your desktop background so
that Windows 10 displays a series
of your favorite pictures while you 5 4
work. To get the step-by-step pro-
cess, see the section “Creating a
Slideshow” later in this chapter.

Adjusting Colors in Windows 10

If you’d like, Windows 10 can automatically pick out accent colors from the
photos you select for the desktop background and then assign those colors
to other elements of the user interface. You can also turn the feature off and,
instead, manually assign colors to the Start menu, taskbar, and Windows 10
Action Center. You can control the transparency of the Start menu, taskbar,
and Action Center. When you make the onscreen elements transparent, you
can see the desktop image through them, for a nice effect.
 112 Chapter 5 Personalizing Windows 10

Choosing Accent Colors 1 3

and Transparency
Let Windows 10 know how you want
the operating system to handle
colors in the Colors category of
the Personalization screen. You can
choose which colors are used and
determine whether you want the
color to be displayed transparently in
various onscreen elements.

1. Display the Personalization

screen.
2. Click the Colors category. 2
3. To have Windows 10 automatical-
ly choose the accent color, leave
the check box selected. 6 5 4

Choosing a Color
If you want to manually select a
color scheme, including the colors
used as accent colors on menus,
the taskbar, and more, uncheck
this check box.

4. Scroll down to see more options.

5. If you want to turn on the

Transparency setting so you can
see the desktop background
through menus and pop-up win- 7
dows, move the slider to On.

6. Choose whether you want the

accent color to appear in the Start
menu/screen, on the taskbar, and
in Action Center.

7. Click to use the accent color on

the title bars of app windows.
 Setting a Night Light in Windows 10 113

Enabling High Contrast and App Mode

Windows 10 includes a High Contrast option so that you can display Windows
in a way that heightens the contrast on the screen. This option can be particu-
larly helpful for colorblind users. You can find the High Contrast settings on the
Colors page of the Personalization screen, and you can access them through
the Ease of Access option in Settings.

You can choose whether you want to view your apps in Light or Dark mode.
Changing the mode can enable you to better see the screen when you’re work-
ing in variable light situations.
Begin by clicking Colors in the Personalization screen. Scroll down to the
Related Settings area and click High Contrast Settings. Choose a theme from
the Theme list and then click Apply. Windows 10 updates the display with the
high-contrast theme you selected.

Setting a Night Light in Windows 10

Windows 10 Fall Creators Update offers a neat new feature that can cut down
on the wear and tear on your eyeballs after dark. There is a blue quality in
bright on-screen light that brings out the bright white in online displays. But
when the light in the room grows dim, that blue adds a glaring quality that
makes reading and viewing (and eventually, sleeping!) harder on our eyes.
Recognizing this, the developers of Windows 10 Fall Creators Update added
a new feature that automatically dims the light for you at night—or at a time
you specify. The settings for Night Light are in the System settings.

1. Display the Settings window by 2 1

clicking the Start button and
choosing Settings.

2. Click System.
 114 Chapter 5 Personalizing Windows 10

3 4
3. Click the Display category if it isn’t
already selected.

4. Drag the Night Light slider to the

On position.

5. Click Night Light Settings to cus-

tomize the time the setting goes
into effect.

6. Drag the slider to adjust the color

used at night. 6 7 5

7. Drag to the On position to sched-

ule the Night Light hours.

8. Click to let Windows 10 set the

Night Light schedule according
to your local sunrise and sunset
times.
9. Click to specify your own hours
for Night Light.

10. Adjust the On and Off times for

Night Light.

10 9 8

Personalizing the Lock Screen

The Lock screen is the first screen you see when you press Power and your
Windows 10 PC or device comes to life. The Lock screen shows your profile
image and also might show you some notifications—called badges—from
your email, messaging, and calendar apps. For example, small numbers
beside the notifications icons can show you how many email messages and
instant messages you have. That’s a great time-saver because you can see
what needs your attention before you even unlock your computer!
You can also talk to Cortana without even unlocking your computer or
device. You can simply say, “Hey, Cortana!” to wake it up and then speak your
command. Pretty neat.
You can personalize the look of your Windows 10 Lock screen by changing
your profile picture or by choosing your favorite Lock screen pictures.
Windows 10 gives you a number of photos to choose from, but you can use
 Personalizing the Lock Screen 115

one of your own personal images if you like. What’s more, in Windows 10
you can create a custom slideshow using your favorite images from different
sources, so the Lock screen displays family, friends, and more, even while your
computer is locked.

Choosing a New Lock 1

Screen Picture
Initially, Windows 10 uses a default
picture for your Lock screen, but
you can change that image to show
something that has personal mean-
ing for you. You can change your
Lock screen picture whenever you
like by following these steps:

1. Display the Personalization set-

tings.

2. Click the Lock Screen category. 2 3

3. From the Background list, select
Picture.

Other Options
There are three options in this
menu. Windows Spotlight displays
images from Windows 10, Picture
enables you to choose your own
image for the lock screen, and
Slideshow gives you the ability to
create a slideshow of images from
photos you select.

4. Click a photo if you want to use

one that is shown in the thumb-
5 4
nail views.

5. Click Browse to select your own

photo.
 116 Chapter 5 Personalizing Windows 10

6 7
6. Click the folder containing the
photo you want to use.

7. Click the photo you want to use.

8. Click Choose Picture to add the

photo to the Lock screen.

Adding a New Lock

Screen Picture On-the-Fly
If you’re viewing photos on your com-
puter and see an image you particularly 8
like, you can make that photo your Lock
screen image instantly. Here’s how to
do that:

1. In the Photos app, display the 1 4 2

photo you want to use as the Lock
screen.

More Photo Tips, Please

You learn much more about working
with photos in Windows 10 in Chapter
11, “Bringing Out Your Inner Artist with
Photos and Paint 3D.”

2. Click the three dots in the upper

right to display the photo options 3
list.

3. Click Set As.

Lock Screen Photos Quickly

You can use a shortcut key combination
to choose a displayed photo as your Lock
screen image. Display the photo using
the Photos app and then press Ctrl+L.

4. Click Set as Lock Screen. The new

photo is applied instantly as your
Lock screen image.
 Personalizing the Lock Screen 117

Creating a Slideshow 1 3 2
Another feature in Windows 10 lets you
create and play a slideshow on the Lock
screen, which can add some ambiance
to your room when you’re not actively
using your PC. Here’s how to create a
slideshow for your Lock screen:

1. Display the Lock Screen category

in the Personalization screen.

2. Choose Slideshow from the

Background list.

3. If you want Windows 10 to use 4 5

photos from the Pictures folder on
your PC or device, select Pictures.
7
4. If you want to choose a folder
in another location (such as
OneDrive folder), click Add a
Folder and choose the folder you
want to use.

5. Click Advanced Slideshow

Settings to choose the way the
pictures appear on your screen.

6. Choose whether you want to

include only pictures that fit your
screen.

7. Drag to On if you want the slide-

show to include pictures stored in
OneDrive and in your Camera Roll
folder (while connected to your
phone). 6 9 8
8. If you want to conserve battery
power and turn off the slideshow
when power is low, drag the slider
to Off.

9. Click to choose when you want

the slideshow to turn off (30 min-
utes, 1 hour, 3 hours, or Don’t turn
off ).
 118 Chapter 5 Personalizing Windows 10

Stopping the Show

When you’re ready to start working, you can tap, click, or press a key on the
keyboard, and Windows 10 scrolls the slideshow away and displays your login
information so you can enter your password or PIN and get to work.

>>>Go Further
CREATING THEMED SLIDESHOWS
You can easily create different slideshows for your Lock screen that suit your
different moods or locations. For example, if you want to display a work-related
slideshow during work hours (perhaps with photos of your latest projects or
staff activities) and family images at home, you can store the different photos in
folders named, appropriately, Work and Home; then you can choose the folder
you want to use for the slideshow on-the-fly. This enables you to create as many
slideshows as you like, and all you have to do is choose the folder with the imag-
es you want to show. Nice!

Choosing a Windows 10 Theme

It’s a great thing to be able to change the colors, backgrounds, and more in
Windows 10; that gives you control over the look of the operating system
so you can work and play in an environment that suits you. One challenge,
though, is that lots of personalizing could add up to a mish-mash of effects.
Themes can help you fix that.
Windows 10 themes coordinate the look of your desktop background, color
scheme, sounds, and screensaver. You can choose the theme in the Themes
category of the Personalization screen.
 Choosing a Windows 10 Theme 119

1 5 4
Displaying Themes
1. Display the Personalization set-
tings.

2. Choose Themes.

3. Click a Windows 10 theme you

want to apply.

4. Change the background, color,

sound, or mouse cursor settings
to create a custom theme.

5. Click Save Theme to preserve the

new changes. 2 3
6. Type a name for the theme.

7. Click Save to save the theme.

6 7

>>>Go Further
FINDING MORE THEME OPTIONS
If you don’t see a theme that suits you, click the Get More Themes in the Store
link. You’ll find a variety of theme categories—new themes, animals, art, auto-
motive, branded themes, games, holidays and seasons, movies, nature, and
places and landscapes—to view a collection of themes related to the various
topics. To find out more about a specific theme, click the theme tile. To download
a theme you like, click the Get button. When the download is complete, a noti-
fication alerts you. You can click the notification to display the new theme. The
new theme appears in the Apply a Theme section.
 120 Chapter 5 Personalizing Windows 10

Customizing the Start Menu

By now you’ve probably used the Start menu a number of times, and you
realize how easy it makes navigating to the settings and apps you need.
Although the Start menu is something of a return to the classic way of
interacting with Windows, the Windows 10 Start menu goes several steps
beyond what you may have been used to in Windows 7 or earlier versions.
For example, the Windows 10 Start menu includes a Most Used list on the left
and a grid of live tiles on the right that enable you to launch apps and access
information faster than ever before.
You can customize the Start menu to adjust the list of programs that appear
in the Most Recently Used list and even change the color of the Start menu
if you like. You can also resize the Start menu by dragging it to the size you
want and further personalize it by adding and arranging the app tiles you
want to be able to access easily.

Give Me That Old-Time Start Menu

Here’s a trick for the Windows 7 lovers among us. You can turn off the app tiles
displayed on the right side of the Start menu. To do this, right-click each app
tile and choose Unpin from Start. One by one, the app tiles go away, and soon,
all you’re left with is the Start menu Most Used list above the Start button. Who
said there’s no going back?

2
Modifying the Most
Used List
The Most Used list at the top of the
Start menu displays the program
icons of the apps you’ve used most
recently. You can change the pro-
grams displayed there by removing
the ones you no longer need.

1. Click the Start button to display

the Start menu.

2. Right-click the program icon of

the item you want to remove
in the Most Used list. A menu
appears. 1
 Customizing the Start Menu 121

3
3. Click More. A submenu of choices
appears.

Just Out of Sight, Not

Gone Forever
When you remove a program
from the most recently used list,
you aren’t doing anything to
affect the program in any way.
It is still installed in Windows 10,
and you can find it by going to All
Apps or clicking the Search tool
and searching for the program
name. If you meant to uninstall
the program completely, you
can do so by right-clicking the
program in the list and choos- 4
ing Uninstall from the menu that
appears.

4. Click Don’t Show in This List.

The program icon and name is
removed.

Is Your Most Used List Missing?

If you don’t see a Most Used list at the top of your Start menu, it could be that
the setting is turned off. To display the Most Used list, click Start, Settings,
choose Personalization, and click Start. Verify that the Show Most Used Apps
slider is set to On.
 122 Chapter 5 Personalizing Windows 10

Changing Start Menu 1

Settings
By modifying a few settings, you can
change the way Windows 10 displays
items on your Start menu. These settings
are in the Start category of Settings. You
can get to it by clicking Settings and then
choosing Personalization, or you can use
the shortcut shown in the following steps.

1. Right-click anywhere on the

2
Windows 10 Desktop. A list of
options appears. 5 4
2. Click Personalize. The
Personalization settings appear.

3. Click the Start category.

4. To hide the display of the Most

Used list in the Start menu, move
this slider to Off.

On by Default
By default, most of the sliders
shown here are set to On.

5. To turn off the display of recently 3 6 7 8

added apps, drag this slider to the
Off position.

6. If you want the Start menu to

appear full-screen (similar to what
you see in Tablet mode), move the
slider to the On position.

7. By default, Windows 10 shows

recently opened items in jump lists
that appear on the taskbar and
in the Start menu. To turn this off,
drag the slider to Off.

8. Click Choose Which Folders Appear

on Start to customize the folders
displayed in the Start menu.
 Customizing the Start Menu 123

>>>Go Further
PIN THE RECYCLE BIN TO THE START MENU
If you use the Recycle Bin often and want to add it to the Start menu where you
can reach it easily, right-click the Recycle Bin icon on your desktop, and choose
Pin to Start.

The Recycle Bin is added as an app tile on your Start menu, where you can reach
it as needed.

Resizing the Start Menu

By default, the Start menu stretches 2
to half the width of your screen, if
not more, showing lots of app tiles.
You can resize the menu, if you like,
so it takes up less or more space on
your desktop.

1. Click the Start button to display

the Start menu.

2. Hover the mouse over an edge

of the menu. When it changes
to a double-headed arrow, click 1
and drag the border to the left or
down.
4 3
3. To make the menu narrower, click
the right border of the menu and
drag to the left.

4. Drag the top border of the menu

down to create a more compact
effect.
 124 Chapter 5 Personalizing Windows 10

Tweaking Additional System Settings

Two more customizations you might want to make every so often include
changing the time (especially if you’re a traveler and don’t have your com-
puter set to adjust the time automatically) and the profile picture used with
your Microsoft account. You can change both items right from your Windows
10 desktop.

Changing the Time

It’s likely that the first time you log
in to Windows 10, the program will
ask you to verify or choose your time
zone. By default, when connected to 1 2
the Internet, Windows knows where
you are and what time it is, allowing
it to update your clock automatically.
You can, however, manually set the
time and time zone by following
these steps:

1. Select the Settings tool in the

Start menu to open the Settings
screen.

2. Click the Time & Language cat-

egory.

3. If you want to adjust the 3 4 5

time manually, turn Set Time
Automatically to the Off position.
The Change button becomes
available.

4. Click the Change button and

enter a new date and time.

5. Choose a new time zone by click-

ing the arrow and choosing your
zone from the list.
 Tweaking Additional System Settings 125

6. Leave the Adjust for Daylight

Saving Time Automatically turned
on if you want the time to be
adjusted for you when Daylight
Saving Time changes.

7. If you want to display your calen-

dar in other languages (for exam-
ple, Simplified Chinese), you can
select the language from this list.
8. Click the link to change the for-
mat of the date and time if you 6 8 7
want this information displayed
differently.
3

Changing Your Account

Picture
Your account picture appears—in
a tiny size—on the left side of your
Windows Start menu. You also see it
when you swipe up or click your Lock
screen. You can change your account
picture in Windows 10 as often as
you like.

1. Display the Start menu.

2. Click your profile picture. A small

menu appears.

3. Click Change Account Settings.

The Accounts screen appears.

1 2
 126 Chapter 5 Personalizing Windows 10

4. Click Browse for One to display

the Open dialog box and choose
a picture; click Choose Image to
add the image.

5. If you want to add a picture using

a camera connected to your com-
puter, click Camera.

6. Your webcam display opens,

showing a picture of you. When
the picture you want to capture is
displayed, tap or click anywhere
on the screen to take the photo
(not shown in figure). 5 4

Fewer Choices, Please

If you go through a whole slew of pos- 9
sible account picture choices and aren’t
particularly happy with any of them,
you can remove the ones that appear as
thumbnails beneath your chosen picture
in the Account Picture screen. Right-
click the picture and select Clear History.
Windows wipes away the images you’ve
added.

7. Windows 10 displays the picture

in a preview screen.

8. Click the cropping handles to

adjust what remains visible in the
picture.

9. When the picture is displayed the

way you want it to appear, tap or
8 7
click Done.

Retaking a Photo
If you want to replace the photo you
just captured, tap or click Retake and
repeat steps 6 through 9. Windows 10
then substitutes the new photo for your
Account Picture.
This page intentionally left blank
 Windows Defender has been
enhanced to provide significant new
protections for your system.

You can change location settings for

individual apps to control who has
access to your location information.
This chapter shows you how to keep your
computer safe by focusing on the following
tasks:

➔ Customizing your login

➔ Working with security and maintenance in
Windows 10
➔ Using Windows Defender
➔ Working with user accounts
➔ Maintaining your privacy
6
Securing Your Computer—
for Yourself and Your Family
With Windows 10 Fall Creators Update, Microsoft has ramped up
the attention given to making sure your computer is secure against
online threats, identity theft, and more. We seem to live in an age of
enormous data breaches, and the focus on security is well founded.
Microsoft has previously done a good job of providing security fea-
tures in Windows 10, but Fall Creators Update includes a substantial
build-out for Windows Defender, the primary security app used by
Windows 10, as well as new privacy tools so you can control how,
when, and why your apps share information about your location
and more.
In this chapter, we focus on the tools and techniques you can use in
Windows 10 to make sure your computer is as secure as possible for
you and your family. You learn how to create user accounts, assign
permissions (including family safety features), and make sure you’ve
got everything set up properly for a secure computing experience.
 130 Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family

New PCs—Security Before Startup

In Windows 10, PCs that are built on Unified Extensible Firmware Interface
(UEFI) firmware can take advantage of enhanced security features such as
Secure Boot, which does a scan and ensures system elements are okay before
Windows 10 even boots on your system. For most, just rest secure knowing you
have this feature working for you, but if you’d like to learn more about UEFI, you
should check out http://www.uefi.org.

Customizing Your Login

It seems like we’re always logging in to one thing or another, doesn’t it? We
log in to our phones, our work computers, our home computers. Most of us
want a smooth, simple login experience. Windows 10 offers a number of ways
you can log in so that the process reflects what you find easiest to do. You
might just log in with a simple four-digit pin or use a picture to draw a pat-
tern on the screen that only you know.

It’s Not All Good

SIMPLER ISN’T MORE SECURE
Although biometric security such as Windows Hello is generally more secure
than passwords, the same cannot (necessarily) be said about picture pass-
words or PINs. Picture and PIN passwords can be more convenient, especially
on touch-based devices, but that does not mean they’re more secure. PIN
passwords, in particular, are not more secure than a good alphanumeric pass-
word.

New security features in Windows 10 also include Windows Hello, which uses
facial recognition and iris scans to authenticate users and ensure the comput-
er’s security. These new technologies require infrared cameras on Windows 10
devices, so the practical use of these features might be a little further into the
future. Windows Hello also supports existing fingerprint readers, which may
be included on laptops or tablets or used as plug-in devices via USB.
 Customizing Your Login 131

>>>Go Further
FINDING WINDOWS HELLO
You might be surprised to see that in your Windows Hello settings on the Sign-
In Options screen, there’s a big smiley face but no way to set up the feature. No
options. Nothing to add. You might see a note that says, “Windows Hello isn’t
available on this device.”

This happens because Windows 10 displays the Set Up buttons for Fingerprint
and Face features only if your computer is equipped with a fingerprint reader or
an infrared camera that gives your system the facial recognition capabilities it
needs in order to use Windows Hello.

If you add a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera at a later point, come back
to Windows Hello, and you’ll see that those options are now available.

Changing a Password
By default, Windows 10 prompts you
to log in with your Microsoft account
and password. You can, however,
change your password at any time or
choose different types of passwords
(for example, a picture password or
a PIN logon) to help with authentica-
tion.
1 2
1. Click the Start button to display 3
the Start menu.

2. Select Settings.

3. Choose Accounts in the Settings

window.
 132 Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family

4 5
4. Click Sign-In Options.

Change Password Type

On the right side of the screen, you may
see up to four ways to make changes
for your Sign-In Options: Password, PIN,
Windows Hello, and Picture Password.
I cover these other options in the fol-
lowing tasks. (Note that Windows Hello
is available only if your system has the
capabilities that support the technology
for those features.)

6 7
5. In the Password area, click
Change. You’re prompted to enter
your Microsoft Account password.
After you enter it, the Change
Password screen appears.

6. In the Change Your Password

screen, type your old password in
the Old Password box.

Local Accounts
If you use a Local Windows account
instead of a Microsoft account, this
screen will look a bit different, but the
basic procedure remains the same.

8 9
7. Click to move the insertion point
to the Create Password box, and
enter a new password.

8. Retype the new password in the

Reenter Password box.

9. Click Next. Windows 10 lets you

know that you’ve successfully
changed your password, and you
can click Finish to return to the
Accounts window.
 Customizing Your Login 133

But First…
If this is the first time you’ve changed your password on your Windows 10
computer, the operating system may prompt you with a few security measures
before allowing you to change it. You might see a message that asks you to
confirm your secondary email address and then enter a code Microsoft sends
to that account to ensure your account security. Once you enter the code and
click Next, you see the Change Password screen so you can make the change
you want.

Account Trouble?
If you have forgotten the password you used with your Microsoft Account, you
can still change your password online. Click the Forgot Your Password? link
where you enter your login information, and Windows 10 displays a link you
can click to go online to resolve the problem.

>>>Go Further
SETTING STRONG PASSWORDS
A strong password is at least eight characters long and doesn’t include recogniz-
able words or number sequences. What’s more, you should vary the capitaliza-
tion of letters, mixing the upper- and lowercase letters. Windows 10 remembers
your password as case sensitive, which means that 62GoT38 is a different pass-
word from 62gOt38.
 134 Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family

Creating a PIN Logon 1 2

Chances are you’re familiar with using
PINs in other areas of your life. You use
a PIN for your debit card, and you might
have one set on your smartphone, for
example. Similarly, Windows 10 enables
you to create a four-digit PIN to use when
you log in to your computer or device.

1. Click Sign-In Options in the

Accounts section of Settings.

2. In the PIN area, click Add. Windows

10 prompts you to enter your cur- 3 4
rent password. After you do so, the
Set Up a Pin screen appears.

3. Type the four numbers you want to

use as your PIN.

4. Click in the Confirm PIN box and

retype the numbers you entered.

5. If you want to use numbers, letters,

and symbols in your PIN, click
the Include Letters and Symbols
checkbox. A PIN Requirements link
will appear to give you guidelines
on how to create an effective PIN. 5 6
6. Click or tap OK. Windows 10 saves
your PIN; the next time you log in,
you can enter the PIN instead of
your password. Windows displays
the Start screen immediately, even
before you press Enter!

Nothing Fancy, Bub

When you create a PIN, Windows 10 insists you use only numbers—and only
four of those, if you click the Use a 4-Digit PIN check box when you set up your
PIN. This means no alphabetic characters, punctuation symbols, or spaces. This
is less secure than a strong alphanumeric password.
 Customizing Your Login 135

Removing a PIN
If you decide you want to remove your PIN later, you can display the Sign-In Options
tab of the Accounts screen again and in the PIN area click Remove. You can also
change the PIN you created by clicking Change and entering and saving a new PIN.

Creating a Picture
Password
Here are the steps to add a picture
password:

1. Display the Accounts window

in Settings, and click Sign-In
Options.

2. In the Picture Password area,

tap or click Add. Select Create
a Picture Password. Windows
prompts you to enter your current
password. Type it and click OK.
1 2
Is It Really You?
Before you can create the picture
password, Windows 10 prompts
you to enter your password to
confirm that it is authentically you
wanting to change the password
style.

3. The Welcome to Picture Password

window appears, giving you
instructions about the process of
3 4 5
creating a picture password. Click
Choose Picture. The Open window
appears.

4. Locate and select the picture you

want to use.

5. Click Open.
 136 Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family

6. If you want to adjust the picture,

7
drag it to the right or left, up or
down.

7. Click Use This Picture.

Change the Picture

If you want to choose a different image
instead, click Choose New Picture and
repeat steps 4 through 7.

8. Using your finger or mouse, draw

three gestures on the picture. 6
For a moment after you draw on
the screen, an arrow shows how
Windows recorded the move-
ment. When prompted, repeat the
gestures. If you don’t make exact-
ly the same gestures, Windows
prompts you to try again.

Starting Over
If you don’t like the gesture you’ve used,
you can tap or click Start Over to create
new gestures. 8

9. After you draw the gestures

correctly, Windows displays a
Congratulations message. Click
Finish to save the picture pass-
word.

Don’t Worry, Be Happy

Don’t panic if you forget your picture password. Windows 10 can help you.
Go to the Sign-In Options page of the Accounts window and tap the Change
button in the Picture Password area. In the next window, after you enter your
Microsoft Account password, you can click Replay to see a repeat of the ges-
tures you used to create your password. You can also create a new picture pass-
word if you prefer.
 Working with Security and Maintenance in Windows 10 137

Removing a Picture Password

If you want to remove your picture password, display the Sign-In Options
screen of the Accounts window. Click the Remove button that now appears to
the right of the Change button in the Picture Password area to delete the pic-
ture password you added.

It’s Not All Good

THE FUSSINESS OF PICTURE PASSWORDS
One thing you’re likely to discover quickly: Picture passwords are very par-
ticular. Windows 10 might not record your gesture exactly as you think you
entered it. If you draw an arc on the screen, Windows might close it to create
a circle. Or the line you purposely skewed might show up straight. Use the Try
Again option to display the gestures Windows 10 is expecting.
It can also help to use a photo that has very definite patterns or lines you can
follow and remember easily. Too many curves or too much abstraction can
leave you wondering about the specific gestures you need to enter. On the
other hand, following an image’s precise curves or features is easier for some-
one else to guess. Pick your poison.

For Bluetooth Machines: Dynamic Lock

If your PC or tablet has Bluetooth capabilities, you can rely on Windows Hello to
lock your device for you automatically when you walk out of Bluetooth range.
To set things up, begin by turning on Bluetooth and pairing your PC and phone
so they are connected.

To turn on Dynamic Lock on your Windows 10 computer, display the Sign In

Options window, and click the Allow Windows to Detect When You’re Away and
Automatically Lock the Device check box. Now anytime you pick up your phone
and walk away, as soon as you get out of Bluetooth range, Windows 10 auto-
matically locks your computer. Pretty slick, eh?

Working with Security and Maintenance

in Windows 10
In previous versions of Windows, Microsoft included the Action Center as a
kind of hub for your system security. You would get a notification from the
 138 Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family

Action Center, for example, when something important related to your sys-
tem’s safety came up. This might be something such as a pop-up message
telling you that you’re running out of backup space on your hard drive or
your antivirus program needs an update.
With Windows 10, Microsoft took a different approach with the Action Center.
Now the center has become a hub of notifications of all sorts, which includes
social media updates and new email notices, as well as messages from your
computer or device that need your attention. For a quick look at the notifica-
tions, you can click the Notifications icon in the status tray of the taskbar or
swipe in from the right edge of the screen. To get to the tools you need to
make sure your system is working well, open the Security and Maintenance
window.

Reviewing Your System 2

Status
You can easily see which security
tools are in place on your computer,
change settings, and update
your software in the Security and
Maintenance window of the Control
Panel. Here’s how to get there:

1. Click in the Search box in the

taskbar, and type security and
maintenance.
2. Click Security and Maintenance.

1
 Working with Security and Maintenance in Windows 10 139

3. Click the arrow to the right of the

4 3 6
Security or Maintenance catego-
ries to display details about the
tools in each of those areas
4. In the Security and Maintenance
window, review any messages
that are displayed.
5. Click the link that is provided for
any tools you want to review or
change settings for.
5
6. Click the arrow to close the
expanded tool list when you’re
finished reviewing.

Not Sure What You Need?

If you aren’t clear about what types of security measures you should have in place, you can
let Microsoft help you make the call. Expand the Security list in the Security and Maintenance
window, and scroll down to the bottom of the list. Click the How Do I Know What Security
Settings Are Right for My Computer? link; Windows Help and Support displays the Security
Checklist for Windows so you can learn about the different tools and make changes as needed.

>>>Go Further
WHY WORRY ABOUT USER ACCOUNT CONTROL?
It’s not unusual today when you’re downloading files from the Web to encounter
websites and online programs that want to make changes to your computer. Some of
these files are legitimate—perhaps you need the latest version of Microsoft Silverlight
or Adobe Flash to play a movie trailer. But some programs are not so well intentioned,
and these are the ones you need User Account Control to block.

User Account Control lets you easily find out when a program wants to make a change
to your computer. You can set up User Account Control so you’ll be notified when a
program tries to change your system settings. (It’s set to do this by default.) Windows
10 offers four settings, ranging from Always Notify to Never Notify, and you can easily
change the settings by clicking Change User Account Control Settings in the left panel
of the Control Panel. Although User Account Control prompts can be annoying, before
you disable them, remember that they’re there for your protection.
 140 Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family

Changing Security and

Maintenance Alerts 1
Each Security and Maintenance message
includes a link that gives you the next step
to follow as you deal with the issue. You can
choose to turn off messages about that par-
ticular issue, archive the message, or ignore
the message. You can change which issues
you receive alerts for so that you are noti-
fied about only the ones you want to see.

1. In the Security and Maintenance

window, click Change Security and
Maintenance Settings.

2. Click to uncheck any security item

you don’t want Windows 10 to check
for.
2
Choice—It’s Your Prerogative
You can change the items Windows 10
checks for and the messages you receive
at any time. If you turn off an item and
then get concerned that maybe you
need it after all, go to the Security and
Maintenance window, click Change Security
and Maintenance Settings again, and click
to check any unmarked boxes of items you
want to add. Click OK to save your settings.
3 4

3. Click to uncheck any maintenance

messages you don’t want Windows
10 to display.

4. Click OK.

Out of Sight, Out of Mind

Although being alerted for every little thing can be annoying, unless you have a
specific reason for turning off an alert—for example, Windows 10 doesn’t recog-
nize the antivirus program you’re using and keeps telling you there’s no antivi-
rus program installed—the best practice is to leave all the alerts turned on.
 Using Windows Defender 141

Using Windows Defender

Windows Defender has gotten a big boost in Windows 10 Fall Creators
Update. Now the app, which was formerly an anti-spyware utility designed
to protect your computer from spyware and other intrusions, has grown up
into a multifaceted protection system that keeps an eye on the health of your
computer, scans regularly for viruses and malware, intercepts unrecognized
apps, safeguards your system with Windows Firewall, and enables you to set
up family security options so you know protection is in place for everyone in
your household who uses your computer.
If you’re concerned that your computer is infected, you can use Windows
Defender to scan your system regularly and remove any suspicious files
that have been added to your computer without your knowledge. Windows
Defender in Windows 10 also includes a network monitoring feature that
helps computers on a network detect and stop malware.

It’s Not All Good

CAN’T WE ALL JUST GET ALONG?
One of the challenges of working with antivirus, spyware, and malware pro-
tection programs is that they don’t play nicely together. As you can imagine,
they are suspicious of everyone; that’s their job.
This means that if you have installed another type of antivirus or spyware
program, such as Lavasoft’s Ad-Aware or Norton 360, Windows Defender
might be disabled.
If you’d rather have Windows Defender operating, you might need to
uninstall the other antivirus or spyware software before you can activate
Windows Defender. This can be a pain, but if you’ve deliberately paid for
and installed a different security suite, chances are it means you trust it to
do a more thorough job than Microsoft’s solution. And Windows Defender
Security—especially in its enhanced form, for Windows 10 Fall Creators
Update—is built to work with your operating system, so it is likely to be a
solid choice for protection.
 142 Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family

Checking Out the 2

Windows Defender
Security Center
Windows Defender is always working
in the background of your Windows
10 computer or device, but you can
check the status of the scans, tweak
settings, and more by displaying the
Windows Defender Security Center.

1. Type defender into the Search

box in the taskbar. The Search
pane appears, showing Windows
Defender in the results.

2. Click Windows Defender Security

Center.

3. Notice when the last scan of your

system was performed.

4. Review the status of the various

security tools. Windows 10 lets
you know if any action is needed
from you at this time.

5. Click one of the security catego-

ries to see updates related to
1
those areas.

6. Click Settings to change the way 5 3

in which Windows Defender noti-
fies you of issues and updates.

6 4
 Using Windows Defender 143

Scanning for Risks with

Windows Defender
Windows Defender is designed to 1 2 3
scan your system every so often—at
increments you choose—but you
can also choose to do a scan of your
PC whenever you like.

You can launch Windows Defender

from the Settings window, or you can
launch Defender as an app from the
Start menu. Either way, you can have
Windows Defender scan your PC to
make sure no worrisome files have
snuck in under your radar.
4
1. In the Windows Defender Security
Center, click Virus & Threat 5
Protection.

2. Review the information about the

most recent scan.

3. To launch a new scan, click the

Quick Scan button. Windows
Defender immediately begins
scanning your computer or
device.

4. If you want to do an in-depth

scan, click Advanced Scan.

5. Choose the option you want 6

for the type of scan you want
Windows Defender to perform.
You can do a Quick scan, a Full
scan, or a Custom scan.

6. Tap or click the Scan Now button.

Windows Defender begins the
scanning process.
 144 Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family

Choose a Scan
If you have specific concerns about a security threat, choose a Full scan. It takes
longer, but it is more thorough in scanning all your computer’s files.

Updating Your Definitions

Windows Defender uses what’s known as a definitions file to make sure it’s
checking for the latest viruses and spyware. Defender automatically updates
the file, but you can also have Defender check to see whether any new updates
are available. Click the Virus & Threat Protection category and choose Protection
Updates. Then tap or click the Check for Updates button to search for updates
to the definitions file.

7. After the scan completes,

Windows Defender updates the
scan information in the Virus &
Threat Protection category and
sends a system notification alert- Defender shows the
ing you that the scan is complete. results of the scan.

A Quick System Checkup

We talk more about the overall
health of your computer, and how
to keep your version of Windows
10 up to date, in Chapter 14,
“Caring for Your Computer and
Updating Windows.” Just make
a mental note that the Device
Performance & Health category
in Windows Defender keeps an
eye on such things for you. You
can get a quick check on update The app lets you
know the scan is
issues, storage space, driver
complete.
updates, and battery life in this
area of Windows Defender.
 Using Windows Defender 145

Checking Your Windows Firewall

A firewall checks all the information coming to your computer from the Inter-
net or any local network to which you are connected. Firewalls try to ensure
that any data received comes from a trusted contact and that the informa-
tion can be considered safe for your computer. If any suspicious information
is found, your Windows Firewall alerts you so that you can allow or block the
sender based on whether you think it should be allowed through the firewall.
Windows Firewall used to be a standalone tool that functioned in the protec-
tion of your system, but in Windows 10 Fall Creators Update, Windows Fire-
wall has been integrated into Windows Defender Security.

Checking the Firewall

Windows Defender keeps your 1 2
Firewall on by default. You can, how-
ever, check the settings and turn the
utility off or on again if necessary.

1. In the Windows Defender Security

Center, click the Firewall &
Network Protection category.

2. Review the status of the firewalls

used on your system. The green
check mark means the firewall is
on and functioning properly.

3. Click a setting to make changes to 3

it.

How Many Firewalls Do I Need?

You are likely to see three different firewall settings: domain, private, and public
When you are working on your home network, you typically are using a private
network. When you are using your computer or device in a public place, like a
library or coffee shop, the public firewall is used. And if you log in to a work-
place network, you might be using the domain firewall. It’s important that each
of these firewalls be in place so that Windows Defender can keep an eye on the
overall protection of your system.
 146 Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family

Changing Firewall
Settings
When Windows Firewall is active,
you are prompted each time a pro-
gram tries to make changes on your
computer that don’t appear to come
from an authorized source. You can
change the settings for Windows
Firewall so that you receive different
alerts using different criteria if you
like.

1. In the bottom area of the Firewall

& Network Protection window,
click Firewall Notification Settings.
1
2. Leave this setting set to On if you
want to continue receiving noti-
fications of all Defender activity 2
and scan results.

3. Leave this set to On if you want

to know when Windows Defender
blocks a suspicious app.

4. If you want to stop notifications

for one of the different network
areas (for example, for the domain
firewall), click to clear the check
mark in the check box.

Public Security
Public networks are generally 3 4
more unsecure than private home
or office networks. Windows
Firewall is more stringent in what
it treats as trustworthy over a
public network.
 Using Windows Defender 147

Working with Windows

SmartScreen
Windows SmartScreen is another Windows 1 2
10 utility that used to be a standalone app
and is now included as part of Windows
Defender Security Center. Windows
SmartScreen keeps an eye on your com-
puter or device and alerts you before
Windows 10 runs any unrecognized apps
or files you’ve downloaded from the Web.

By default, Windows SmartScreen displays

a warning before running an unrecog-
nized app. You can change Windows
SmartScreen settings if you want to, either 3 4
to turn off the feature (not a good idea) or
to require that administrator approval be
given before an unrecognized app can be
run.

1. In the Windows Defender Security

Center, click App & Browser Control.
The window shows a number of
settings from Windows SmartScreen
designed to help safeguard your
computer from unwanted apps.
Each of the settings is set to warn
you of any suspicious files or apps.

2. Choose whether you want to

be warned about apps and files,
whether you want to block them
entirely, or whether you want to
turn SmartScreen off (not recom-
mended).

3. Choose whether to block or be

warned about malicious sites and
potentially dangerous downloads
while you’re using the Edge browser.

4. Choose to protect your computer by

checking the web content that vari-
ous Microsoft Store apps might use.
 148 Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family

Setting Up Family Options

Now Windows Defender Security Center also includes a category for setting up security and
protection for your family members. The settings are tied to the user accounts for your kids, so
you can set age-appropriate controls and even set up schedules for web surfing and gameplay.

In the Windows Defender Security Center, click Family Options, and click View Family Settings.
This takes you to a site online connected to your Microsoft Account, where you can make choic-
es about reviewing the computer activity of your children, choose whether to block certain
types of websites, limit the types of games your kids have access to, and create a schedule that
manages the amount of time and the time of day your kids can use the computer.

Working with User Accounts

User accounts have been around for a while, and if you share a computer
with several people in your household, you know they are a good idea. When
you have separate accounts for different users, you can each have your own
preferences and favorite websites and programs. This makes it possible for
each of you to have a completely different experience—tailored to your own
preferences—even though you’re all sharing the same computer.

Adding a User
Individual users can have their own
user account so that specific prefer-
ences, histories, favorites, and more
can be linked with that account. It’s
a good idea to create separate user
accounts for each person who shares 2
your computer or device. Windows
10 enables you to add two kinds of
users: a family member or a user who
isn’t a family member.

1. Type account into the Search box

in the taskbar.

2. Click Add, Edit, or Remove Other

People in the results list.

1
 Working with User Accounts 149

3. Tap or click the + to the left of

3
Add a Family Member.

Other Users
Select Add Someone Else to This
PC if the account you want to add
is not a family member or regular
user. The steps for adding these
users is similar to what you see
here, except there is no child/
adult selection.

4. The Add a User window appears,

asking you whether the new fam-
ily member is an adult or a child.
Click your answer.

5. Enter the person’s email address.

6. Click Next.

4 5

6
 150 Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family

7. Click Confirm. Windows 10 tells

you to make sure the person
knows he needs to be connected
to the Internet the first time he
logs in.

Child Accounts
If the account you’re creating is
for a child, you see Family Safety
options on this screen. Click the
check box beneath the new user’s
profile picture placeholder to turn
on Family Safety settings.

>>>Go Further
AN ACCOUNT BY ANY OTHER NAME
When you add a new user, you’ll have the choice to sign the person up using her
Microsoft Account or sign up with a Local Account specific to that computer. The
difference is that when a person signs in using a Microsoft account, all system
preferences—including notification settings, color schemes, and more—are
available.
Using a Microsoft account also enables users to download apps from the
Microsoft Store and save content to the cloud using OneDrive. If the new user
doesn’t sign in with a Microsoft account, settings and preferences are stored on
the local machine.
 Working with User Accounts 151

Switching Users
You can easily switch among the 3 4 5
user accounts on your Windows 10
computer by clicking or tapping your
profile icon on the left side of the
Start menu. You also can sign out of
Windows 10, lock your computer, or
change users.

1. Open the Start menu.

2. Click or tap the profile area (either

your username or your picture) on
the left side of the Start menu.

Switching on a Touchable
If you’re using the Start screen on
a touch device, your profile icon is
located in the lower-left corner of
the Start screen. Tap your profile
picture to display the options
for logging out and changing
accounts.
1 2
3. Tap or click Lock to display your
Lock screen and safeguard your
computer. You might choose this
when leaving your computer
unattended for a while.

4. Tap or click Sign Out when you

want to sign out of Windows 10,
perhaps so that another user can
log in.

5. Tap or click another user account

to display the login screen for that
account. The other user can enter
the account password and click
Submit to log in.
 152 Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family

On Logging Out
If you log out of Windows 10, the next time you dismiss the Lock screen by
swiping the touchscreen or pressing any key, all user accounts on your com-
puter appear on the next screen so that you can tap or click the one you want
to use to log in. You can then enter the password that goes along with that
account to sign in to Windows 10.

Maintaining Your Privacy

Windows 10 makes it simple for you to share information among apps, both
online and off. Your apps can use your location data to set your time zone,
display the weather, offer location-related search results, and much more.
On the flip side of all this sharing are two important questions: How do these
apps share this information, and how much data do you really want to turn
loose out there in cyberspace? Windows 10 lets you determine whether you
want your apps to communicate with each other and share information
about you—such as your location or content URLs from the apps you use—
with others who are interested in gathering it.

Turn Off Location for Your Kids

Location settings are of special concern to parents who are doing their best
to safeguard their kids online. Although teens know for the most part they
shouldn’t share personal information on social media sites, some sites publish
location information if those settings are turned on. If you have a child using
social media, make sure location is turned off on phones and computing
devices.
 Maintaining Your Privacy 153

Choosing Privacy 2
Settings
To review and modify privacy set-
tings, follow these steps:

1. Type privacy into the Search box

on the taskbar.

2. Click Privacy Settings.

3. To allow Windows 10 to share
your search information so ads
are more targeted to your inter-
ests, leave this set to the On posi-
tion.

4. Leave this set to On if you want

web content to be personalized
to your local area using your lan-
guages list.

5. Leave this set to On if you want

to let Windows notice which apps
you open often to improve the
Start menu and search results.

6. Leave this setting On if you want

to receive suggestions in the
Settings app.
1

4 3

5 6
 154 Chapter 6 Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family

>>>Go Further
WHAT’S IN A PRIVACY STATEMENT?
When you click the Privacy Statement link on the Privacy screen, you are taken
online to the Windows page where the statement is posted. This statement
explains what personal information is gathered, what your choices are, and how
the information is used.

Setting Location Privacy

Here’s how to change your location
1 3
settings:

1. Display Settings and choose

Privacy.

2. Click Location.

3. If you want to turn location set-

tings completely off, click the
Change button. A small pop-up
box appears. Drag the Location
slider to the Off position.

4. Scroll down through the window

until you can see the location set-
tings for your apps. 1
4
5. If you want to leave location set-
tings on but allow only selected
apps to use them, go through
your apps list and slide all those
you do not want to have access to
your location to the Off position.

5
 Maintaining Your Privacy 155

It’s Not All Good

RISKY BUSINESS
Although giving apps access to your location can have benefits (finding local
restaurants, showing friends on Facebook where you are so they can join you,
and so on), it also brings concerns. First, with our ongoing struggle between
privacy and security, we don’t always want to be on other peoples’ radar
screens. Second, some people can use that information in ways that could
pose a risk. For example, you don’t want potential predators to be able to
know where in the city your child is posting from or provide too much infor-
mation about your location if you are going to be away.
 You can scroll through
apps listed alphabetically
in the Start menu.

You can review, purchase,

download, and install apps
easily in Microsoft Store.
This chapter shows you how to use and
update apps in Windows 10 by teaching
these tasks:

7
➔ Getting started with apps
➔ Finding and starting apps
➔ Moving, grouping, and removing apps
➔ Working with apps
➔ Closing apps
➔ Getting apps from the Microsoft Store

Discovering, Using, and

Sharing Favorite Apps
From the moment you first power up your Windows 10 computer
or device, you’ll notice that the operating system comes with a
number of apps you can use. As your experience with Windows 10
grows, you’ll no doubt add more and more apps that fit the way you
work and the type of entertainment and activity (such as games)
you enjoy in your free time. You can find thousands of apps in all
sorts of categories in the Microsoft Store.
Because Microsoft’s ultimate goal is a unified interface that works
seamlessly across all kinds of computers and devices, the apps in
the Microsoft Store are known as universal apps that are designed
to work consistently across all types of computing formats. For
example, the Netflix app is a universal app, available in desktop,
tablet, Xbox, and phone versions, all of which work similarly so you
know what you’re doing no matter which technology you’re using.
Microsoft says that for universal apps, the code behind the scenes is
80 percent the same from device to device—there’s only a 20 per-
cent difference involved in fitting the app for the phone, your tablet,
or your Xbox.
 158 Chapter 7 Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps

This chapter introduces you to working with the apps on your computer or
device and shows you how to find, download, and update apps from the
Microsoft Store.

Getting Started with Apps

Windows 10 includes a number of apps you can use as soon as you fire up
the operating system. You’ll find what you need to check and send email, set
appointments on your calendar, connect with others through messaging,
catch up on the latest in your favorite social media accounts, and open Micro-
soft Edge for some mindless browsing. These apps give you a good start on
the types of tasks you want to accomplish in Windows 10, but this is only the
beginning. You can download literally thousands of apps from the Microsoft
Store, and developers are posting new apps there all the time.
The Windows 10 Start menu does a good job of giving you access to all the
apps installed on your computer or tablet. On the right side of the menu, you
see app tiles, which provide bits of information like what the weather looks
like today, how many unread emails you have, or what the latest headlines
are. On the left side of the menu, you see the apps you’ve used most recently,
and you can scroll through an alphabetical list of your installed apps to find
the one you want.

Starting in Tablet Mode

As you learned in an earlier chapter, Windows 10 Creators Update is designed
to anticipate what kind of computer or device you’re using and start up in
the mode that is right for your hardware. If you’re using a tablet, Windows 10
launches in Tablet mode, which means the Start menu looks like a grid of app
tiles that stretches across the screen. To see the alphabetical list of all apps on
your tablet, tap the All Apps tool in the upper left of the Start screen.
 Getting Started with Apps 159

Checking Out Your Apps

on the Start Menu
The Start menu actually does a good
job of organizing many different
apps into one relatively small, easy-
to-access space. When you click or
tap the Start button, you can choose
1 2
apps in the following ways:

1. Click or tap a recently added app.

2. Choose an app from the Most

Used list.

3. Tap or click the name of an app in

the alphabetical list. (Scroll down
to see more.)

4. Click or tap the app tile for the

app you want to open.
3 5 4
5. Click or tap an app icon in the
taskbar.

Pinning Apps to the Start

Menu and the Taskbar
As you look through all the apps on
the Start menu, you might discover a
few you’d like to add to the app tiles
2
on the right side of the menu. You can
also add apps you use often to the
taskbar at the bottom of the screen.
You can pin new apps easily—and
unpin apps you no longer need—by
following these steps:

1. Click the Windows Start button to

display the Start menu.

2. Scroll through the app list if nec-

essary to locate the app you want
to use, and then right-click it. 1
 160 Chapter 7 Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps

3. Click Pin to Start if you want the

3
app to be added as a tile to the
app grid in the Start menu.

4. Alternatively, click More and click

Pin to Taskbar to add the app to
the taskbar at the bottom of the
screen.

Moving Apps Around

You can easily move an app tile to
any point on your Start menu by
tapping and holding, or clicking
and dragging, it to a new location. 4
The other apps in the destination
area move to make room for the
new app. You’ll learn more about
this later in this chapter.

Finding and Starting Apps

When you have dozens—or even hundreds—of apps installed on your com-
puter or device, finding the specific one you want can be difficult. Luckily, you
can use the Windows 10 Search box to quickly locate the app you’re looking
for.

Finding an App
The Search box in the taskbar has a dual purpose; it calls Cortana to your
aid in finding information, events, and activities you’re looking for. You can
also use Search as a traditional Search tool, and it is a powerful one. Search
quickly does a comprehensive search of your computer or device—including
online storage—and produces a results list that shows apps, settings, files,
and more. Here’s how to use it to find the app you want:
 Finding and Starting Apps 161

3
1. Click in the Search box on the
taskbar.

2. Type the name of the app you’d

like to find.

3. Click or tap the app name in the

results list that reflects the app
you want to launch.

Downloading and
Installing, Too
You’ll learn more about what to
do with the apps after you’ve
found them, if they aren’t already
installed on your computer or
device, later in this chapter.

Launching an App from 1 2

the Start Menu
Microsoft gives you a couple of
options for launching apps from the 2
Start menu. You can click the link in
the list on the left or click the tile that
represents the program you want to
run. As you learned earlier, you can
also launch an app you’ve pinned to
the taskbar.

1. Click the Start button to display

the Start menu.

2. Click the program you want to

launch. 1
 162 Chapter 7 Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps

Moving, Grouping, and Removing Apps

You can organize the apps available on the Start menu so that you can find
them easily. This could involve moving apps around on the menu, grouping
them in ways that make sense to you, or removing ones you don’t need. If
you remove an app from the Windows 10 Start menu, you aren’t removing it
from your computer altogether; you are simply taking it off the menu.

Moving Apps on the

Start Screen
You can rearrange the apps on the
Start menu to better fit the way you
work.

1. Select the app you want to move

by clicking and holding it.

2. Drag the app tile to the new loca-

tion. When you release the app
tile, the other app tiles are rear-
ranged to make room for the new
app tile position.

Cleaning Up
One of my pet peeves is having
wide and square tiles arranged 1 2
on top of each other, resulting in
blank space in the columns. So,
I rearrange things to make the
best use of space. The nice thing
in Windows 10 is that you can put
them in any order you like.
 Moving, Grouping, and Removing Apps 163

Creating an App Group

Notice that the Windows 10 Start
menu includes a couple of “islands”
of app tiles, with some grouped
together with a little space between
groups. You can change the way the
groups are organized by moving app
tiles from one group to another or by
creating your own groups.
3 2
1. Click and hold the tile you want to
move.

2. Drag it to the space between one

of the app groups on the Start
menu, and release the tile. A hori-
zontal bar appears to show you
where the tile will be placed when
you release it.

3. Grab other apps, drag them to the

same space, and release them.
Windows adds space around the 1
group so that you can see it easily
as a group.

Making It All Fit

You can easily resize the app tiles
after you add them to the new
group by selecting the app tile
and choosing Resize in the Apps
bar. Then select the size you want
the tile to be. Windows 10 rear-
ranges the tiles in the group for
you.
 164 Chapter 7 Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps

Naming App Groups

After you’ve created your app
groups, you can further organize
them by assigning a group name
that appears on the Start screen. You
can give your groups any name you
like and change the name as often as
it suits you.
1 2

1. On the Start menu, click in the

blank area above the app group.
A text box opens.

2. Type a name for the group.

3. Click outside the text box (or

press Enter). The name appears
above the group you selected.

Removing an App from

the Start Menu 3

If you want to remove some of the

unnecessary apps that appear on the
Start menu by default, you can do 2 3
that easily and give yourself a little
extra room.

1. Click the Start button to display

the Start menu.

2. Right-click the app tile you want

to remove. A list of app options
appears.

3. Click Unpin from Start to unpin

the app so that it is still installed
on your computer but not visible
as an app on the Start menu. 1
 Working with Apps 165

Working with Apps

In early versions of Windows, the “windows” in which your programs
appeared were decidedly pronounced. You could always see the window
frame—including the title bar, the Close box, the scrollbars, and the status
bar at the bottom—no matter what task you might be performing. With
Windows 8 came the advent of “modeless” or “windowless” windows. The
idea is to create a more transparent computing experience so you aren’t
quite so aware of the periphery of what you’re doing and you can focus
wholeheartedly on your work inside the window.
In Windows 10, you see modeless windows only if you’re using Tablet mode.
In that mode, being able to use the entire width and breadth of the screen
becomes important. You can swipe in to display the window border, but by
default, you see borderless windows on your tablet.
On the desktop, however, you see the familiar window borders, complete
with title bar, Quick Launch toolbar, Close box, status bar, and more.

>>>Go Further
SWITCHING AMONG OPEN APPS
Similar to the way you moved from one app to another in previous versions of
Windows, you can see your open apps by pressing Alt+Tab in Windows 10. Now,
however, the key combination displays Task view, showing thumbnail images of
your open apps. Each time you press Tab while holding Alt, Windows 10 moves
to the next open app on your computer. Release the keys when the app you
want to use is highlighted.

You can also click the Task View tool, available in the taskbar, to display a more
static version of Alt+Tab. Clicking the Task View tool displays all open apps on the
screen at once so that you can click the one you want to use next.
166 Chapter 7 Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps

Exploring an App Window

Depending on whether you open an app in Desktop mode or Tablet mode,
the app might appear in the Windows 10 modeless style or in the more tra-
ditional desktop style. Here’s a quick look at some common features of app
windows:

Ribbon Title bar Window controls

Work area Scrollbars

• Title bar—The title bar of the window displays the icon of the program
in the far left, as well as tools in the Quick Launch bar.

• Window controls—In the upper-right corner of the program window

are three tools to change the state of the window. Minimize reduces the
window to the taskbar; Restore Down reduces the window to its previous
smaller size (or, if the window is already at a smaller size, it changes to
Maximize, which makes the window full size); and Close, which closes the
file and, if no other files are open for that program, closes the program as
well.

• Ribbon—The ribbon is a feature common to some legacy programs,

offering the tools and options you need for working with various pro-
grams. You instead might see a menu bar listing menu names close to
the top of the window. You can click a menu name to display a list of
tools you can use in your program.
 Working with Apps 167

• Scrollbars—Depending on the size of your file and the type of program

you are using, you might see horizontal and vertical scrollbars.

• Work area—The work area of the window is the place where you write
documents, create worksheets, edit photos, and more. The file you open
and work with appears in the work area.

Exploring a Windows 10 Universal App

Windows 10 universal apps have a new and improved look that makes the
tools easy to find and the screen easy to navigate. The title bar and window
tools (Minimize, Restore, and Close) are at the top of the screen. Along the
left edge of the screen is the Expand button that “rolls out” the names of tools
shown horizontally down the left side of the display.

Title bar Windows controls

Expand

App
tools

Profile

App settings
 168 Chapter 7 Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps

2
Working with an App
Virtually all universal apps have some
consistent features you can work
with by following these steps, which
use the Weather app as an example.

1. Click the Start button to open the

menu.
2. Click the Weather app. The app
opens fully on your screen.
1
3. Click the menu button in the
upper left. The menu opens,
showing you the names of the
various tools in the toolbar on the
3
left.

4. Click Settings. The settings for the

Weather app appear.

4
 Working with Apps 169

5. Click the arrow to return to the

main Weather app window. 5

Snapping Apps
Snapping apps enables you to arrange two or more apps open on the screen
at once.
You can snap up to four apps depending on your screen’s resolution, arrang-
ing them by dragging them with your finger, using the mouse, or using the
keyboard (the Windows key and the arrow keys) to position the apps where
you want them to appear.
 170 Chapter 7 Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps

Key Combinations for 2×2 Display

To place the app Use these keystrokes
Upper-left corner Win + left arrow, Win + up arrow
Upper-right corner Win + right arrow, Win + up arrow
Lower-left corner Win + left arrow, Win + down arrow
Lower-right corner Win + right arrow, Win + down arrow

To make use of this feature, open the apps you want to use and drag each one
to the corner in which you want it placed. Windows 10 positions each app in
that quadrant of the screen so that you can work with them side by side.
Although Microsoft calls this feature 2×2—meaning two apps horizontal and
two apps vertical—you don’t have to have four apps open to use it. You can
grab and “snap” an app into place on one side of the screen and do the same
with another so you have two apps tiled on the screen. Or you can do the
same with three apps—two on one side and one on the other. The feature is
designed to be flexible, so experiment and see what’s most comfortable for
you.

Get Me Back to Full Screen

When you want to do away with the tiling effect, click the divider and drag it to
the right, off the right edge of the screen. The app that was in the left window
then becomes the only app visible on your screen. You can also make an app
full screen quickly by double-clicking the title bar or clicking the Restore tool
on the current app to enlarge it to Full Screen view.

It’s Not All Good

FINDING THE SNAP FOR YOU
Depending on the device or computer you are using, not all snap features
may work for you. For example, Windows 10 includes the Snap Assist, vertical
snap, and 2×2 snapping, but only 2×2 snap works on my 2-in-1 tablet.
Snap Assist displays thumbnails of other open apps whenever you snap
an app to the side of the screen, and vertical snap enables you to use the
Windows key with up-, down-, right- or left-arrow keys to position the open
app where you want it to appear on the screen.
 Closing Apps 171

Closing Apps
One of the jarring things about the earliest versions of Windows 8 was that
you didn’t need to close any app you had opened; there was no Close tool,
and apps not in the current focus were said to go into suspension so they
weren’t using any active memory. That idea was just too bizarre for many
Windows users.
So now, in Windows 10, the Close box is part of every app you work with, no
matter what.

1 2
Closing Selected Apps
When you’re ready to put away an app
you’ve been working with, closing it is a
simple matter. Follow these steps:

1. Select the app you want to close

if you have more than one app
displayed on the screen.

2. Click or tap the app’s Close box.

Save Before You Close

Many apps save their data as you work,
but for those that don’t, make sure to
save any work you have in progress
before you close the app. 1 2

Using the Task Manager

You can also close open apps using
the Task Manager.

1. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete and click

Task Manager to display the Task
Manager window. (You can also
right-click the taskbar and select
Task Manager from the shortcut
menu that appears.)

2. Select the app you want to close.

 172 Chapter 7 Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps

3. Select End Task to close the

selected app.

>>>Go Further
ADVANCED MANAGEMENT
The Task Manager can give you all kinds of information about how much pro-
cessing power each app uses, but the super technical information is hidden by
default in Windows 10. When you open Task Manager, you simply see which apps
are running. You can then decide whether you want to see more information
by clicking the More Details link at the bottom of the menu. These details can
include showing how much processing power each open app is using and how
that might be affecting the overall performance of your computer or device.

One great feature the detailed version of Task Manager offers is an evaluation of
how much impact the apps you load automatically at startup are having on your
computer’s performance.

After you’ve enabled More Details, click the Startup tab at the top of the Task
Manager dialog box. In the Startup Impact column, on the far right of the dialog
box, you see how Windows 10 rates the impact the various apps have on the
startup routine. If you see an app that is rated as having a High impact, you can
select it and then tap or click Disable to keep it from loading automatically. You
might find that Windows 10 boots faster after you’ve disabled high-impact apps.
However, you should keep in mind that disabling these apps can prevent specific
features and functions of your system from operating as intended.
 Getting Apps from the Microsoft Store 173

Getting Apps from the Microsoft Store

The Microsoft Store is the place where you’ll find all kinds of apps, games,
media, and more to extend your digital experience whether you’re using a
computer, tablet, or phone. The Store includes lots of free apps as well as
apps and media you can purchase. You can buy and watch seasons of your
favorite TV shows, find and stream new music, even purchase and read
ebooks—right in Windows 10.
You display the Microsoft Store by clicking the Store app on your Start menu
or on the taskbar. When the Store opens, you see a number of suggested and
popular apps (just in case you’re in a shopping mood). You can also search for
specific apps in the Store, browse through apps in different collections, take
a look at the top-rated apps, get information about the apps you’ve already
purchased and downloaded, and more.
Tap to Search for
Choose your media learn more an app

Look through collections Scroll down to browse

As you scroll down the Store page, you’ll see that it displays a number of cat-
egories, including Today’s Deals, Picks for You, Most Popular, Top Free Apps,
Top Free Games, New Movies, Top-Selling TV Shows, New Books, and Collec-
tions. At the far right of each category is a Show All link. Click the link, and
the Store displays all available apps or games in that category.
 174 Chapter 7 Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps

Searching for an App 1 2

To search for an app within the

Microsoft Store, open the Store app and
use the Search tool that appears in the
upper-right corner.

1. Display the Microsoft Store.

2. Click in the Search box and type a
word or phrase you want to search
for. The Microsoft Store displays a
short list of direct matches.
3. To see a broader range of results,
click the magnifying glass. A
results page appears, showing 4 3
you all the apps and games that
match your search phrase.
4. Refine the search by clicking the
drop-down boxes and choosing
options that further narrow the
search results.
5. Review information about the
app, including the price and the
average user rating.
6. Click a tile to display more
detailed information about the
specific app. 6 5

Reviewing and Installing

an App
You can easily install an app you’ve
found by tapping or clicking it, reading
the description (and perhaps the user
1
reviews, too), and then clicking the Install
button. Don’t forget to check the price,
which appears just below the Install but-
ton in the top-left corner of the screen.

1. Find the app you want to view in

the Microsoft Store and click the
app tile. The app page opens.
 Getting Apps from the Microsoft Store 175

2. Scroll through the app informa- 3

tion and decide whether you
want to install the app.

3. Click Get to start the installation.

Windows 10 shows you the status
of the installation.

4. Click Pause to suspend the down-

load.
5. Click the X to cancel the installa-
tion.

Opening an Installed App

When the installation is com- 2 4 5
plete, the Get button changes
to Launch, and you can click the
button to launch the app on your
Windows 10 PC or device. You
might also see a Cortana noti-
fication that the app has been
installed and is ready to launch.

Managing Your Apps

You can use the Microsoft Store app to
see which apps you’ve purchased and
installed, and you can easily update,
install, or remove them as needed. 1 4 3 2

1. Display the Microsoft Store by

clicking the Store app in the
Windows 10 taskbar.

2. Click the See More button. A list

of options appears.

3. Click Settings to change the way

the Store displays information.

4. Click Purchased to see a list of all

the apps you’ve purchased from
the Microsoft Store.
 176 Chapter 7 Discovering, Using, and Sharing Favorite Apps

5. Click My Library to see all the

5 6
apps you’ve purchased and
installed across all your Windows
devices.

6. Click Downloads and Updates

to see which apps you have that
are ready for downloading and
installing.

Updates Available
Apps might show up in your
Downloads list when you have
a version of an app for which
an update is available. Click the
Download button to the right
of the app to update the app, or
click the Trash icon to delete the
update. If you want to check for
updates for all your apps, click the
Check for Updates button in the
upper-right area of the screen.

Overseeing Your
Finances in the
Microsoft Store
The Microsoft Store also makes 2 1
it easy for you to keep an eye on
how much you’re spending. You
can access your account within the
Microsoft Store and make any chang-
es you need to on the fly.

1. Open the Microsoft Store and click

Account at the top of the screen.

2. Click Purchased. The Order History

page of your Microsoft account
appears.
 Getting Apps from the Microsoft Store 177

3 4
3. Review the recent transactions
connected to your Microsoft
account.

4. Click the Close box when you’re

finished reviewing your transac-
tions.

2
Uninstalling Apps
To free up space on your hard drive
and allow room for other programs,
you can easily remove apps you no
longer need.

1. Display the Start menu and locate

the app you want to uninstall.

2. Right-click the app or app tile to

display the options menu.

3. Click Uninstall. Windows 10 dis- 1 3

plays a message box asking you
to confirm the removal of the app.

4. Click Uninstall, and Windows 10

removes the app.
4
 You can pin favorite
folders to Quick Access.

OneDrive folders appear

showing your files in the cloud.
This chapter shows you how to use File
Explorer to organize your folders and files by
exploring these tasks:

➔ Getting started with File Explorer

➔ Using the ribbon
➔ Managing your files and folders
➔ Copying, moving, and sharing files and folders
➔ Using Files On-Demand with OneDrive
8
Working with Your Files in
File Explorer and OneDrive
When you need to manage, copy, and organize files and folders in
Windows 10, you use File Explorer to accomplish that task. This tool
has been around as long as Windows has existed, although its name
changed from Windows Explorer to File Explorer with the advent of
Windows 8.
In Windows 10 Fall Creators Update, OneDrive—which is integrated
with File Explorer so you can get to your cloud files easily—has got-
ten a development boost. Now OneDrive files are available to you
“on-demand,” which means you’re able to see all your files when
you view them in File Explorer, but OneDrive downloads and opens
the files you need as you open them. This preserves disk space for
you and makes it seamlessly easy for you to work with files anytime,
anywhere.
This chapter introduces you to File Explorer and shows you how to
save files to—and retrieve files from—your OneDrive folders in the
cloud.
 180 Chapter 8 Working with Your Files in File Explorer and OneDrive

Getting Started with File Explorer

Sure, media and gaming are both big draws for computer and device users
these days. But once upon a time most of us used our computers to get work
done—to create, edit, and share files; to create and manage projects; to track
sales and produce reports; and more.
Whether social media and movies have taken over a large percentage of your
computer time or not, files and folders are still at the heart of computing for
many people.
Working with the files you create is likely a daily reality, whether you are
updating and sharing worksheets and documents or you need a way to man-
age your favorite media. File Explorer is the tool in Windows 10 you use to
work with your many files and folders. Luckily, it’s always within reach: You
launch File Explorer from the taskbar or from the Start menu, which means
you can get to it easily no matter what else you might be doing.

Starting File Explorer

The easiest way to launch File Explorer is to click or tap the File Explorer
icon on the left side of the taskbar. File Explorer opens in a window on your
screen.

Click or tap to launch

File Explorer.
 Getting Started with File Explorer 181

Touring the File Explorer Screen

File Explorer is simple to use, and the tools are fairly intuitive. Across the top
you see four tabs—File, Home, Share, and View—that contain the tools you’ll
use to work with your files and folders. The column on the far left is a Naviga-
tion pane that lists the different places your files are stored.
The Quick Access area is the place where you can pin all the folders you use
most often—this way you can find them quickly anytime you need them.
The center column shows you the contents of the selected location, and
the column on the right shows you more about a file selected in the center
column.
Here are some of the key tools you’ll be using in File Explorer:
Minimize
Location bar Refresh button the ribbon

Help

Search
Quick box
Access

Navigation pane Preview pane

• Location bar—The Location bar shows the currently displayed folder.

• Refresh button—The Refresh button updates the list of files in the cur-
rent folder.

• Search box—You can use the Search box to find folders and files in File
Explorer.

• Navigation pane—The Navigation pane displays your favorites, folders,

and files on your computer.
 182 Chapter 8 Working with Your Files in File Explorer and OneDrive

• Quick Access—Quick Access displays key folders and accounts, such as

Office 365, that you use often. You can pin folders in the Quick Access
area so you can reach them easily.

• Preview pane—The Preview pane shows an image of the file selected in

the center column of File Explorer.

• Minimize the ribbon—Use this tool to both hide and display the File
Explorer ribbon.

• Get Help—Click Get Help to display a pop-up window of help informa-

tion related to the task you were performing in File Explorer.

Switching Between the Preview and Details Pane

You’ll use the panel on the right side of File Explorer to get more information
about a file you’re working with. File Explorer changes what appears in that
panel, depending on which view you have selected: the Preview pane or the
Details pane. These two tools act as a toggle. When you click or tap the View
tab and display the Preview pane, you see a preview of the contents of the file.
When you tap or click the Details pane, the Preview pane is replaced by a pane
that shows you when the file was last modified, what file size it is, whether the
file is shared, and other file details.

Working with Quick

Access
The Quick Access area in File Explorer gives
you access to key folders and accounts
connected to your computer or device.
For example, you can get to your desktop,
your Downloads folder, your Office 365
account, the Recycle Bin, and other folders
you pin in place in the Quick Access area. 1

If your phone is connected to your

Microsoft Account (and connected by USB
to your PC), you’re able to access the files
on your phone by using File Explorer as
well.

1. Click Quick Access in the

Navigation pane.
 Getting Started with File Explorer 183

2
2. Click the arrow to the left of Quick
Access to display the items in the
list.

3. Click any folder you want to view.

4. To pin a folder to Quick Access,

right-click the folder you want to
add.

5. Click Pin to Quick Access.

3
Unpinning Is a Snap
You can easily remove a folder
you no longer want pinned to 5 4
Quick Access by right-clicking the
folder and choosing Unpin from
Quick Access. You can also click
the Pin icon to the right of the
folder to unpin it.

Checking Out This PC

This PC, located in the Navigation
pane, also gives you top-level access
to your content, organized by type or
location. The content is arranged by
category (what in earlier versions of
Windows we called libraries): Music,
1
Pictures, Documents, Videos, and
Downloads. This PC also shows you
at a glance which devices and drives
are connected to your PC.

1. Click or tap the arrow to the

right of This PC in the Navigation
pane. The list of primary folders
appears.

2. Select the folder with the files you

want to view. 2
 184 Chapter 8 Working with Your Files in File Explorer and OneDrive

3. Click the arrow to display subfold-

ers.

4. Click a file in the folder to see its

Preview pane.

3 4

Changing the File Explorer Layout

You can hide and redisplay the various panes in File Explorer: Details, Preview,
and Navigation. Tap or click the View tab and in the Panes group on the left
of the ribbon, select the pane you want to display. If you deselect both the
Preview pane and the Details pane, the center pane extends to show only the
files and subfolders in the currently selected folder. You can also tap or click the
Navigation pane arrow to display a menu of options for changing the way the
Navigation pane displays folders and favorites. To redisplay a pane you’ve hid-
den, tap or click the name of the pane to select the one you want to show.

Using the Ribbon

The File Explorer ribbon offers the tools you need based on what you’re try-
ing to do. Even the major tabs change, depending on what you’ve selected. If
you choose This PC, for example, the tabs that appear are File, Computer, and
View. But if you select one of the folders in the This PC group, the tabs are
File, Home, Share, and View.
In addition to the primary tabs, the File Explorer tab displays contextual tabs
that appear only when you’ve selected a specific something. For example,
when you click one or more picture files, the Picture Tools contextual tab
appears above the ribbon. When you click outside the picture file, the Picture
Tools tab disappears.
 Using the Ribbon 185

Learning the Ribbon Layout

The tabs in File Explorer group all the tools you need for working with your
files and folders.
The File tab gives you access to the folders you use frequently. You can also
work with the command prompt, delete the file history, display help, and
close File Explorer.

The Home tab provides common tools you’ll use for copying and pasting files
and paths; moving, deleting, and renaming files and folders; adding folders;
opening files and folders; displaying file and folder properties; and selecting
files and folders.

The Share tab contains tools for sharing the content you’ve selected, whether
you want to email the files or folders, compress them into a zip file, share
them with your HomeGroup, or fine-tune the security settings assigned to
the file or folder.
 186 Chapter 8 Working with Your Files in File Explorer and OneDrive

The View tab includes tools you can use to change the way the File Explorer
window appears. You can use the tools in the View tab to set up File Explorer
the way you want it, displaying the Navigation pane, the Preview or Details
panes, the size of the icons you want to use, and the data that will be either
hidden or displayed. You can also add columns, sort files, and select from dif-
ferent layouts in the File Explorer screen.

Recognizing Contextual Tabs

You know when you’re looking at a contextual tab on the File Explorer ribbon
because it looks different from the regular tabs. The regular tabs are white and
gray—the selected tab appears white, and the other tabs appear gray. When
you’ve selected a file, a folder, or another object in File Explorer, a contextual
tab related to the item you selected appears in another color along the top of
the ribbon. When you click the contextual tab, you find tools that enable you to
work specifically with the file or folder you’ve selected.

Showing and Hiding the File Explorer Ribbon

The ribbon contains the tools you use to work with your files and folders in File Explorer.
Each tab contains a unique set of tools, and categories within the tabs group like tools.
For example, in the Organize group of the Home tab are tools for moving and copying
files to other folders. Additionally, the Organize group includes files for deleting and
renaming files.

1
Some users prefer hiding the ribbon
when they aren’t working with it;
this gives them a little more room to
work with their files. The tool for hid-
ing and displaying the ribbon is near
the Help tool in the right side of the
File Explorer window.

1. You can hide the ribbon by tap-

ping or clicking the Minimize the
Ribbon tool.
 Using the Ribbon 187

2
2. Display the ribbon by tapping
or clicking the same tool, which
is now called the Expand the
Ribbon tool.

>>>Go Further
MORE TOOLS WITHIN REACH: THE QUICK
ACCESS TOOLBAR
File Explorer also has a Quick Access toolbar in the upper-left corner of the
Explorer window. The Quick Access toolbar gives you a small, customizable set of
tools you can get to easily. It’s always within easy clicking or tapping reach.

By default, the Quick Access toolbar in File Explorer shows only the Properties
and New Folder tools, but you can tap or click the Customize Quick Access
Toolbar arrow next to the New Folder tool to display options that enable you to
add undo, redo, delete, and rename tools. To add a tool, click or tap the one you
want to add to the toolbar. To remove a tool, tap or click the arrow again, and
then tap or click a selected tool to remove the check mark. The tool is removed
from the toolbar.

You also can choose a different position for the Quick Access toolbar by tap-
ping or clicking the Customize arrow and selecting Show Below the Ribbon. This
moves the Quick Access toolbar so that it appears beneath the ribbon but above
the Location bar. There’s also a command that suppresses the display of the rib-
bon in the Quick Access toolbar menu; to hide the ribbon, click or tap Minimize
the Ribbon.
 188 Chapter 8 Working with Your Files in File Explorer and OneDrive

Get the Scoop on Your Tools

File Explorer also has hotkey ToolTips that tell you the name of the tool, give
you a short description, and (in some cases) display the shortcut key for using
the tool. All you need to do is hover the mouse over an item you’re wondering
about.

>>>Go Further
LIBRARY CHANGES IN WINDOWS 10
In previous versions of Windows, libraries in the Navigation pane offered you
indexed locations of a specific type of files. The library gathered like files togeth-
er so you could find them easily. When you clicked a library to view its contents,
what you were really seeing were links to the files stored in their respective fold-
ers.

Libraries were phased out in Windows 8.1 because the primary folders in This PC
enabled you to do basically the same tasks you performed with libraries. But if
you like the convenience libraries offered, you can add them to the Navigation
pane in Windows 10.

Click the Navigation Pane tool in the View tab and select Show Libraries. You can
also create new libraries of your own by right-clicking or tapping and holding the
folder you want to use to create a new library; then select Include in Library and
select Create New Library.

Managing Your Files and Folders

Everything you need to do with files—copy them, rename them, put them
in folders, and delete them—you can do in File Explorer. You can work with
those files whether they are document files, picture files, media files—any
type of file! You can easily create and move folders and store files both on
your computer or device or in Web access.
 Managing Your Files and Folders 189

Finding Files and Folders

File Explorer includes a comprehensive
search tool that makes finding files and fold-
ers easy. You can enter a word or phrase in
the Search box for a simple search or refine
your search by searching for a specific date,
kind of file, size, or other file properties.

1. Begin by tapping or clicking the fold- 6 3 4 2

er (for example, Documents, Music,
Pictures, or Videos) or the drive where
you want to search.

2. Tap or click in the Search box, and

type a word or phrase to describe
what you’re searching for. The Search
Tools Search contextual tab appears
above the ribbon.

3. In the Location group, tap or click

whether you want to search your
entire computer, the current folder, or
1 5
all subfolders.

4. In the Refine group of the Search

Tools Search tab, tap or click a search
filter if you want to apply one:
Date Modified, Kind, Size, or Other
Properties.

5. Tap or click the search result you

want to see.

6. If you want to repeat the search in a

different location, select Search Again
in the Location group and click or tap
your choice.

Finding Specific File Types

When you want to find files in a specific format—for example, .jpg, .wmv, .docx,
or .mp3—use the Type filter in the Other Properties tool in the Refine group.
When you click Type, File Explorer displays the word in the Search box. You can
type the extension of the file type you want to find (.jpg, .png, etc.), and files
with that type are displayed.
 190 Chapter 8 Working with Your Files in File Explorer and OneDrive

>>>Go Further
SAVING YOUR SEARCHES
If you find that you often perform the same searches—perhaps you search for
the latest podcasts or look for the newest video clips that have been added to
your computer—you can save the search so you can use it again later.

Enter the search information as usual, and then, when the search results appear
in the File Explorer window, tap or click Save Search in the Options group of the
Search Tools Search tab. The Save As dialog box appears. Type a filename for the
saved search, and tap or click Save.

Now you can use the search at any time by tapping or clicking the saved search
in the Quick Access area at the top of the Navigation pane.

Selecting Files and

Folders
Selecting a file or folder might be as
simple as clicking or tapping it. You
might also need to select multiple
files or folders to move to other plac-
es in File Explorer. The Home tab of
File Explorer gives you the tools you
need to select files and folders easily.
2 3 4
1. In the Navigation pane, click or
tap the drive, Quick Access item,
or folder where you want to select
files.

2. Click or tap the Home tab.

3. If you want to select all contents

of the selected folder, tap or click
Select All in the Select group.

4. If you want to deselect any files or

folders you’ve previously selected,
click or tap Select None. 1
 Managing Your Files and Folders 191

5
5. If you have previously selected
multiple files (by pressing Ctrl and
clicking files or tapping multiple
selections) and want to change
the selection to all those that
were previously unselected, tap or
click Invert Selection.

Viewing File Information

You can change the way you view
the files in the folders you select by
using the tools in the View tab.

The Panes group on the far-left side 4 3 2

of the ribbon contains tools you can
use to preview the selected file or
display details about the file you’ve
chosen.

1. Click or tap the folder containing

the file you want to see.

2. Use Search if necessary to locate

the file.

3. Click or tap the View tab.

1
4. Tap or click Preview Pane in the
Panes group if you want to see a
preview of the file.
5
5. Tap or click Details Pane if you
want to see the details of the file.

What Do You Mean, Details?

The Details pane of File Explorer gives
you information about the selected file.
You can see the filename, size, and date
it was last modified. You can also see
any tags that have been assigned to
the file, review the authors’ names, and
(in some cases) see any rating that has
been applied to the file.
 192 Chapter 8 Working with Your Files in File Explorer and OneDrive

Tagging Files
The information in the Details pane isn’t
just for viewing; you can also change
the information and save it while you’re
there. By clicking or tapping in the Tags
area and adding identifier tags, you can
categorize your files so you can find them
faster when you search for them later.
1 2
1. Select the file you want to tag in
File Explorer.

2. In the Details pane, tap or click in

the Tags field. Type tags you can
use to identify or categorize the file,
separating multiple tags with semi-
colons.

3. Click or tap Save.

Tagging Again Later

The next time you add tags, when you tap 3
or click in the Tag field and start typing,
File Explorer displays a list box, suggesting
tags you’ve entered previously. Click or
tap the check box of any tag you want to
add, and click or tap Save to save the tags.

>>>Go Further
RATING FILES
In the Details pane of your picture files, you can also assign a rating value to your image
files. Rating the files on your computer helps you prioritize the ones you love over the
ones you don’t. This can help you select the right files when you’re searching, for example,
for the best photos you have of a particular event. If you’ve rated the files, you can search
for the files with the highest rating, which gives you a results list that is the cream of the
crop. Select the file you want to rate in File Explorer, and then click or tap the number of
stars (one to five) you want to assign to the image. Tap or click Save to save your rating.
 Managing Your Files and Folders 193

Arranging Folder Display

We all like to work in different ways.
Some prefer working with thumb-
nails of our files; others want a simple
list. Especially if you have many files
in a folder, you might want to filter
them so they appear in the order
you prefer. You might also want to
arrange them by the author or the
date the file was last modified, for
example.
1 2 3
1. Click or tap the folder that con-
tains the files you want to arrange
in the Navigation pane.
2. Click or tap the View tab.

3. Click or tap the Sort By option in

the Current View group. A list of
options appears.

4. Click the setting that arranges the

files the way you want them to
appear. Authors lists the files and
folders alphabetically by author; 4
Date Modified lists files with
the most recently modified files
shown first; Tags arranges files
alphabetically according to any
tags you’ve assigned to the file;
Type shows the files organized by
file type; and Name lists the files
alphabetically (from A to Z).

Any Folder Works

You may notice that the images for this example use OneDrive, which I cover
at the end of this chapter. Files and folders in OneDrive work the same in File
Explorer as any other file or folder on your computer.
 194 Chapter 8 Working with Your Files in File Explorer and OneDrive

>>>Go Further
DISPLAYING ADDITIONAL FOLDER DETAILS
You can display additional details about the files you’re viewing in File Explorer—
and use those columns to arrange the file list—by clicking the Add Columns tool
in the Current View group of the View tab.

When you click Add Columns, you’ll see a check mark to the left of the columns
already included in the current view. For example, you might see checks in front
of Date, Type, Size, Tags, and Authors. Other items, such as Date Created and Title,
don’t have checks. You can add them to your file display by clicking them. This
enables you to show all files related to a particular topic, for example, or browse
through files that were created after a particular date.

You can click Choose Columns in the Add Columns list to add specific column
items to your display. The long list of choices you’ll see includes items such as
Country/Region, Cell Phone, Contributors, Lens Model, Status, and much more.
In this way, you can customize the look and feel of your File Explorer view so it
gives you all the information you need about your files in a way that matches the
way you like to work.

Copying, Moving, and Sharing Files and

Folders
Some of the practical tasks you’ll need to perform regularly with File Explorer
involve copying, moving, and sharing your files. Copying can be as simple as
selecting a file, pressing Ctrl+C, and then pressing Ctrl+V to paste the file into
the folder in which you want it to appear. File Explorer helps ensure you’re
not copying over existing files by prompting you if a copy conflict occurs.
 Copying, Moving, and Sharing Files and Folders 195

Copying Files 5
You can use the Copy To tool in the 3 4
Organize group of the Home tab to
copy one or many files in the select-
ed folder.

1. In the Navigation pane, click or

tap the folder containing the files
you want to copy.
2. Select the files or folders you
want to copy.

3. Click or tap the Home tab.

1 6 2
4. Click or tap Copy To. A list of copy
destinations appears.

5. Click the folder where you want

to paste the files. File Explorer 7
immediately copies the selected
files to the location you selected.
6. If you want to create a new folder
or scroll through a list of possible
folders, select the file you want
to copy, click Copy To, and select
Choose Location. The Copy Items
dialog box appears.

7. Click the arrow to display subfold-

ers.

8. Click the folder where you want

to copy the selected files.

9. Click Make New Folder if you want

to copy the files to a new folder.

10. Click Copy to complete the opera-

tion. 9 8 10
 196 Chapter 8 Working with Your Files in File Explorer and OneDrive

>>>Go Further
SOLVING COPY CONFLICTS
When you inadvertently try to copy two files with the same name into the same
location, File Explorer prompts you to resolve the conflict. This can happen eas-
ily when you are moving files from one computer to another. Which file is the
most recent one? File Explorer helps you make the call in the Replace or Skip
Files dialog box. File Explorer gives you the option of going ahead with the copy
and overwriting the existing file, skipping the copy procedure, or comparing the
information for both files to see which one you want to keep.

Sharing Files
When you’re ready to share your files
with friends, family, and co-workers,
select the file or group of files you want
to share and tap or click the Share tab.
You’ll find tools that enable you to print,
email, fax, burn to disc, or share the
files with others in your HomeGroup (or
who have accounts on your computer).
Windows 10 includes a Share tool in the
Send group of the Share tab. 3 2 1

1. Select the file or files you want to

share.

2. Click or tap the Share tab.

3. In the Send group, click Share. The

panel on the right opens, offer-
ing the ways you can share the
file. Depending on the type of file
you’ve selected and the means of
sharing available to you, you may
be able to share only with your
4
phone or another app.

4. Click Email if you want to share

the file through email.
 Copying, Moving, and Sharing Files and Folders 197

5 6 7
5. Click Zip if you want to compress
the selected file(s).

6. If you want to stop sharing select-

ed files, click Remove Access.

7. Fine-tune your security settings

by clicking or tapping Advanced
Security and adjusting the per-
mission levels assigned to those
you’re sharing the files with.

Sync Your File Explorer Settings

When you select the Sync Your Settings tool in the Account category of
Windows 10 Settings, you can sync your File Explorer options and preferences
along with the other Windows settings that are synced from computer to com-
puter. This feature is available only if you log in to your computer using your
Microsoft Account. Find out more about syncing your settings in Chapter 6,
“Securing Your Computer—for Yourself and Your Family.”

Moving Files: Looks Familiar

Moving files is very similar to copying files. You navigate to the folder contain-
ing the files you want to move, select them, and click Move To in the Organize
group of the Home tab. You see the trusty folder list, where you can select the
destination folder to which you want to move the files. Or you can click or tap
Choose Location to display the Move Items dialog box, where you can choose a
folder or subfolder—or add a new folder—you want to move the selected files
to. Click Move to finish the job.
 198 Chapter 8 Working with Your Files in File Explorer and OneDrive

Compressing and 1
Extracting Your Files
Sometimes when you want to email
a bunch of files, it’s easier to com-
press them into one file you can
attach to an email message instead
of attaching 10 or 12 different docu-
ments. After the recipient receives
the compressed file, he needs to
extract the contents. File Explorer
includes tools to do both of those
jobs: compressing and extracting 3 2 4
files.

1. Select the files you want to

include in the compressed file.

2. Right-click your selection and

point to Send To.

3. Click Compressed (Zipped) Folder.

File Explorer compresses the files
and displays the zipped file with
the name highlighted.

4. Type a new name for the com- 5

pressed file. 6
5. To see and extract the contents of
a compressed file, double-click or
double-tap it.
6. Click or tap Extract All. The Extract
Compressed (Zipped) Folders dia-
log box appears.
 Using Files On-Demand with OneDrive 199

8 7
7. Click Browse if necessary to
choose a folder for the extracted
files. (It’s okay to leave the default
setting if that folder is where you
want the uncompressed files to
be placed.)

8. Click Extract. File Explorer extracts

the files and places them in the
folder you specified, ready to use.

Using Files On-Demand with OneDrive

OneDrive is Microsoft’s cloud storage service, and it works similarly to other
such services, such as Apple’s iCloud and Dropbox. Cloud storage allows you
to automatically sync files and folders from your local hard drive to the Inter-
net. Making use of this feature has two benefits. One, files stored in the cloud
are available to you anywhere you have an Internet connection. Two, if some-
thing happens to the data stored locally on your computer, that data remains
safe in the cloud.
The big news for OneDrive in Windows 10 Fall Creators Update is that now
OneDrive accesses and displays your files “on-demand,” meaning you can
view the files and folders in File Explorer, but the files won’t actually be down-
loaded to your computer or device unless you open them. So the files are
retrieved on an as-needed basis, which saves disk space while not costing
you any wait time.

OneDrive Support
You can access data stored on OneDrive from virtually any device or computer.
iOS and Android have OneDrive apps and, when in doubt, you can access
OneDrive data from any web browser by navigating to https://onedrive.live.com/.

To access OneDrive, you need to set up a Microsoft Account, as I discussed

earlier in this book. When you log in to your computer using a Microsoft
200 Chapter 8 Working with Your Files in File Explorer and OneDrive

Account, you have immediate access to your OneDrive data through File
Explorer. OneDrive shows up in the navigation pane on the left, just below
the Quick Access area.
Early in 2016, Microsoft changed the amount of storage available with One-
Drive because some users were taking advantage of the “free, unlimited”
storage space and posting entire movie collections and more. To gain some
control over space management, Microsoft instituted the following changes:
• Free OneDrive storage is now set to 5 GB for all users.

• Previous paid storage plans for 100 GB and 200 GB are being discontin-
ued, and the new rate is $1.99 per month for 50 GB.

• Office 365 Home, Personal, or University subscriptions include 1 TB of

OneDrive storage as part of the monthly subscription fee.

Want to Know More?

You can find out more about the latest OneDrive changes by following the
OneDrive Blog at http://blog.onedrive.com.

Local Accounts
If you use a Local account to log in to Windows, you can still access your
OneDrive data through its website.

Because OneDrive is integrated into File Explorer, all the procedures you read
earlier in this chapter work with your OneDrive folders. You can copy, paste,
and edit files in your OneDrive just as with anyplace else on your computer.
 Using Files On-Demand with OneDrive 201

Working with OneDrive

in the Taskbar
In addition to seeing OneDrive
listed in the Navigation panel in
File Explorer, you can also access
OneDrive—and check on things like
file syncing and settings—by using
the OneDrive icon on the right side
of the taskbar, in the notifications
area. 4 3 5

1. Click or tap the OneDrive icon. A

pop-up list appears.

2. The list shows the files that are

currently being uploaded to
OneDrive.

3. Notice the status of the syncing

process.

4. If you want OneDrive to display all

your files and folders in the cloud
(but only open the ones you 1
select on-demand), click Show All 2
Files.

5. Click the Settings button to open

OneDrive settings.

From Start to OneDrive

You can also launch OneDrive
directly from the Start menu if
you choose. Click or tap the Start
button and choose the OneDrive
tile or scroll down to OneDrive in
the apps list and click the selec-
tion. File Explorer opens, and the
OneDrive folder is selected. Now
you can copy, move, or search
your files normally.
 Now Edge hides away open pages until you
need them, giving you more space on-screen.

You can now read ebooks

in Microsoft Edge and use
the Read Aloud tool to turn
them into audio books.
In this chapter, you learn how to use
Microsoft Edge to get things done online.
Specifically, you explore the following tasks:

➔ What’s new about Microsoft Edge

➔ Getting to know today’s Microsoft Edge
➔ Browsing and searching the Web
➔ Personalizing your browsing
➔ Saving your favorites
➔ Saving and working with Web content
➔ Securing your browsing experience
9
Streamlined Surfing with
Microsoft Edge
Microsoft Edge was introduced with an early update of Windows
10, and the browser has been gaining ground in the months since.
Each version of Edge adds new features that show that Microsoft is
taking user preferences seriously, understanding that we want our
browsing experience to be safe, uncluttered, and just the way we
like it.
Microsoft Edge in Windows 10 2017 Fall Creators Update includes
several new features that extend what we can use the browser to do
and make it more convenient to do it. A new tab process makes it
easier to view and move among open pages (while still giving you
maximum browsing room on-screen), and support for ebooks (PDFs
and ePubs) make it a natural for you to read (or even listen to) your
favorite ebooks whenever the mood strikes.
This chapter takes a close look at Microsoft Edge and shows you
techniques for browsing, searching, saving, annotating, and working
with content online.
 204 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

What’s New About Microsoft Edge?

Just a couple of iterations ago, Microsoft Edge was a completely new brows-
er, approaching the new interconnected web-browsing world with a sleek
design and minimal disruptions. The browser continues to grow and evolve,
and developers have focused on ease of use and security for its users.
All browsers need to have certain capabilities—such as tools like search, the
ability to add favorites or bookmarks, and customizable security features
that enable users to feel safe while browsing. Microsoft Edge continues to
build on its focus on safety and ease of use by improving the user experience
online and working hard behind the scenes to make sure malware doesn’t
get through.
New features for Microsoft Edge in Windows 10 2017 Fall Creators Update
include a clever new way of managing open tabs. Each web page you open
appears in its own tab, and if you have a number of pages open at once, that
can be pretty cumbersome and take up some on-screen space. Now develop-
ers have come up with a way to sweep away the tabs until you need them so
they don’t clutter up the space but are still easy to use and navigate.
With the growing success of electronic books, or ebooks, Microsoft Edge
now makes it simple for you to read ebooks in their native formats—PDF or
ePub—without any special app or ereader installed. To go along with this
new feature in Edge, the Microsoft Store now has gone into the ebook busi-
ness and has thousands of current and popular titles. There’s also a “read
aloud” feature in Microsoft Edge that enables you to listen to your ebook
instead of reading it if you choose.

Getting to Know Today’s Microsoft Edge

Whether you are using a mouse-driven system or navigating by touch, your
basic browsing experience will feel familiar in Microsoft Edge. Some of the
features you’ll want to try include the following:
 Getting to Know Today’s Microsoft Edge 205

Choose a
Read an ebook new page Display the Hub

Search

Read an article

• Search in the address bar.

• Use the Hub to display your Favorites, Reading List, History, and
Downloads, and find things you collect on the Web.

• Turn on Reading view to hide ads, links, and more so your article content
is clear and easy to read.

• Write on web pages using Notes, and save your notes for later.

• Read or listen to an ebook in your browser window.

• Let Cortana help you with online searches for more information.

• Import your favorites and bookmarks from other browsers into Microsoft
Edge.

• Choose a new dark theme for Microsoft Edge.

• Create your own start page.

• Let Microsoft Edge save your passwords and fill in forms for you.
206 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

Starting Microsoft Edge

Microsoft Edge is available on your Start menu. The Microsoft Edge icon is
also available in the taskbar, which means you can easily launch the browser
with a single click.

Click to start
Microsoft Edge.

Exploring Microsoft Edge

Microsoft Edge includes the basic browsing tools you would expect from a
web browser, but this browser takes things a step further, giving you what
you need to get things done quickly. Now you can use the address bar both
for searches and for moving to a specific site; you can choose Reading view
to suppress ads to make reading content easier; you can add Web Notes to
pages; save Favorites and articles easily; and more.
 Getting to Know Today’s Microsoft Edge 207

Reading Favorite
Page tab Address bar view Hub

Add a
note

• Address bar—Click and search for information or browse the Web by

tapping or clicking and typing in the same box.

• Page tab—Each web page is displayed in a separate tab, so you can

have multiple pages open at once and move among them easily.

• Reading view—Click Reading view when you want to display web page
content without ads, sidebars, and the like.

• Favorite—Click Favorites to save a web page or article to your Favorites

or your Reading List.

• Hub—The Hub displays a pane that displays your Favorites, Reading List,
History, Downloads, and Books.

• Add Notes—You can add notes to web pages using a pen or highlighter
or click and add text notes to a page. You can then save the notes to
access later or share with others.

No Place Like Home

You can add a Home button to your browser window if you’d like to be able to easily
go back to your start page in Microsoft Edge. Click the Settings and More tool in the
far-right side of the browser window, and then click Settings. Scroll down and click View
Advanced Settings, and drag the Show the Home Button slider to the On position.
 208 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

Browsing and Searching the Web

Chances are good that you’re no stranger to browsing the Web. Whether
you’re shopping online, looking for a movie, updating social media, or chat-
ting with friends, you probably are familiar with ways to get where you want
to go and do what you want to do. This section provides some of the basic
navigation techniques using the tools in Microsoft Edge.

Starting at the Top

The address bar at the top of the brows-
er window is the place where all the
action begins in your browser. Now you
can also search for content, refresh the
page, and go to specific web pages by
entering information in the address bar.

1. Click in the Search or Enter Web 1 2

Address box.

2. Begin typing the name of the site

or the web address if you know it.

AutoComplete
Microsoft Edge attempts to autocom-
plete the phrase for you, so if you want
to use the site provided, tap or click the
suggestion that fits. If not, just keep typ-
ing the full address.

>>>Go Further
KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS FOR BROWSING
If you’d rather skip the clicking and navigate through the Web using your key-
board, you can use the following shortcut keys in Microsoft Edge:

• Press Ctrl+D to add another web page to your favorites.

• Press Ctrl+E to start a search in the address bar.

 Browsing and Searching the Web 209

• Press Ctrl+F to search for content on the current web page.

• Press Ctrl+H to view your browsing history.

• Press Ctrl+L to highlight the search or address in the address bar.

• Press Ctrl+J to display the Download Manager.

• Press Ctrl+ the tab number to move to a different open tab.

Navigating the Web

Whether you’re using Microsoft Edge or another browser, chances are good
you already know how to move forward or backward from page to page.
Here are the basic tools:
Forward Home Search Scrollbar

Back

Refresh

Click
a link

• Back—Tapping or clicking the Back button takes you back to the page
you were previously viewing.

• Forward—Tapping or clicking Forward takes you to the web page you

previously viewed after viewing the current one. This capability is helpful if
you’re moving back and forth between pages. If you haven’t moved ahead
to another page yet, this button is not available for you to click or tap.

• Refresh—Click the Refresh tool when pictures are downloading slowly

or content on a web page doesn’t look quite right. This reloads the page,
which is likely to fix the problem.
 210 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

• Click a link—Click or tap a link on the page to move to another page or

perform a web action. What that link does—for example, whether it dis-
plays a new page, opens a document, or plays a media clip—depends on
what the website designer programmed the link to do.

• Search the site—Many sites include a Search tool near the top of the
site so that users can easily locate what they are looking for.

• Scroll or swipe down the page—Whether you are using a mouse or using
touch, you can scroll or swipe down the page to display additional content.

Opening a New Tab

The process of opening a tab in
Microsoft Edge is probably familiar.
This enables you to view another
web page in addition to the one—or
ones—you’re already viewing.
3 1 2
1. In the browser window, click or tap
the New Tab icon to the right of the
current tab.

2. In the New Tab page, you can see

site panels of Top Sites across the
page, as well as a Search box. Click
the tile of the site you want to visit.

3. Type a word or phrase or enter the

web address of the site you want
to display. Alternatively, click the
tile of the site you want to visit.

Tweaking the New Tab Display

You can change the New Tab window by clicking the Customize tool on the far
right of the window and choosing content you’d like to see displayed whenever
you click New Tab. On the Customize page, you can choose whether you want
to see top sites, top sites and the news feed, or only a blank page when you
click New Tab. For tabs that are already open, you can display a quick descrip-
tion of a tab’s contents by hovering the mouse pointer over the tab.
 Browsing and Searching the Web 211

Pinning Open a Tab

You can pin a tab to the browser win-
dow so that it always opens automati- 1 2 3
cally whenever you launch Microsoft
Edge. You might pin to your browser
window your favorite news site, a
stock tracker, or a weather site you
visit regularly to help you be prepared
for the day.

1. Open Microsoft Edge and display

the web page you’d like to add to
the browser.

2. Right-click the tab at the top of

the browser window.

3. Click Pin.

Displaying and Hiding

Tabs
Having tabs at the top of the web
browser so you can move easily among
open pages is a good idea. But once you
get a number of pages open, it might be 1
hard to remember the contents of each
one. For this reason, developers have
come up with a cool idea that allows
you to peek at open pages without
switching to them. You can display and 2 3
hide tabs easily, or click to make a new
page tab active without playing the
hide-and-seek game.

1. Click the Show Tab Previews tool

at the top of the browser window.

2. Review the open tabs and click the

page you want to make active.

3. Click the Hide Tab Previews tool

to hide the tabs.
 212 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

>>>Go Further
QUIET SURFING WITH INPRIVATE BROWSING
In some cases, you might not want to track your browsing activity for others
to see. Perhaps you’re shopping for a holiday gift for someone and you don’t
want him to inadvertently discover it. You can turn on InPrivate Browsing to tell
Microsoft Edge to skip recording your web activity. This means that the sites you
visit won’t be available in your browsing history, cookies, form data, temporary
Internet files, or the usernames and passwords Microsoft Edge usually keeps.

Click the Settings and More tool and, in the menu that appears, click New
InPrivate Window. Microsoft Edge opens a new browser session independent of
the current one you have been using, and none of your browsing information is
stored in the new session. When you’re ready to end the InPrivate Browsing ses-
sion, close the browser session.

Searching in Microsoft
Edge
In Microsoft Edge, you can click in
the Search or Enter Web Address box
at the top of the screen and type a
word or phrase that describes what
you’d like to find.

1. Click or tap in the Search box and

3 1 2
type a word or phrase describing
what you want to find.

2. Your search provider, which is

Bing until you change it (see the
“Adding Search Providers” task
later in this chapter), displays a
list of search results, ranked from
those that best match your search
phrase to those that are not as
close a match.

3. Click or tap a link you’d like to

view.
 Browsing and Searching the Web 213

Using Cortana in
1
Searches
Cortana is also a part of Microsoft
Edge, integrating your personal
digital assistant with your every-
day browsing experience. Cortana
can help you make reservations,
find a restaurant, or even search
for content online. Before Cortana 2 3
will work with Edge, however, you
must have turned on the feature. 5
Display Windows 10 Settings, choose
Cortana, and make sure the Hey
Cortana slider is in the On position.

1. Display a web page where you

want to ask for Cortana’s help.

2. Right-click the link you want to

know more about.

3. Click Ask Cortana. Cortana dis-

plays a pane of information relat-
ed to the item you selected.

4. You can review the information

and click one of the links to find
out more.
5. You can pin the panel open in
your browser window by clicking
the Pin This Pane tool.

4
 214 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

Adding Search Providers 1 2

If you prefer to use a different search
engine instead of Bing with Microsoft
Edge, you can easily add your favor-
ite search provider and even make
it the default if you’d like. Of course,
Microsoft recommends that you
stick with Bing because Windows 10
apps are linked directly to it with the
idea of giving you useful, relevant,
up-to-date information. But because
Microsoft Edge uses OpenSearch 3
technology, you can choose your
own search provider at will. Here’s
how to do that:

1. In your web browser, display the

search engine you want to add to
Microsoft Edge.

2. Click the Settings and More tool

in the browser window.

3. Click Settings.

4. Scroll down and click View

Advanced Settings.
4
5. In the Search in the Address Bar
With setting, click the Change
Search Engine button.

5
 Browsing and Searching the Web 215

6 7
6. In the list, click the search pro-
vider that you want to use.

7. If you want to set the selected

search provider as your default,
click the Set as Default button.

8. To remove the search provider

from the list, click Remove.

It’s Not All Good

SEARCH ENGINES MISSING IN ACTION
You might notice that some of the big search engines you expected to see in
this list are missing. This is because the Microsoft Edge engine supports only
those search providers who use the OpenSearch standard. OpenSearch is a
set of technologies published originally by Amazon.com that allows search
results to be aggregated and shared in a standard and easy-to-understand
format. You can find out more by going to www.opensearch.org.
 216 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

Personalizing Your Browsing

Microsoft Edge includes a number of features you can use to tweak your
browsing experience so that your browser looks and acts the way you want it
to. You might want to change the theme from light to dark, zoom in or out on
the content, or use the new Hub to display a pane of commonly used brows-
ing tools and content. You can also set up your browser to start with the page
or pages you’re most interested in seeing.

Choosing a Theme 1

Microsoft Edge includes an alternative

theme you can use to change the look
of your browsing experience. By default,
the browser window is displayed using
the Light theme, but you can choose the
Dark theme instead.

1. In the browser window, click the

Settings and More tool.

2. Click Settings.

3. Click the Choose a Theme down

arrow and click Dark. The browser
window and the pane change to
display the new theme.

Easier on the Eyes

Some people like to work with white
text on a black background because
they feel it is easier to read and causes
less wear and tear on their eyes, espe-
cially at night. In Windows 10 Fall
Creators Update, developers have
included a new feature called Night 2
Light that softens the screen lighting to
take the need of your eyes into account
when you’re using your computer at
night. You’ll find the Night Light setting
in the Display category of the Settings
window.
3
 Personalizing Your Browsing 217

Magnifying and
1
Reducing the View
Now you can easily magnify or
reduce the size of the content on a 2
web page by changing the view on-
3
the-fly.
4
1. Click the Settings and More tool.
2. In the Zoom tool row, click Zoom
Out to reduce the size of the con-
tent on the page.

3. Click Zoom In to magnify it. The

page view changes by 25% each
time you click one of the tools.

4. Click Full Screen to fill the com-

puter or device screen with the
web page. Browser tools will be
visible. To remove the page from
Full Screen view, press F11.

Selecting Your Start

Page
If you have a particular web page you
like to start your day with, you can 1
make it your start page in Microsoft
Edge. You’ll find the tools you need
in the Open With area of the Settings
pane.

1. Click the Settings and More tool

and choose Settings to display
the Settings panel.

2. Click the Open Microsoft Edge

With arrow and click A Specific
Page or Pages. 2
 218 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

3. A web address box opens so you

can enter the address for the new
start page. (You can also choose
one of the listed default options.)
Type the web address for the
page you want to use as your
start page.

4. Click the Save tool to add the

page.

3 4
Using the Hub
2 3 1
The Hub in Microsoft Edge enables
you to move easily to content you’ve
saved for later viewing.

1. Click the Hub tool on the taskbar

of the browser window.

2. Click the tool that corresponds

to the pane you want to see:
Favorites, Reading List, Books,
History, or Downloads.

3. Review the content in the list and

click the article or page you want
to view.

Erasing History
You can erase your past in
Microsoft Edge by displaying the
Hub, clicking the History tool,
and choosing Clear History. In the
Clear Browsing Data pane, enable
or disable the check boxes next to
the items you want to clear. Click
or tap Clear. When Edge is done,
you see the All Clear! message
underneath the Clear button.
 Personalizing Your Browsing 219

Working with Extensions

In the latest update of Windows 10, developers added support for extensions,
which means the browser now works with add-on utilities designed to help
you work with specific third-party sites and programs. For example, you can
add an extension to optimize your Amazon.com shopping experience. Or you
can install the Office Online extension, so you can work with your Office files
within your browser without ever needing to open an Office application.

Adding an Extension
The Settings and More pane in
Microsoft Edge includes a new 1
option that takes you directly into
the world of extensions.

1. Click Settings and More on the

right side of the browser window.

2. Click Extensions.

2
220 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

3. Click Get Extensions from the

Store.

4. Scroll through the list of available

extensions, and click or tap one
you like. A page opens explaining
more about the extension.

5. To download the extension, click

the Get button. The extension
is downloaded to your browser.
After the download is complete, 3 4
the Launch button appears, and
you can click or tap it to start the
extension.

5
 Personalizing Your Browsing 221

Turning On Extensions 1
Once you have downloaded and
installed the extensions you want to
use with Microsoft Edge, you need
to tell the browser you’re ready to
use them. Note that you can disable
extensions at any time you like by
returning to the Extensions panel
in the Settings and More pane in
Microsoft Edge.

1. In the Extensions page of the

Settings and More pane, Microsoft
lets you know you have a new
extension. 2
2. Click Turn It On to activate the 1
extension.

Using Extensions
Depending on which extension
you’ve installed, the way in which
you use it varies. The extension tool
appears to the right of the address
bar in the browser window, and what
happens when you click or tap the
tool depends on what the extension
is programmed to do.

For example, Office Online, opens

a list that gives you access to your
most recent Office documents. To
use the Pinterest Pin It extension, you
click the Pin It button.

1. Click the extension you want to

use.

2. Click the file you want to open or

the action you want to take.
2
 222 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

Saving Your Favorites

We all have favorite websites we visit frequently. You might like to start your
day with a favorite news or social media site. There’s likely one website you
use when you need to look up a recipe and another you go to for the latest
sports news. Perhaps you do a lot of shopping on a favorite discount site. You
can save all these sites you use often as favorites so you can find them easily
whenever you need them.

Adding a Favorite
You can easily add a favorite site to your
Favorites list in Microsoft Edge. When
you add the site to your list, you can also
change the name of the site if you like.

1. Navigate to the web page you

want to add as a favorite. 1 2 3
2. Click the Favorites tool in the
browser toolbar.

3. Click in the Name box, and type a

name for the favorite if you don’t
want to use the default.

4. Click in the Save In box, and

choose a folder for the favorite.

5. Click Add to save the favorite.

Creating Folders 5 4
If you save a lot of favorite sites, folders
can help you keep them all organized,
but you don’t have to use them.

Saving and Backing Up Your

Favorites
If you have logged in to your computer
or device using your Microsoft account,
Microsoft Edge saves and backs up your
browser favorites automatically so you
can access them no matter which com-
puter or device you may be using. Nice!
 Saving Your Favorites 223

1
Importing Favorites from
Other Browsers
In Microsoft Edge you can import
favorites you’ve saved in other
browsers as well, and those favorites
are available across all your Windows
10 computers and devices for which
you’ve logged in using a Microsoft
account.

1. Display Settings by clicking the

Settings and More tool, scrolling
down, and choosing Settings.

2. Click the Import from Another

Browser button.

3. Click the Import button. If

prompted, choose the browser
from which you want to import
3 2
the favorites. Microsoft Edge dis-
plays an All Done! message when
the process is complete, and the
imported favorites should now be
available in your Favorites list.

Quick Imports
You can also import favorites by
displaying the Hub and click-
ing the Favorites tool. Click
Settings to display the Settings
pane where you can import con-
tent from other browsers into
Microsoft Edge.
 224 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

Saving and Working with Web Content

Microsoft Edge includes some exciting new features to make your web
browsing experience easier and more productive. The new Reading view
enables you to clear away ads so that you can focus on the real content on
the page. Reading List tracks and syncs articles you want to read online so
you can return to them when you’re ready—on any of your Windows 10
devices.
The Notes tool enables you to make notes and drawings on web pages and
then save them and share them with others. A whole new makeover in the
printing department enables you to tweak your page printouts so you get
the web content you want in a readable format.

Reading Clearly in
Reading View
Most of us know that feeling of frustra-
tion that comes when we’re looking for
something specific online and we have
to read around so many ads on the page
it’s hard to find what we need. Reading
view helps clear away the clutter.
1 2
1. Display the page you want to
read.

2. Click the Reading view tool in the

right side of the browser window.
The page changes to put the con-
tent front and center, with no ads
or side columns.

Changing to Reading View

on-the-Fly
If you don’t want to reach for
the mouse and click to display
Reading view, press the key com-
bination Ctrl+Shift+R to turn on
Reading view. To turn Reading
view off, press the key combina-
tion again.
 Saving and Working with Web Content 225

Adding eBooks
The Reading View feature makes
reading content online an easier and
more pleasant task (without all the
distractions of advertisements). To
build on that improvement, Edge
now supports ebooks in their native
formats: PDF and ePub. You don’t
need any special ereader or app to
read your favorite books. And the
Microsoft Store now includes thou-
sands of titles (some free) that you 1
can download and read whenever
you choose.
2
1. Launch the Microsoft Store by
clicking the Store icon in the task-
bar or on the Start screen.

2. In the Microsoft Store, click Books.

3. Scroll through the book listings

and find a book you want to
read. Toward the bottom of the
Books page, you see a tile for Free
Classics; click that to be taken to
a page of free classic titles. Click
the book you want to read and
click Get to add the book to your 3
library.

You may be prompted for

your Windows login password.
Otherwise, click Get to choose the
book. Even though the title is free,
you still have to agree to the Store
Terms of Agreement.

4. Click Read to download the title

to the Books pane in the Edge
window.

4
 226 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

Reading eBooks in Your

Browser Window
Once you’ve chosen and added the
book you want to read to your library
in Microsoft Edge, you can find the
title in the Books tab of the Hub.
Edge stores settings related to your
book reading experience, so you can
read as long as you like, and when 4 2 1
you’re done, Edge marks your place
so you can continue on from that
point later.

1. In the Microsoft Edge window,

click the Hub tool.

2. Click or tap Books. Your ebook

appears in the panel.

3. Click or tap the book to open it in

your browser window.

4. Read the book in the browser. 3

Audiobooks for Everyone

Audiobooks have become very popular over the last few years. Not only do we
enjoy sitting down with a good book, but we like to listen to books while we’re
doing other things—gardening, knitting, driving. Microsoft Edge includes a
Read Aloud feature that instantly begins reading your book to you, whatever
you’re doing. You can switch easily from reading to listening with a simple click
or tap.

When your ebook is displayed in Microsoft Edge, simply click the Settings and
More tool and then click Read Aloud. Next, click the Read Aloud tool in the
Read Aloud toolbar at the top of the screen. Edge immediately begins reading
the text, moving the highlighted cursor as the reader reads to show you the
current position.

You can change the sound or speed of the reader’s voice—or even learn to
add new voices to Microsoft Edge—by clicking or tapping Voice Settings in the
Read Aloud toolbar.
 Saving and Working with Web Content 227

Pick Up Where You Left Off

One of the great features of Edge is the “pick up where you left off” feature,
which enables you to continue reading your ebook when you switch from
your computer to tablet to phone (assuming they are all Windows devices and
you’ve logged in with your Microsoft account). You can find a link to the place
you stopped in the Windows 10 Action Center. (Swipe in from the right or click
the notifications icon to see it.)

Saving Articles to Your

Reading List
Chances are good that you often find
articles you want to read but don’t
have time. Microsoft Edge includes a
Reading List tool that enables you to
save content for later so you can read
through it when you are ready.
1 2 3
1. Display the page with the content
you want to add to your Reading
List.

2. Click the Hub tool.

3. Click the Reading List tool.

4. Type a new name, if you like.

5 4
5. Click Add. The article is added to
your Reading List.

When You’re Ready to

Read
When you have a few moments
and are ready to read the article
you saved, click the Hub tool in
the toolbar on the upper-right
portion of the screen. Click
Reading List, and your article will
be among those listed there in
the Reading List pane.
 228 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

Adding Notes to Web 1 2

Pages
Now you can add notes to web
pages and save and share them with
friends whether you’re using a tablet,
a phone, or a mouse and a desktop
PC. When you create a note, you
can save it to a OneNote notebook
(which you can then share easily with
others) or save it to your favorites or
reading list. 3 5

1. Display the web page where you

want to add the notes.

2. Click the Add Notes tool.

3. Choose the tools you want to use.

4. Write your note on the page.

5. Click or tap the Save Web Note

tool.

6. The Hub opens, showing a

OneNote tab.

7. Choose the notebook section

where you want to save the note.
6 4 7
8. Click or tap Save. Microsoft Edge
saves the note to your OneNote
notebook.

8
 Securing Your Browsing Experience 229

Printing Web Content

Microsoft Edge includes a new printing 1 3 2
engine that gives you a wider range of
options for the ways in which you print
web content.
1. Display the page with the content
you want to print.
2. Click the Settings and More tool.
3. Click Print. The title of the web
page appears in the title bar of the
Print window.
4. Click the Printer arrow to choose
where you want to print the page.
4 5 6
5. Click Orientation if you want to
change the printed page from por-
trait to landscape orientation.
6. Choose the number of copies
you want to print by clicking the
increase or decrease buttons or by
typing in the box.
7. Choose whether you want to
print all pages in the document or
selected pages.
8. Click to choose the size at which
you want to print the page.
9. Click to choose from among nor-
mal, narrow, moderate, or wide
page margins.
10. Choose whether you want to print
10 11 9 8 7
headers and footers on the page.
11. Click Print to print the page.

Securing Your Browsing Experience

Microsoft Edge includes security features that help Microsoft identify and
safeguard against any threats before they are downloaded to your browser
window. You also have a number of options for controlling the data you
receive and share as part of your browsing experience.
 230 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

>>>Go Further
WHAT’S ALL THE FUSS ABOUT DO NOT TRACK?
Do Not Track is a setting that tells web pages you visit that you have opted not to
have your browsing habits recorded. This is a good thing for consumer privacy,
but online advertisers who sell ads based on traffic statistics and user browsing
data are up in arms about the possibility.

To turn on the Do Not Track feature in your version of Microsoft Edge, click
Settings and More, select Settings, and click the View Advanced Settings button.
Scroll down to the Privacy and Services area and drag the Send Do Not Track
Requests slider to the On position. You’ll have the comfort of knowing that at
least your data isn’t helping to sell goods to unsuspecting consumers.

Blocking Cookies 1

Cookies are small bits of information

that websites place on your comput-
er to store data about you and your
browsing preferences. Usually cook-
ies are harmless, but sometimes they
can put your privacy at risk.

1. Click Settings and More and then

choose Settings to display the
Settings pane.

2. Click View Advanced Settings.

2
 Securing Your Browsing Experience 231

3. Scroll down to Cookies, and click

the down arrow to display the list
of choices: Don’t Block Cookies,
Block Only Third Party Cookies,
and Block All Cookies.

4. Select the policy you want to use.

Cleaning Up Cookie
Crumbs
It’s a good idea to regularly clean
off the cookies that have accu-
mulated in your web browser,
both to keep their drain on your
computer’s memory low and to
clean out any potentially sneaky
cookies that could be sending
information back to the site that
placed them. 3

4
 232 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

>>>Go Further
UNDERSTANDING COOKIE TYPES
Session cookies are cookies that are saved only while a user is on a specific site
and are deleted when the user leaves that site.

Persistent cookies are cookies with a longer life span; they continue on
as long as the developer specifies. In some cases, these types of cookies are
helpful—they might enable you to go right to an account without having to log
in—but they can also be used to accumulate data on how you browse the Web
and what type of information or products you are viewing.

Third-party cookies are cookies often used by advertisers that display pop-up
ads attempting to pull the user from the existing site to another site being adver-
tised. These types of cookies can also be used for tracking purposes and could
put your privacy at risk.

Clearing Browsing Data

Every so often it feels good to clear
away your history, and you can do 1
that easily in Microsoft Edge. It all
starts in the Settings panel.

1. Open the Settings pane by click-

ing the Settings and More tool
and then clicking Settings.

2. In the Clear Browsing Data area,

click the Choose What to Clear
button.

2
 Securing Your Browsing Experience 233

3. Microsoft Edge selects the top

four items by default. Change the
settings by clicking the boxes of
the items you want to clear or
keep.

4. Click Clear to complete the pro-

cess. 3
5. If you want these items to be
cleared every time you close your
browser, move the slider to On.

It’s Not All Good

IT DOESN’T REMEMBER ME NOW
One of the downsides to clearing your history is that websites that previously
seemed to remember you (for example, they knew what region you were
from or what time zone you were in) have now forgotten you. If you have
elected to have Microsoft Edge save your passwords and form data, however,
those items will still be preserved and entered for you.
 234 Chapter 9 Streamlined Surfing with Microsoft Edge

Blocking Pop-Ups
By default, Microsoft Edge turns on the pop-up blocker, so you shouldn’t be
getting those annoying pop-up ads that want to sell you everything from exer-
cise equipment to vacations in the Caribbean. If you ever need to check the
setting or want to turn it off for some reason (which isn’t recommended), the
option is in Advanced Settings.

Saving Passwords and

Form Entries
We all have too many passwords these days
to keep them all in our heads. Microsoft
Edge can help you keep things straight, but
although it does attempt to secure your
data, keep in mind that anytime you store 1
your passwords with a browser, you incur at
least some security risk.

1. Display Advanced Settings by click-

ing Settings and More, choosing
Settings, and clicking the View
Advanced Settings button.

2. Scroll down to the Privacy and

Services area, and slide Offer to
Save Passwords to On.

3. Slide the Save Form Entries slider to

the On position.

Managing Your Passwords

To manage stored passwords, display
the Advanced Settings panel and scroll
down to the Privacy and Services area. 3 2
Click the Manage Passwords button. This
displays, in the Manage Passwords pane,
a list of all the sites you log in to and their
corresponding passwords. If you want
Microsoft Edge to forget one or more of
the passwords shown on the list, point to
the site and then click the Close button
on the far right.
 Securing Your Browsing Experience 235

>>>Go Further
USING SMARTSCREEN
Windows Defender SmartScreen is a security tool in Microsoft Edge that helps
your browser recognize and block phishing websites. Phishing is a type of preda-
tory online practice in which perpetrators try to dupe unsuspecting web users
into thinking they are visiting legitimate websites. The phishing site then gathers
important information from users, including usernames, passwords, credit card
numbers, and the like, which leaves the user vulnerable to identity theft and
more.

SmartScreen is turned on by default in Microsoft Edge, but you can check the
feature by clicking Settings and More, selecting Settings, and then clicking View
Advanced Settings. You’ll find the Windows Defender SmartScreen control all the
way at the bottom of the list. Make sure it is set to On so that you will be alerted
when you encounter any suspicious websites, and each site you visit will be
checked against an ever-growing database of reported phishing sites.
 The new People Hub
helps you keep favorite
contacts close.

Easily see your schedule and

add to it in the Calendar app.
In this chapter, you learn to use Skype, the
People app, and the Mail and Calendar apps
to keep your connection strong with these
tasks:

➔ Calling and messaging with Skype

➔ Using the New People Hub
➔ Managing contacts with the People app
➔ Staying in touch through email
➔ Keeping your dates straight with the Calendar
app
10
Staying in Touch (and in
Sync) with Windows 10
So much of what we do with our computers involves communica-
tion. We call or email friends and family members, we schedule
appointments and meetings, and we continually check our favorite
social media sites to see what’s new in the lives of those we love.
Windows 10 Fall Creators Update includes a number of tools to
help us keep in touch with our favorite folks. In this chapter, you
learn about the new People Hub, which helps you keep the ones
you communicate with most often right at your fingertips. You’re
also introduced to four apps you can use to stay in touch with oth-
ers. Skype is the communications app you use to call or message
others in real time; you can make a web-based call (for free) or buy
minutes to use with international and other toll calls. The People
app serves as a hub for all your social media activities. You can bring
all those updates together in one spot so you can stay on top of
the latest news without opening a lot of programs. And the email
and calendar apps make it simple for you to keep up with everyone
at work, home, and school and keep your schedule organized and
up-to-date.
 238 Chapter 10 Staying in Touch (and in Sync) with Windows 10

Calling and Messaging with Skype

When Microsoft acquired Skype, the vision was to build a beautifully integrat-
ed communication tool that added video and voice calling, as well as instant
messaging, into all sorts of Microsoft products. Skype is included as one of
the apps in Windows 10 Fall Creators Update, so you never need to be out of
reach of family, friends, colleagues, and clients.

Starting Skype
You launch Skype just as you would 3
any other Windows 10 app: by choos-
ing it from the list on your Start
menu or by tapping or clicking the
app tile.

1. Click the Start button to display

the Start menu.

2. Drag the scrollbar down until you

see the apps that begin with the
letter S.

3. Click or tap Skype. 1 2

It’s Not All Good

Giving Skype Permission
Some users were having a problem with Skype during the early days of
Windows 10: Skype wouldn’t launch when they tapped or clicked the Skype
icon. Developers found that there was a conflict over the webcam permis-
sion, and it was a simple fix. If your version of Skype isn’t starting up the way
it should, close the Skype app, display Settings, choose Privacy, and select
Webcam (or Camera). First, make sure Let Apps Use My Camera is set to On,
and then make sure that in the list of apps allowed to use your webcam,
Skype’s setting is set to On. Correct the setting if necessary and close Settings.
Restart Skype, and hopefully everything will go smoothly.
 Calling and Messaging with Skype 239

Signing In to Skype
After you download and launch
Skype, the Sign In window appears.
You can sign in with your Skype
name (if you have one), your
Microsoft account, or even your
Facebook account. If you would rath-
er use a different Skype account than 1 2
the one shown on the Sign In screen,
click the Sign In with a Different
Account link and enter your account
information.

1. Check your sign-in account.

2. Click or tap Sign In.

3. If you want to use a different

account, click the link and enter
the sign-in information you want
to use.

Call Everywhere, for Free 3

Skype Click to Call is a feature that
plugs Skype into the Web so that
when you see phone numbers
listed online—for example, with
restaurants, contacts, and so on—
you see a link and a small Skype
icon. This happens because you
have Skype Click to Call installed.
You can click the number to make
the call instantly, for free. Nice.
 240 Chapter 10 Staying in Touch (and in Sync) with Windows 10

Exploring the Skype Window

After you’re signed in, the Skype window is fairly easy to navigate. You’ll see a
number of familiar features as you work with the tools in the program:
Contacts New Call
Call chat history Content area
Title
bar

• The title bar at the top of the window shows the app name and your
sign-in username, as well as the window controls on the far right.

• The Skype tools give you what you need for managing your Skype
account, finding and adding to your contacts, reviewing conversations,
making calls, organizing the Skype view, setting Skype options, and get-
ting help.

• The Call History pane includes your profile information, the Search tool,
and a list of recent calls.

• The Content area displays the Skype Home page at first, but when you
make a call or chat with friends, your interactions happen in this area of
the Skype window.

Receive Calls Anytime

Even if you’ve set your Skype availability to Invisible, the calls still come through
in Windows 10. You get a notification about the incoming call and, if you miss
it, a Skype notification icon appears on your Lock screen, letting you know how
many calls you’ve missed.
 Calling and Messaging with Skype 241

1
Finding and Adding
Contacts
Conversations are the focus and
trade of Skype, so you can start, end,
and add to conversations—which
might be calls, video chats, or text
3 2
messaging threads—easily. You can
add contacts to your list by initiating
contact with them or add them to
ongoing conversations.

1. In the Skype window, click

Contacts.

2. Click or tap in the Search box.

3. Type the name of the person you

4
want to find.

4. Scroll through the results list.

5. Click the name of the person you

want to add as a contact. The con-
tact is added to the communica-
tion window.

6. Start a conversation with the new 5

contact by sending him or her a
text message.

7. Click to start a video call.

8. Click to launch a phone call by

Skype. 9 6 7 8
9. If you want this contact to show
up in your list of Favorites, click or
tap the star to the left of the con-
tact name.
 242 Chapter 10 Staying in Touch (and in Sync) with Windows 10

Connecting Your Address Book

You can connect your address book to Skype so the app can find all your con-
tacts easily. Click the Contacts tool in the main Skype window, and in the list
box that appears, click the Connect Address Book link. Skype asks you to enter
and verify your phone number and then requests your permission to access
your contacts. After you complete the process, your contacts will be available
for contact through Skype.

Communicating with
Skype
Communicating with others in Skype
2 3
is easy. You can choose whether you
want to make a video call, make an
audio call, or send a text message, all
with a simple click.

1. Click or tap the contact you want

to call. The contact screen opens
in the right pane.

2. Click or tap to open a video call.

3. Click or tap to begin an audio call.

4. Type to send an instant message

to the contact. 1 4

How Do I Contact Thee? Let Me Count the Ways

The question of whether your contact is online when you’re trying to contact
her makes a difference in the number of tools you see in the contact window. If
your contact is not online, you see only the green video call and audio call but-
tons in the upper-left corner of the screen, at the bottom of the contact’s profile
picture. If the contact is online, a blue button appears that enables you to add
and send files, send a video message, or add participants to an active call.
 Using the New People Hub 243

Choosing Your Messaging Service

The messaging service Skype displays just above the message box varies,
depending on the source of the contact you’ve selected. If your contact is from
the list compiled in the previous Messaging app, the selection might read Via
Messaging. If you click the down arrow and select SMS Mobile, Skype prompts
you to buy Skype credits for sending SMS messages.

Using the New People Hub

One of the fun new features in Windows 10 Fall Creators Update is the People
Hub. Developers realize that even though social media has gotten wildly
popular and we keep up with the happenings of dozens (or maybe hun-
dreds!) of people each day, we really communicate regularly each day with
only a handful of friends and family members.
The People Hub is designed to bring those contacts close so you can easily
check in with them throughout your normal day. Your favorite contacts are
essentially “pinned” to your taskbar so they are always within easy reach.

Getting Ready to Use

2
the People Hub
The People Hub requires a little bit of
setup before it is ready to use.

1. Click or tap the People tool on the

taskbar.

2. Click or tap Get Started. The

People Hub shows you which
apps are currently connected to
the Hub.

1
 244 Chapter 10 Staying in Touch (and in Sync) with Windows 10

3
3. Click the icon for any app you
want to change or view.

Finding People Hub

1 2
Contacts
Next, you need to find and add the
contacts you want to include in the
People Hub.

1. Click People. The Hub offers a

couple of suggestions for contacts
you might want to pin to the task-
bar.

2. Click the contact you want to add,

and the People Hub pins the con-
tact to the taskbar to the left of
the People Hub tool.

3. If you don’t see the contact you

want to add, click in the Search
box. A list of contacts appears. 3
 Using the New People Hub 245

4. Type the name of the contact in

the Search box.

5. Click the contact from the dis-

played list. The icon for the con-
tact is added to your taskbar.

5 4

Checking In
Now that your contacts are pinned
to your taskbar, you can see what’s
happening with them and check in
through the day easily. When you get
an email or a call from a pinned con-
tact, Windows 10 lets you know right 3 2 1
away by displaying a small number
along the bottom edge of the pinned
contact icon.

1. Click the contact icon when you

see a notification.

2. The People Hub opens, showing

the contact you selected.

3. Click the app that shows the noti-

fication icon.
 246 Chapter 10 Staying in Touch (and in Sync) with Windows 10

4 5
4. Click to view and reply to the
message in the People Hub panel.

5. Click to open the message and

review and respond in the full app.

Managing the People Hub

It’s possible that over time you
will want to remove someone
from the People Hub and add
others. You can easily remove a
contact from the People Hub by
unpinning that person from your
taskbar. Simply right-click the
pinned contact and choose Unpin
from Taskbar, and the contact
icon disappears (but is still avail-
able in the People Hub and in
your regular contacts list).

Managing Contacts with the People App

As you keep up with friends and family through email and instant messaging,
do you find yourself always wondering where you saved the contact informa-
tion you need? The People app in Windows 10 might be able to help by con-
solidating your various contacts and displaying them all in one alphabetical
list, where you can find who you need easily.

Getting Started with the

People App
You launch the People app from the
Start menu. If you’ve moved your
tiles around or you don’t see the
People app on your Start menu, you
can locate the app in the All Apps list.

1. Click to display the Start menu.

2. Click or tap the People app. The

1 2
People app launches.
 Managing Contacts with the People App 247

3. If you want to import contacts

from another app, click Import
Contacts.

4. Click Ready to Go to start using

the People app.

Using the People App

The People app window is a good
example of an app that makes effective
use of all available space. You can use this 3 4
one window to do almost everything you
need to do related to managing contacts. 1 6 3 4 5 7

1. Search for contacts by typing a

name in the Search box.

2. Choose a contact by clicking a

name.

3. Review contact information.

4. Edit contact info if needed.

5. Share or delete the contact if you

like.

6. Add a new contact.

7. Review your most recent interac- 8 2

tions with the selected contact.

8. Display and change settings for

the People app.

Connecting Other Contact Lists

You can connect Windows 10—and specifically, the People app—to as many mail
accounts as you’d like. You set up your accounts in the Settings page of the People app.
Click Settings in the lower-left corner of the People app window and click Add an Account.
Choose the account you want to connect and click Next. (You might be prompted to
enter your email address and password.) Follow the prompts on-screen to give the app
permission to use your information, track your location, and access the contact list.
(You can always opt out, of course.) Click Done when you’re finished. If you’ve given
Windows 10 the necessary permissions, your contacts automatically show up in your
People app from here on out.
 248 Chapter 10 Staying in Touch (and in Sync) with Windows 10

Adding a New Contact

The People app provides you with
a one-stop shop for all your contact
needs. You can easily add, remove,
edit, and delete contacts in the
People app. Any contacts you add in
the People app are available in your
Mail app as well.

1. In the People app, click the New

Contact button at the top of the 1 4 2 5
pane.

2. Enter the name of the contact. If

you want to add more informa-
tion, such as entering the first and
last name separately or providing
a nickname, click the Edit tool to
display a list of additional items
you can add.

3. Enter the mobile phone, email

address, and address information
for the contact. 3 6
4. Click or tap Add Photo to display
the Photos window.

5. Click or tap the photo you want to

add to the contact.

6. Tap or click Save to save the new

contact to your People app.

Staying in Touch Through Email

The Mail app in Windows 10 has been greatly improved. Not only is the
screen clean and easy to navigate, but you can add more than one email
account so all your mail comes to one central location.
The Mail app is available in the Start menu. The live tile shows you the title
and intro text of your latest email message, and the number of unread mes-
sages in your Inbox is displayed on the tile. When you click or tap the app
 Staying in Touch Through Email 249

tile, the app opens on the screen, and you can click or tap the types of mes-
sages you want to see. You can view your Inbox as usual, or you can choose
Social Updates to see what your friends are up to, choose Newsletters to
read through your latest newsletters, or choose Flagged to see the messages
you’ve flagged for follow-up later.

Launching Mail
You’ll find the Mail app in the Start
menu. You can launch the app easily by
clicking or tapping the tile. 2

1. Click the Start button to display

the Start menu.

2. Click the Mail app tile.

Maximize the Effect

Mail opens in a minimized win-
dow on your screen. To get the
full effect of Mail (and to see the
Preview pane, which shows the
contents of the selected mes-
sage), maximize the window by 1
clicking the Maximize tool in the
controls in the upper right.

Checking Out the Mail

Window
The Mail app presents a streamlined, 1 2 3
easy-to-navigate screen that allows you
to review your mail quickly, click the
message you want to read, organize
your mail into folders, and respond eas-
ily to the current message.

1. Click to open a new message.

2. Click or tap a message to read it.

3. Respond to the current message.

 250 Chapter 10 Staying in Touch (and in Sync) with Windows 10

4. Delete the current message.

6
5. Click Focused to see email from 5 7 4
your contacts.

6. Click Other to see general email

from people who are not in your
contacts list.

7. Check for new mail.

8. Display Mail settings.

Sleek New Look

The new design for the universal
Windows 10 Mail app is stream-
8
lined and inviting. When you click
the Collapse tool just beneath the
app title, the left pane closes to
display the Mail toolbar along the
left edge of the app window.

Composing an Email
Message
Creating a new message is a simple
task. Here’s how:

1. Display a new message by click-

ing New Mail. 1 4 3 2
2. Click to choose the mail account
you want to use to send the mes-
sage.

3. Click or tap in the To box and

begin to type the contact’s name.
The names of individuals in your
People app appear; you can click
to select the name you want to
use.

4. Click in the Subject line and type

a message subject.
 Staying in Touch Through Email 251

6
5. Click in the message area and
type your message. Use the tools 7 9 8
in the Format tab to apply the
text format you want.

6. Click the Insert tab if you want to

attach a file or add a table, pic-
ture, or link to the message.

7. Click the Options tab for tools to

check spelling, change the lan-
guage, or set the priority of the
message.

8. Click Send to send the message.

5
9. Click Discard to delete the mes-
sage without sending it.

>>>Go Further
SPRUCING UP THE BACKGROUND
In Windows 10, the Mail app allows you to create a prettier background if you
like. You can customize the look to give your communications a little more ambi-
ance. Click the Settings tool and choose Personalization. In the Background sec-
tion, click the Browse button and select the image you want to use. Click Open to
add it to the Mail app.
 252 Chapter 10 Staying in Touch (and in Sync) with Windows 10

Adding an Email
Account
Windows 10 makes it easy to add and
switch among email accounts, so you
have all your email gathered in one
handy place. By default, Windows 10
has likely set up the mail account you
use with your Microsoft account, but 2 1
you can add others as well, including
Gmail, Yahoo! Mail, and more.

1. In the Mail app window, click

Settings at the bottom of the left
pane. The Settings pane appears
along the right side of the app
window.

2. Click Manage Accounts. The

Settings panel appears.

3. Click Add Account.

3
 Staying in Touch Through Email 253

4. Click the type of account you

4
want to add.

5. Enter the email address for the

account.

6. Click Next and follow the prompts

to complete the process. The Mail
app adds the account to your
email accounts and displays the
accounts in the Accounts pane
on the right side of your Mail app
window.

6
 254 Chapter 10 Staying in Touch (and in Sync) with Windows 10

>>>Go Further
CHANGING ACCOUNT SETTINGS
You can tweak the settings of your email account to specify how often you want
to check for new content, which types of information you want to download,
and whether the account shows notifications on your Windows desktop or Lock
screen. You can also remove the account if you like.

Display the Mail app window and click Settings. Choose Manage Accounts, and
then click the account you want to change. You can modify the account name, let
Windows know when you want to download content, and choose the items you
want to sync. (You can select Email, Contacts, or Calendar.) You can change noti-
fications by clicking the Show Email Notifications arrow and choosing whether
you want to see notifications for all mail, email from favorite contacts, or never.

When you want to return to the Mail app, click elsewhere in the Mail window to
clear the Settings pane.

Organizing Your Email

You might get dozens or even hun-
dreds of messages each day. Some
might be junk mail, but others you
need to keep—perhaps notes about
upcoming meetings, deadlines, or
fun plans. You can organize your mail
by filing it away in folders you create,
or you can pin a message to your 1 2
task list so you’ll remember to follow
3
up on it sooner rather than later.

1. In the Mail app, right-click the

message you want to file. A con-
text menu appears.

2. Click Move. A list of folders

appears.

3. Click the folder where you want

to store the message.
 Keeping Your Dates Straight with the Calendar App 255

Marking Mail as Junk

It’s just part of emailing today—you are going to get junk mail. To get rid of the
junk mail, select to move the message as outlined here and, when the Folder
list appears, click Junk Email.

Keeping Your Dates Straight with the

Calendar App
The Calendar app gives you access to appointments whether you’re work-
ing on your desktop, tablet, or phone. Because the Calendar app offers live
notifications, you can have Windows display your appointments on the Lock
screen of your computer so you don’t even have to log in to see what’s next
in your day.

Mail and Calendar, Hand in Hand

You can move from the Mail app to the Calendar app without ever returning
to the Start menu. Click the Calendar tool in the bottom of the left pane of
the Mail app to open the Calendar. Similarly, you can click the Mail app in the
lower-left corner of the Calendar to move back to Mail.

Checking Appointments
The first place you’ll see your calen-
dar information is on the Lock screen
of your computer. You’ll also notice
the live tile updates on the Calendar
app tile on the Start screen. You can
tap the Calendar app to display your
calendar, which opens by default in
Month view.

1. You can display the Calendar

app while you’re working in Mail
by clicking the Calendar tool in
the lower-left corner of the Mail
window. (You can also get to the
Calendar from the Start menu.) 1
 256 Chapter 10 Staying in Touch (and in Sync) with Windows 10

5 2 4
2. Review appointments in the
month.

3. Click to review a specific appoint-

ment.

4. Click a different view.

5. Click the Collapse button to hide

the calendar panel and get more
room for calendar display.

Adding a New 3
Appointment
Creating a new appointment takes 1
just a couple clicks and very little
typing. Click the New Event tool, and
then enter the information relevant
to the appointment you’re noting.

1. In the Calendar app, click the New

Event tool.

2. Type a title for the event.

3. Enter the location where it will be

held.

4. Enter a description describing the

3 8 2 5 7
event.

5. Choose the date and start time for

the appointment.

6. Choose the end day and time for

the appointment.

7. Invite others to the event.

8. Tap or click Save and Close.

All-Day Appointments
Instead of choosing an end time, enable 4 6
the All Day check box if you want to
block out the entire day, or multiple
days, for this appointment.
 Keeping Your Dates Straight with the Calendar App 257

Making an Appointment Private

If you want to make sure that an appointment doesn’t show up on a shared or
public calendar, click the Private (lock) icon in the top right of the new event
window. You’ll be able to see the appointment in your calendar, but others who
have permission to view your calendar will not see it.

>>>Go Further
INVITING OTHERS TO YOUR SHINDIG
While you’re filling in the details for your new appointment, you can invite oth-
ers to participate. In the pane on the right side of the appointment window, tap
or click in the Invite Someone box, and type the email addresses of the people
you’d like to invite.

After you’re finished filling out the appointment form, tap Send to send the
invitation to everyone involved. Each person receives an invitation with Accept,
Tentative, Decline, Propose New Time, and Respond at the top so the invitee can
take immediate action in response to your invitation.
 Great improvements in the
Photos app make organizing and
editing images easier than ever.

Paint 3D is a fun and creative app that

makes creating 3D objects easy.
In this chapter, you learn how to work with
photos, music, video, and games by learning
about these tasks:

➔ Viewing and organizing your photos

➔ Working with creations
➔ Paint 3D: Adding artistic dimensions
11
Bringing Out Your Inner
Artist with Photos and
Paint 3D
Remember the days—in the not-too-long ago past—when you took
film to the drug store and then waited three days for your pictures
to be developed?
Technology has made capturing, viewing, and sharing photos an
instant thing, and because of that, and social media sites such
as Facebook and Instagram, photographs have become a major
language of connection among people all over the world. We are
drawn to photos, whether they are beautiful, tragic, or interesting,
and we capture and share the photos that help us communicate
what’s important to us.
Whether we’re using our phones, tablets, or—um, cameras—taking
photos is now a regular part of what we do. And the prevalence of
photo-taking means that we have mountains of digital photographs
to manage and organize. How will we find the one specific one
we’re looking for?
 260 Chapter 11 Bringing Out Your Inner Artist with Photos and Paint 3D

Windows 10 Fall Creators Update includes an enhanced Photos app that

makes both organizing and fine-tuning photos simple. You can even create
custom videos from the photos you’ve taken. What’s more, the new Paint 3D
app enables you to play in a multidimensional space, designing new and cre-
ative landscapes for your artistic ideas.

Viewing and Organizing Your Photos

If you’ve been following along and trying the various versions of Windows
10 as they become available, you have no doubt noticed that the Photos app
has more than a few makeovers. In past incarnations of Photos, developers
have expanded the various editing tools available. Now in the version of Pho-
tos included with Windows 10 Fall Creators Update, Microsoft has made some
interesting changes that make organizing your photos easier than ever while
preserving the solid editing tools. The newest version of the app also includes
some new creative tools.

Starting the Photos App 2

It’s no surprise that the Photos app

is in Windows 10 in the Start menu.
When you launch the app, it opens
and displays the folders in which
your various photos are currently
stored.

1. Click the Start button to display

the Start menu.

2. Click the Photos app tile.

1 3
3. Scroll down to look through your
most recent photos in the dis-
played collection.
 Viewing and Organizing Your Photos 261

A Look Around the

Photos App Window
The Photos app has a clean new look,
and the photos are organized center
stage. Across the top, the app orga-
nizes your recent photos into albums
for you, so you can easily navigate
through all the photo collections the
app gathers from your PC, phone,
tablet, and OneDrive account. Here
are the tools you’ll use regularly in
the main window of the Photos app.
5 2
1. View your photos from all your
devices, organized by date. 1 3 4 6 8

2. See the video albums the Photos

app has put together for you
(arranged by date, time, location,
or subject).
3. View your photos grouped by the
person central to the picture.

4. Navigate to a specific folder con-

taining images you want to view.

5. Click to create a custom video of

the photos you’ve taken. 7
6. Click to select individual photos
or groups of photos.

7. Click a photo to display it and

gain access to editing tools.

8. Select settings and preferences

for the Photos app.
 262 Chapter 11 Bringing Out Your Inner Artist with Photos and Paint 3D

More Tools for Editing and Sharing

When you open a particular photo by double-clicking it, you’ll also see a set of
editing and sharing tools, which you’ll learn about in the section “Editing and
Enhancing Photos.”

In the Windows 10 Photo app, you can choose the way in which you want to
display and work with your photos. You can use collections, albums, or folders
to find the images you want to use.

Collections organize your photos by date. Depending on when you took them
or uploaded them, they are grouped by the date they were added.

Albums are automatically generated by the Photos app to pull together related
photos—for example, one might be named something like, “Your Weekend
Recap.” You simply need to add them all at once to your Pictures folder, and the
Photos app will make an album out of them.

The Collection view is a gathering of all your photos from a variety of places—
your PC, OneDrive, your phone, and more. The Photos app displays your photos
by date, with the most recently captured showing at the top. The app elimi-
nates any duplicates, so you won’t be viewing the same image more than once.

1 3 2
Viewing Your Photos
You can choose how you want to
view and scroll through your photos
by using the Collections, Creations,
People, or Folders view.

1. In the Photos app, click the view

you want to use.
2. Scroll through the various choices
in that view.
4 5
3. Click the photo you want to view.

4. Magnify or reduce the image size

by clicking the Zoom tools at the
top of the photo window.

5. Browse through photos by click-

ing the Next or Previous buttons
on the sides of the image.
 Viewing and Organizing Your Photos 263

Displaying File Information

If you want to know more about a particular photo, such as when it was taken
or where it was saved, click the See More tool to display the drop-down menu,
and then click File Info. The Photos app shows you the name of the file, the
date and time it was taken, the image resolution, the file type, and the size. You
will also see where the file was originally stored. Click the Close button in the
upper-right corner of the File Info panel to hide the information.

Editing and Enhancing

Photos
When you’re displaying an image in
1 3 2
the Photos app, you can easily make
corrections, apply filters, remove red
eye, and more.

1. Display the photo you want to

edit in the Photos app.

2. Click Edit & Create in the tools

row above and to the right of the
photo.

3. Choose Edit. A palette of editing

tools appears to the right of the
photo.

4. The Enhance tab provides you 4 7

with a number of filters you can 5 6
apply to the image. Click one to
apply it.

5. To have Photos auto-adjust the

color, brightness, and contrast,
click Enhance Your Photo.

6. Click to crop or rotate the photo.

7. Click to adjust individual levels

of Light, Color, and Clarity in the
image.

8. If you want to create a copy of the 8

original picture that saves your
edits, tap or click Save a Copy.
 264 Chapter 11 Bringing Out Your Inner Artist with Photos and Paint 3D

9. If you want to update the original

version of the picture with your
changes, click Save.

10. If you want to reverse your most

recent edits, click or tap Undo All.

10 9

>>>Go Further
NOW FOR A DIFFERENT EDITOR…
If you have another image editor that you are particularly attached to, you can
open your photo in that app right from within the Photos app. Display the photo
and click the See More tool to display the drop-down menu. Click Open With,
and when the Photos app displays the other options for photo editors you have
installed, click the one you want to use. Alternatively, if you haven’t yet installed
your favorite, you can click Look for an App in the Store and search for the image
editor you want to use.

Importing Photos
These days we take so many photos that we need an easy way to view, edit,
and share them. If you have set up your phone to work with OneDrive so you
upload images you capture automatically, they’re available in your Photos
app without your doing anything at all (provided you use the same Microsoft
account for both your OneDrive account and your Windows 10 computer or
device).
 Working with Creations 265

If you save photos on a thumb drive

1 2 3
or a DVD, you need to be able to tell
the Photos app where to find those
images so they can be imported.

1. Open the Photos app and click

the Collection tab.

2. Click Import to open the sub-

menu.
3. Click whether you want to import
photos from a USB device or
another folder. If you choose a
USB device, Windows 10 looks
for the device connected to your
computer; if one isn’t found,
Windows 10 prompts you to
insert it. If you choose a folder, the
Open dialog box opens so you
can choose the folder you want to
use.

4. Navigate to the folder with the

images you want to import, and
click it.

5. Click Add This Folder to Pictures

to tell Photos to include this
folder in searches and collections. 4 5

Working with Creations

Creations are a new feature of Windows 10 Fall Creators Update. The Photos
app chooses a selection of your photos (usually organized by date or person)
and creates a video of images, complete with music and zoom effects. The
result is quite stunning.
You can also create your own creations on the fly. The Photos app gives you
the choice of creating a custom album with photos and videos you choose or
editing your own video (compiled from photos you’ve taken).
 266 Chapter 11 Bringing Out Your Inner Artist with Photos and Paint 3D

Adding Your Own

Creations
Creativity is a big theme in Windows 1 2
10 Fall Creators Update, and the
Photos app gives you a number of
tools and the latitude to create proj-
ects based on the photos you cap-
ture. Here’s how to create your own
Photos creation.

1. Open the Photos app.

2. Click or tap Create to see a list of

choices.

3. Click or tap Album. The New

Album window appears.

4. Scroll through the list of photos.

5. Click the photos you want to add

to the album.

6. Click or tap Add. The new album

is displayed so you can watch or
edit your new creation.
3
Videos, Too
You can follow the same process 5 6 4
to create a custom video of your
favorite photos. In the Photos app
window, choose Create and then
select Video Project. Choose your
photos and click Add, and, when
you get to the editing stage,
Windows 10 prompts you to add
music, adjust the timing of pho-
tos, and more.
 Working with Creations 267

2 1
Viewing and Editing
Creations
The Photos app in Windows 10 Fall
Creators Update also does some cre-
ating of its own. You’ll notice that the
app has taken some of your photos
and put them to music, animating
them in a kind of video project. You
can view and edit these creations to
add your own creative touches.
3
1. Display the Photos app.

2. Click Creations.

3. Click or tap the creation you want

to view. The page for that project
opens. The banner on the page
shows a preview of the video.

4. Click Play to watch the video,

complete with music.

5. Click or tap to edit the video, add-

ing your own photos. 4 5

>>>Go Further
READY, SET, CAMERA
Windows 10 also includes a Camera app that you can use to grab your own
still photos or videos. You’ll find the Camera app on the Start menu, and when
you tap or click it, after giving the app permission to use your location, you see
yourself—surprise!—on the screen, with two tools to the right, offering you the
option of taking snapshots or choosing video. You can also click the See More
button in the top right to set an automated timer, or you can change the settings
of the photo or video you’re grabbing with the camera.
 268 Chapter 11 Bringing Out Your Inner Artist with Photos and Paint 3D

Paint 3D: Adding Artistic Dimension

Perhaps you’ve heard that 3D modeling is all the rage. From 3D printers (how
is it possible that you can print a chair?) to multidimensional graphic design,
looking at something in 3D gives us a more realistic sense of the object we’re
interacting with. Windows 10 Fall Creators Update includes several 3D model-
ing tools: Paint 3D, Windows Mixed Reality, and HoloLens support.
Windows Mixed Reality is a new platform in Windows 10 that enables users
to see a blend of real and virtual realities. You’ll get to try this out later in the
chapter.
HoloLens technology is beyond the beginning level of this book (plus out of
the reach of many of our technology budgets) because it requires a special
VR headset. No worries, though—we can still have some fun with Paint 3D,
which is included free as part of your version of Windows 10.
The Paint 3D app was originally planned as a replacement for Windows Paint,
but thanks to customer feedback (and loyalty to Windows Paint), both apps
now coexist in Windows 10. With Paint 3D, you can
• Create 3D landscapes and objects

• Make 2D drawings and turn them into 3D

• Add special effects and stickers

• Add ready-made 3D objects to your creations

• Tweak lighting, brightness, and more

Getting Started with

Paint 3D
The Paint 3D app is in your Windows
Start menu. Begin by tapping or
clicking the Start button, and then
scroll through the list to find the app.

1. Click or tap the Start button to

display the Start menu.

2. Drag the scrollbar to display apps

that begin with the letter P.
1 2
 Paint 3D: Adding Artistic Dimension 269

3. Click or tap the Paint 3D app. The

3
app opens in your work area.

Displaying Tool Names

If you don’t see the names of tools in
the row across the top of the Paint 3D
window, click the Show or Hide Names
in the Menu button (it looks like three
dots) in the far-right side of the tools
row. The names of the tools appear
beneath each tool.

Exploring the Paint 3D

Window
The first time you start Paint 3D, you
are greeted with a Welcome screen that
offers getting started tips, ideas, and
videos. You can click one of the items
to see more, or click the Show Welcome
Screen check box to remove the check
mark so the next time Paint 3D starts,
the Paint 3D screen is displayed. For
now, press Esc if necessary to clear the
Welcome screen.
2 4
You use the following tools in Paint 3D to 1 3 5
create 2D, 3D, and mixed reality creations:

1. Choose the brush style, color, and

thickness.

2. Create 2D shapes, lines, and

curves.

3. Choose from a palette of ready-

made 3D shapes, models, and doo-
dles, and apply colors and textures.

4. Add stickers to your creation.

5. Insert text into your 2D or 3D

design.
 270 Chapter 11 Bringing Out Your Inner Artist with Photos and Paint 3D

7
6. Apply lighting effects to the object
you’ve created. 9 6 8 10
7. Change the size and settings of your
canvas.

8. Connect to the Remix 3D com-

munity to share ideas, get new 3D
objects, and more.

9. Draw or write on the canvas.

10. Choose the tools and settings you
want to use. This panel displays
choices related to the tools you
select.

1 2
Creating with Paint 3D
There are many fun things you can do with
Paint 3D, and the best way to learn is to
jump in and start experimenting. Paint 3D
includes many ready-made objects that you
can manipulate and make part of your own
drawings.

1. Using your finger or pen, click or tap

the 3D tool.

2. Choose a shape from the right panel.

3. Choose a color from the color palette.

4 9 7 6 3
4. Drag to draw the shape on the can-
vas. Four tools appear around the
perimeter of the shape.

5. Click a corner and resize the image by

dragging.

6. Reposition the tilt of the object, for-

ward or back.

7. Rotate the object right or left.

8. Pivot the object to get a different

view.

9. Turn the object and adjust its place-

ment in the three-dimensional space. 8 5
 Paint 3D: Adding Artistic Dimension 271

Adding Mixed Reality 1

Once you’ve created an object, you can
test it out against your own reality, cre-
ating a kind of mixed experience that
is fun and a little mind-bending. If your
computer is equipped with a camera,
Paint 3D accesses it to get a picture of
the live background and displays your
newly created object on it. You can
move the object on the background and
take a snapshot of the creation if you
like.

1. Once you’ve created your object,

click the View Model in Mixed
Reality button. The object appears
3 5 4
within the real surroundings
picked up by your camera.

2. Click to position the object.

3. Rotate the object as you’d like to

get the right effect.

4. Tap or click to take a snapshot of

the object in the real background.

5. Click or tap Paint 3D to return to

the workspace.
2

Saving Your Objects in 1

Paint 3D
You can save the objects you’ve created
by using the tools in the Paint 3D menu.
You can also upload a 3D object to the
Remix 3D community to share with oth-
ers, invite feedback, and more.

1. When you’ve finished working

with your object, click or tap
Expand Menu.
 272 Chapter 11 Bringing Out Your Inner Artist with Photos and Paint 3D

2. Click Save as Paint 3D Project. The

Name Your Project box appears.

3. Type a name for the project.

4. Click or tap Save in Paint 3D.

Connecting with Remix 3D

Remix 3D is a community devel-
oped by Microsoft in which you
can find a huge library of 3D
objects to include in your own
work. You can also upload your
unique creations, talk with other 3 2
3D designers, and get tips for
your work.

Display the Remix 3D library by

clicking the Remix 3D tool at the
right end of the tools row. A panel
appears on the right side of your
work area, offering a palette of
ideas you can use as inspiration 4
for your own projects. If you like,
you can visit the Remix 3D com-
munity by clicking the Remix 3D
menu button in the upper-left
corner of the panel (it resembled
three horizontal lines) and choos-
ing Visit Remix3D.com.
This page intentionally left blank
 Groove Music makes it easy to find,
organize, and play your favorite tunes.

Watch your favorite shows and movies

in the Movies & TV app.
In this chapter, you find out how to use
Windows 10 to enjoy your favorite media—
music and shows:

➔ Your music, your way

➔ Finding and watching your favorite shows
➔ Playing and pausing shows
12
Getting Your Groove on
with Favorite Music and
Shows
From the earliest incarnations of Windows 8, great media streaming
has been one of the goals of the operating system changes. Today
many of us watch movies, and shows and listen to music streaming
in real time. We do still buy CDs and slip DVDs in the drive once in a
while, but much of the media enjoyed today is digital.
In Windows 10, you use the Groove Music app and the Movies &
TV app to listen to your favorite tunes and to watch your favorite
shows. Both apps are included as part of Windows 10, so they are
ready to be used as soon as you’re ready to be entertained.

Your Music, Your Way

In Windows 10, your media is front and center. You can get to your
Groove Music app right from the Start menu, with a simple click.
You can play your music in your own collection, search for the latest
tunes from your favorite artists, and even purchase new music, all
within the Groove Music app.
 276 Chapter 12 Getting Your Groove on with Favorite Music and Shows

Some of the changes to the Groove Music app include a sleek new design for
the Groove Music app interface, complete with a dark theme; easier access to
your albums, artists, songs, and playlists; and a never-ending catalog of tunes
in the Microsoft Store.

Changes for Groove

In the fall of 2017, Microsoft announced that it was doing away with the Groove
Music Service, a subscription-based streaming service that enabled you to listen
to albums for free if you paid a monthly fee.

To replace this streaming service, Microsoft is partnering with Spotify. çUsers

who previously used the Groove Music Service will be led through the pro-
cess of moving their media over to Spotify so they can continue to enjoy their
favorite music without interruption. Groove Music Service was discontinued as
of December 31, 2017. The Groove Music app will continue to be the standard
music app in Windows 10, however, enabling you to play the songs and albums
you’ve purchased that are stored in your Groove Music library.

Getting Started with the

Groove Music App
The Groove Music app is displayed
as a tile on your Start menu, and you 2
launch it by clicking the tile.

1. Click to display the Start menu.

2. Click the Groove Music app tile.

The app opens on your screen.

Playing Music
The Groove Music app usually
opens to a screen displaying your
Albums, although it can vary. You
can click one of the albums to
begin listening to your favorite
tunes, or you can click another
tool on the left to find a specific
song, play tunes by artist, open a
playlist, and more.
1
 Your Music, Your Way 277

Learning the Groove

Music App Window
The toolbar along the left side of the
window gives you different ways to
find and play the music you want to
hear.
1 3 2
1. Click and enter the name of an
artist or album you want to search
for.

2. Click to display your music listed

by artist.

3. Click to see a list of songs in the

Groove Music app.

4. Click an album you want to play.

5. Click to display information about

the album currently playing.
5 4
Expanding the Toolbar
If your toolbar is condensed, it
won’t look like the one shown in
the figure. You can expand it by
clicking the Maximize Navigation
Pane button (three horizontal
lines) at the top of the toolbar.
 278 Chapter 12 Getting Your Groove on with Favorite Music and Shows

Playing an Album in
Groove Music
The Groove Music app makes it easy
to find and play your favorite music. In
the Groove Music window, simply click
the album you want to play and use the
music controls in the lower-right corner
of the screen to change the order, adjust
the volume, and more. 3
1 2 4
1. Click the album you want to play.
The playback window appears,
listing all the songs in the album.

2. Click Play All if you want to listen

to the entire album.

3. If you want to play one song in

the list, click it, and click the Play
button that appears in the listing.

4. Click to add the selected song to

a playlist.

5. Change the volume for playback.

6. Pause the playback of the current 6 5

song. 7
7. Turn on repeat so the same song
will play again.

Changing Music Settings

Like everything else in Windows 10, you can set up Groove Music to act the way
you want it to. Click the Settings tool to the right of your profile picture and
name in the lower-left corner of the Groove Music window.

In the Groove Music Settings window, you can click a link to move your music
collection automatically to Spotify. You can also tell Windows 10 where to look
for the music collection stored on your computer, choose whether you want
album covers and data to be updated automatically, and determine whether
songs on OneDrive will be updated as you make changes. Additionally, you can
choose whether you want Groove Music to appear in light or dark mode.
 Your Music, Your Way 279

Creating Playlists
Playlists are collections of favorite
songs that you group in any way
you like, for easy listening later. You
might put together a playlist of relax-
ing songs, a playlist of your favorite
workout tunes, or a playlist of songs
you like to listen to while hiking.
Creating a playlist is easy in Groove
Music.

1
1. In the Groove Music window, click
the Create New Playlist tool. The 2
Name This Playlist window opens.

2. Type a name for the new playlist.

3. Click Create Playlist. Groove Music
opens the new playlist.

4. Click Go to Albums to add music

to the playlist.

5. Drag the slider to On if you want

to make your playlist songs avail-
able when you’re offline.

3
5

4
 280 Chapter 12 Getting Your Groove on with Favorite Music and Shows

6. Click the check box to the left of

7
the songs you want to add to the
playlist.

7. Click Add To. A list of playlists

you’ve created appears.

8. Click the name of the playlist you

just created.

Creating a Playlist on the Fly

You can also create a new playlist on
the fly by clicking a song or songs you
like, clicking Add To, and choosing New
Playlist. Groove Music asks you to name
the playlist and then displays the select- 6 8
ed songs in the new playlist.

Finding and Watching Your Favorite Shows

The Movies & TV app in Windows 10 is a tempting proposition, giving you
access to a host of streaming movies, television shows, and other videos that
you can purchase and add to your own collection. You also can learn more
about your favorite movies and shows and even rent them online instantly
and then stream them to your computer or to your Xbox.

It’s Not All Good

RIP Media Center
Although Microsoft made Windows Media Center Edition (MCE) available as
a download for those tech enthusiasts who wanted to use it with Windows 8,
Microsoft has announced that in Windows 10, Media Center is officially dead
and will not return. Windows Media Center arrived in 2002 and had a long
run as the media hub that would enable you to enjoy movies, music, and
shows to your heart’s content, well ahead of the technological advances in
media we see today.
With today’s universe full of media-streaming and hosting apps (more than
a few of which live in Xbox Live), MCE has outlived its usefulness. You had a
good run, MCE. Thanks for the memories.
 Finding and Watching Your Favorite Shows 281

Launching the Movies &

TV App 2

The Movies & TV app is available on

your Start menu.

1. Click to display the Start menu.

2. Click the Movies & TV app tile. The

Movies & TV app opens on your
screen.

Blank Space
When the screen first opens, you may
be surprised by the blankness of it. This
happens because until you’ve purchased
movies in the Movies & TV app, there’s
nothing to show. You can click Visit Store
to begin shopping for movies, however.
1

Exploring the Movies &

TV App Window
The Movies & TV app has been renamed
from the Video app, which was avail-
able in Windows 8.1. Now the app has a
whole new look and feel. The clean look
and left-side toolbar give the feeling
that movies and shows are center stage. 1
Here are the main tools you’ll be using
with the Movies & TV app.

The tools on the Movies & TV app

window make it easy for you to

1. Explore available movies and

shows, display shows you’ve
purchased, or browse videos and
shows you’ve added to your per-
sonal collection.
 282 Chapter 12 Getting Your Groove on with Favorite Music and Shows

2 5 3
2. Choose whether you want to view
trailers, 360 videos, movies, or TV
shows.

3. Change Movie & TV app settings.

4. Click an item to learn more and

begin watching.

5. Shop for movies and TV shows in

the Store.

4
Finding New Movies &
1
TV Shows
The Store is available in the top-right
corner of the Movies & TV app, so
you can easily browse for new items
to watch. If you use the Search tool
to look for a show or an actor, the
app displays a link offering to take
you to the Store.

1. In the Movies & TV app, click

Store. The Microsoft Store opens,
displaying a horizontal scrolling
list of recent releases.
3 2
2. Click a show you want to know
more about.

3. Click to see the top movies being

sold currently.

4. Click to see new TV shows that are

currently popular.

5. Scroll down to see additional

titles.

4 5
 Playing and Pausing Shows 283

7 6 8
6. Click a show you want to know
more about, and a detail screen
opens for that show.

7. Click to purchase the entire sea-

son.

8. Click to purchase individual epi-

sodes.

Paying for Content

The process for paying for content can
vary based on how you’ve set up your
account. If you have a Microsoft account
and have a credit card associated with
it, it’s a very simple process. If you don’t,
you’ll have to jump through some hoops
to set up a payment option.

Playing and Pausing Shows

Once you’ve found, purchased, and downloaded the shows you’d like to
watch, you can make some popcorn and fire up the Movies & TV app.

1. Click or tap the Start button to

display the Start menu.

2. Scroll through the apps list and

click the Movies & TV app. The
app window opens.

1 2
284 Chapter 12 Getting Your Groove on with Favorite Music and Shows

3. The Personal tab is displayed by

3
default. This tab shows titles you
have previously purchased.

4. Scroll to see additional titles.

5. Click or tap the show you want to

watch.

6. If the show you’ve selected is a

series, episodes are listed in the
window. Click Play to start the
show.

7. If you want to pause the show,

click or tap pause. When you want
to resume viewing, click Play. 5 4

6
Closed Play in
captioning Rewind Forward Mini View

Volume 7 Full
screen
This page intentionally left blank
The improved Xbox app enables you
to connect with friends, join gaming
clubs, play games, and more.

Seamlessly broadcast your

gameplay to your own gaming
channel on Mixer.com.
In this chapter, you learn how to find and play
games in Windows 10 with these tasks:

➔ Exploring the Xbox App

➔ Playing a game with the Xbox app
➔ Using the Game bar
➔ Choosing game settings
➔ Broadcasting as you play
➔ Finding and downloading new games
➔ Checking network status
13
Entertainment for the
Gamer in You
In Windows 10 Fall Creators Update, developers recognize the
importance of good gameplay for Windows 10 users. Now the Xbox
app in Windows 10 has some slick new features that make gaming
with friends—in the same room or across the world—easier than
ever. You can record video and audio clips of your gameplay or
broadcast your own gaming prowess in real time. Gone are the days
of sitting alone in a room playing against a computer foe. Now gam-
ing is a real-world community effort, organized by interest and skill,
no matter what type of game you may be playing.

Exploring the Xbox App

All your gaming in Windows 10 begins with the Xbox app, which
is in the Windows 10 Start menu. Once you launch the app, you’ll
be able to access the games you’ve purchased and downloaded,
browse for more games, and connect with friends and the Xbox
gaming community.
 288 Chapter 13 Entertainment for the Gamer in You

Starting the Xbox App 2

and Signing In
After you launch the Xbox app from
your Start menu, you are greeted
with a sign-in screen that should
display the Xbox gamer tag that is
connected to your Microsoft account.
If the gamer tag shown isn’t yours
(which is very possible if you live in
a household with children), you can
click Switch Account to choose the
1
gamer tag that you want to use.

1. Click the Start button to open the

Start menu.

2. Click the Xbox app. The app

opens on your screen, sporting
that sophisticated design.

3. Click Switch Accounts if you need

to select a gamer tag other than
the one shown.

4. Click Let’s Play to open the Xbox

App window.
4 3

Learning the Xbox App Window

Like other universal apps in Windows 10, the Xbox app displays the toolbar
down the left side of the app window. You can expand the names for the vari-
ous tools by clicking the Menu tool at the top. Here are the elements you’ll
likely use most often in the Xbox app.
 Exploring the Xbox App 289

Home Microsoft Store Friends & Clubs

My Games
Achievements
Game DVR
Clubs
Trending

Search
Connection
Settings

• Home displays the games you’ve played most recently, introduces you
to new games you might like, and lists an Activity Feed where you see
posts, achievements, and status updates from friends.

• Friends & Clubs shows you other gamers you play with regularly (and who
are connected to your Xbox Live or Xbox One account). You can also see
their online status so you know whether they are available to play games.

• My Games lists the games you currently have on your PC.

• Achievements shows any badges you’ve earned while playing games.

• Game DVR shows screen captures or clips you’ve taken of games you’ve
played on Xbox.

• Clubs enables you to find clubs of gamers who are interested in the
things that interest you.

• Trending shows you what people are playing and following on Xbox Live.

• You can browse or look for specific games in the Microsoft Store.

• Search enables you to search for specific games or game content.

• Connection enables you to connect your Xbox app on your PC, tablet, or
phone to your Xbox One.

• Change Settings for Notifications and Privacy.

 290 Chapter 13 Entertainment for the Gamer in You

Playing a Game with the Xbox App

Playing a game is super simple with the Xbox app. You play installed (and
supported) games in your Xbox app by going to My Games and selecting the
one you want to play. Microsoft also conveniently adds a link on that page
that can take you to the Store to find more games to play.

1
1. In the Xbox app, click My Games.

2. Click the Play button for the game

you want to play.

3. If you don’t see a game you want

to play, click Find Games in the
Microsoft Store to browse games
you can purchase or download for
free.

3 2

Using the Game Bar

While you’re playing a game, you can display the Xbox app Game bar by
pressing Windows+G. The Game bar appears in the lower part of your screen
as you play.

1. Press Windows+G to display the

Game bar.

2. Click or tap to return to the Xbox

app.

3. Click to take a screenshot of what-

ever is on the screen.

4. Record a game clip of your cur-

rent play.

2 3 1
4
 Using the Game Bar 291

5. Start recording your gameplay.

6 8
6. Broadcast the game you’re play-
ing.

7. Turn on Game Mode.

8. Change game settings related

to recording, broadcasting, and
game mode.

5 7

Help in Real Time

If you choose an option on the Game bar that isn’t currently active, such as
background recording, the Xbox app notifies you that you need to turn that
setting on and instantly displays the setting you can change to make that hap-
pen. Just click the change you want and continue playing.

Using Game Mode in Windows 10

Game mode helps optimize your computer while you’re playing games so you
have all the processing power you need for smooth graphics, rich sound, and
more. When you turn Game mode on, Windows 10 puts gaming first in terms
of processing, so you get the best game quality and play you can get on your
computer system.

You can turn Game mode on while you’re playing a game by pressing
Windows+G to display the Game bar and clicking the Game mode tool to the
left of Settings on the bar. To change the settings for Game mode, click Settings
in the Game bar and click the General tab. If the box next to Game mode is
empty, click it to add a check mark. This turns Game mode on.
 292 Chapter 13 Entertainment for the Gamer in You

Choosing Game Settings

Windows 10 Fall Creators Update cares about gaming so much that there is
now an entire category in Settings devoted to Gaming. You can set things up
for gameplay all in one place or make changes while you play by using the
Game bar. To view and change preferences in Settings, follow these steps.

1. Click Start to display the Start

menu.

2. Click Settings.

3. Click or tap Gaming.

1 2

3
 Choosing Game Settings 293

4. Make sure the Game bar slider is

6 4
set to the On position.

5. Click to have the Game bar

appear when you play in full-
screen mode.

6. Click Game DVR to change set-

tings related to capturing video of
your games.
7. Click to change the folder where
video clips, recordings, and
screenshots are stored.

8. Make sure this is set to On so

you can record clips in the back- 5
ground while you play.

9. Set the length of the video clips

you want to capture.
8 7
10. Choose the maximum length of
video you want to record.

10 9
 294 Chapter 13 Entertainment for the Gamer in You

>>>Go Further
GAMEPLAY SHORTCUTS
By default, Windows 10 gives you a number of keyboard shortcuts you can use
with the Game bar. If you prefer, you can assign your own keyboard shortcuts
for the various tasks in the Game bar page of the Gaming Settings. These are the
default shortcuts:

Open the Game bar Windows+G

Take a screenshot Windows+Alt+PrtScrn

Record a clip Windows+Alt+G

Start/Stop recording Windows+Alt+R

Show/Hide recording timer Windows+Alt+T

Microphone on/off Windows+Alt+M

Start/Pause broadcast Windows+Alt+B

Show camera in broadcast Windows+Alt+W

Play Fair with TruePlay

In Gaming Settings, Windows 10 also gives you the option of turning on a fea-
ture called TruePlay, which helps to ensure that there is no cheating going on
in the games you are playing. This setting requires your permission because
Windows shares the information to ensure the game is played fairly. You can
turn on TruePlay by displaying Settings, choosing Gaming, clicking TruePlay,
and moving the slider to the On position.

Broadcasting as You Play

If you enjoy playing games alongside others or like to share your mastery of
a particular game, you will enjoy the broadcasting feature in the Xbox app.
You can easily share the game you’re playing on your own channel on Xbox
Live. Windows 10 makes all the necessary connections for you and makes the
process simple.
 Broadcasting as You Play 295

1. Launch the game you want to 1

play in the Xbox app.

2. Press Windows+G to display the

Game bar.

3. Choose whether you want your

video and audio to be broadcast
along with the gameplay.

4. Choose where you want your

video image to be displayed.

5. Click or tap Start Broadcast to

begin broadcasting. A small 2
broadcast window appears in
your game window.

6. This number shows you how

many people are watching your
broadcast.

7. Click to turn on your microphone.

8. Click to turn on your video cam-

era.

9. Click to pause the broadcast.

10. Click to stop broadcasting.

4 5 3

7
6 9

10
8
 296 Chapter 13 Entertainment for the Gamer in You

>>>Go Further
MIXER.COM: BROADCASTING WITH FRIENDS
When you click Broadcast and begin streaming your live game session for others
to see and respond to, you are using a Microsoft service called Mixer (formerly
called Beam), which enables live streaming in an online format. Windows 10 Fall
Creators Update includes improvements to Mixer, so now you can switch easily
to broadcasting within an active game. Not only can you get into a game stream
more quickly, but Game mode gives you a boost for your computer’s processing
that makes broadcasting smoother and more seamless than ever.

Using Mixer, you can also view game broadcasting in clubs organized around
your favorite gaming interests. Users can earn points, called sparks, for partici-
pating in broadcasts, and the sparks can be spent on different features in the
Mixer service. As a broadcaster, you get to see who is following you and even
chat with followers as you play. All of these improvements bring you one step
closer to a fully integrated community gaming experience, and it’s all free as part
of Windows 10.

Finding and Downloading New Games

A big part of the fun of the Xbox app is that the number of games you can
find and try is virtually unlimited, and more games are being added every
day.
There are two different ways to access the Microsoft Store in the Xbox app.
You can click My Games and choose Find Games in the Microsoft Store, or
you can click the Microsoft Store icon in the toolbar on the left side of the
app window.
 Finding and Downloading New Games 297

Microsoft Store

Find games

The Microsoft Store opens, and the Games category is already selected. You
can find games a number of different ways.

1. Click a featured game to learn

2 1 3 4
more about it and purchase it if
you like.

2. Choose a game category to see

different types of games.
3. Search for games by name.

4. Scroll down to see additional

game categories, including New
PC Games, Best Selling Games,
Top Free Games, and Best Rated
Games.

5. Click a game to find out more 5

about it.
 298 Chapter 13 Entertainment for the Gamer in You

6. Read the description of the game. 9

7. Click to read reviews by other 7
users.

8. Browse through screenshots of

the game.

9. Click the Buy button to purchase

and download the game. If the
game you are viewing is free,
the button is labeled Get instead
of Buy. If you are purchasing
the game, the Microsoft Store
prompts you for payment. If
the game is free, the download 6 8
begins. When the game finishes
downloading to your computer,
Windows 10 notifies you and
gives you the option of launching
the game or pinning it to the Start
menu.

Easy-to-Find Installs
Windows 10 also displays any
new games or apps you’ve down-
loaded at the top of the Windows
Start menu, in the Recently Added
category.

Checking Network Status

Another new feature in Windows 10 Fall Creators Update enables you to do
a network connectivity check for those times when games seem to be lag-
ging and not working as they should. The setting is in the Gaming Settings
window.
 Checking Network Status 299

1. Choose the Gaming category in

the Settings window.

2. Click or tap Xbox Networking. 1 5 3

Windows 10 does a quick network
connectivity check to see whether
services are working properly and
what the processing speed of
your network is currently.

3. Review the network settings.

4. If you want Windows 10 to fix any

network connection problems,
click Fix It.

5. Click Check Again to test the net-

work response again.
2 4
Back up your important files
and folders automatically.

Fix hardware or software issues

with troubleshooters.
In this chapter, you learn how to care for your
PC and solve problems when they arise by
learning about these tasks:

➔ Checking for Windows updates

➔ Backing up and restoring your files
➔ Troubleshooting your computer
➔ Optimizing your computer
➔ Encrypting your device
14
Caring for Your Computer
and Updating Windows
Much of what you need to safeguard your Windows 10 computer
or device happens behind the scenes in Windows 10 Fall Creators
Update. Microsoft regularly updates the software, which helps
ensure that you have the latest bug fixes, the most recent security
patches, and other healthy tweaks that can help protect your com-
puter and prevent crashes and security risks.
Windows 10 Fall Creators Update also adds some new features that
enable you to do some of the fixing yourself. The new Troubleshoot
tool offers a slate of 19 ready-to-use tools that help you sleuth out
any problems you’re having, whether they are hardware or software
related. And although device encryption is turned on by default,
you can tweak the settings or even disable the feature (although
your device is safer with encryption on).
This chapter walks you through the Windows 10 tools you’ll use to
make sure your computer is healthy, happy, and productive.
 302 Chapter 14 Caring for Your Computer and Updating Windows

Checking for Windows Updates

With the last big update of Windows 10, developers decided to make updat-
ing the software a “have to” instead of a “want to.” They did this to ensure
that all users got the security and functional patches they need to make
sure the operating system is working at its optimal level. But not all people
were thrilled with that—by and large, we like to make those kinds of choices
ourselves.
Windows 10 Fall Creators Update does give you several options about how
and when the updates are delivered, however. You can choose whether you
want Windows to automatically download updates as soon as they become
available; you can have Windows notify you before your system is restarted;
and you can temporarily pause updates and delay them for up to seven days.

Checking for Updates

The Windows Update window lets
you know when the operating
system last checked for updates
and gives you the option of check-
ing again yourself. You can also set
advanced update options from the
Windows Update screen.
1 2
1. Display the Start menu.

2. Choose Settings.

3. Click or tap Update & Security.

3
 Checking for Windows Updates 303

4. Click the Check for Updates but-

ton. Windows Update displays a
“Checking for updates” message
while the operating system checks
for any program changes.

5. Windows Update begins to look

for available updates. If the tool
finds program updates that can be 4 5
downloaded, it provides informa-
tion about the update and begins
the download process.

Setting Advanced
Update Options
Even though you can’t completely opt
out of Windows updates, you can make
some choices that enable you to manage
your update experience. You can change
when the updates are installed on your
computer, and you can delay updates for
a period of time.

1. Display the Windows Update screen

as described in the previous task.

2. Click to specify the hours during

which you don’t want updates to
restart your computer.
1 2 4 3
3. Click to indicate an assigned restart
6 5
time (for example, 3:00 a.m.) when
the restart won’t affect your work.

4. Click Advanced Options.

5. If you want to pause upgrades so

that the updates are postponed
for a period of seven days, slide
the setting to On.

6. Click to allow Windows 10 to

update other Microsoft products
(such as Windows Defender) along
with Windows 10 updates.
 304 Chapter 14 Caring for Your Computer and Updating Windows

Backing Up and Restoring Your Files

Hopefully, you are already saving copies of important files and folders—
perhaps you’re saving them to your OneDrive account or backing them up
on a flash drive. Making regular backups of your files helps you feel secure
knowing that your files are protected and that you have an extra copy, just in
case something happens. You can make these simple file backups yourself by
using File Explorer to copy the files to the folder or device where you want to
store the backup files.
Windows also provides a backup utility you can use to back up everything on
your hard disk. You should do this larger backup regularly—perhaps once a
week or so. This ensures that your files have been saved so that if something
unexpected happens to your computer—for example, you wind up with a
virus that damages important files—you can restore the files from your back-
up and go on as usual.
To get started using the Backup tool, you need to set up the utility to run the
way you want it to. This tells Windows where you want to save the backup
files and when you want to do the backup. You can change those settings at
any time, but Windows takes care of the backup automatically from here on
out on the day and time you specify.

Backing Up Your Files

1 3
with File History
To back up your data, follow these
steps:

1. Display the Update & Security

screen in the Settings window.

2. Click Backup.

3. Click Add a Drive. Windows scans

your system to find a drive where
the backup can be stored.

2
 Backing Up and Restoring Your Files 305

4. Click the drive you want to use as

4
a backup drive.

Don’t Forget
If you use an external storage
device connected to your PC,
make sure it’s plugged into your
computer and has power.

5. Windows shows the Automatically

Back Up My Files control set to
the On position. If you later want
to suspend backups, you can drag
the slider to Off.

5
 306 Chapter 14 Caring for Your Computer and Updating Windows

>>>Go Further
CHOOSING WHAT TO BACK UP
You can tell Windows 10 how often you want to save files and how long
you want to keep file versions by clicking More Options just beneath the
Automatically Back Up My Files control.

You can choose to save files as often as every 10 minutes or as infrequently as

once a day. And you can choose to keep files forever (which is the default) or
choose from 1 month to 2 years—or until the space is needed, whichever comes
first. Finally, on the More Options screen, you can review all the folders that are
included in the backup, click each one you don’t want to include, and then click
the Remove button that appears.

Restoring Files
You might never use the files you
backed up, but it can be reassur-
ing to have them in case you need
them. If you do need them, the tool
for restoring your files is in the same
place you discovered the Backup
1 4 2 3
tool.

1. In the Update & Security screen in

Settings, choose Backup.

2. Click More Options.

3. Scroll to the bottom of the

Backup Options screen.

4. Click Restore Files from a Current

Backup. The Home–File History
window appears.
 Backing Up and Restoring Your Files 307

5. Click the folders you want to

5
restore.

6. Click the Restore to Original

Location button, and Windows 10
restores the backed up files for
you.

Merging or Skipping
Folders
If you have an existing folder
6
with the same name as the folder
you’re restoring, Windows asks
you whether you want to merge
the folder with the existing one or
skip it. Click your choice, and the
files are restored.

>>>Go Further
SAVING THE DAY WITH WINDOWS
RECOVERY ENVIRONMENT
Several versions of Windows ago, Microsoft began including the Windows
Recovery Environment with the operating system as a set of tools that help users
recover from a variety of problems that can cause Windows to fail to start up
properly. In Windows 10, this feature is very good at realizing when your com-
puter is having troubles—when it can’t boot properly or repeatedly crashes, for
example—and launching the Windows Recovery Environment. This screen asks
you to select between See Advanced Repair Options and Restart My PC.

Restarting your PC allows it to continue operating normally. Sometimes a good

restart is all Windows really needs. Clicking See Advanced Repair Options gives
you access to a set of recovery tools designed to help Windows assess and cor-
rect whatever went wrong. These tools can, among other things, restore your
Windows installation to an “out of the box” state—as if it were installed for the
first time.
 308 Chapter 14 Caring for Your Computer and Updating Windows

Troubleshooting Your Computer

In Windows 10 Fall Creators Update, a new Troubleshoot category in Update
& Security enables you to sleuth out problems you may be having with Win-
dows 10. Nineteen different troubleshooters are available to help you fix
everything from audio that won’t play to Bluetooth troubles to issues with
Windows apps.

Launching a
Troubleshooter
In earlier versions of Windows,
1 2
troubleshooters were around, but
they were scattered throughout the
operating system and not located
in one handy place that was easy to
find. Now Windows 10 Fall Creators
Update takes the guesswork out of
troubleshooters.

1. In the Update & Security screen,

click Troubleshoot.

2. Scroll through the list of trouble-

shooters to find the one you 3 4
6
need.

3. Click or tap the troubleshooter to

select it.

4. Click Run the Troubleshooter. The

troubleshooter runs a set of diag-
nostics and then displays a results
page.

5. Click to see the details of the

troubleshooting process.

6. Click to close the troubleshooter.

5
 Optimizing Your Computer 309

Optimizing Your Computer

In addition to regular updates and backups, you can help Windows work
efficiently by optimizing the way files are stored on your computer. As part
of the normal use of your computer, file bits get scattered around the hard
drive. When you look at the folders in File Explorer, everything looks nice and
neat, with folders and files in nice little columns. But the way your computer
is actually storing the data behind the scenes isn’t quite that linear. Your com-
puter knows where everything is, thanks to the way it indexes information,
but over time, bits and pieces of files can be saved in various places all over
the drive. This kind of fragmentation can slow down the time it takes your
computer to process regular tasks—hence the need for a tool that defrag-
ments the data your computer stores.
You can use the settings in the Optimize Drives dialog box to clean up your hard
drive by consolidating those bits of files and putting them back together in one
place. This can help your computer run faster and better, which is a good thing.

Optimizing Your Hard

Disk
Although it runs automatically by
2
default, running the Optimize util-
ity fairly regularly—such as once
every month or two—helps ensure
that you’re making the most of the
available storage space on your hard
drive.

1. In the Search box on the taskbar,

type optimize.

2. Tap or click Defragment and

Optimize Drives.

1
 310 Chapter 14 Caring for Your Computer and Updating Windows

3. In the Optimize Drives dialog box,

4
click Analyze to do a check on
the selected drive to see whether
optimizing it will save you any
space.

4. Click Optimize to defragment the

selected disk.

5. After the process is finished, click

Close.

3 5

>>>Go Further
SCHEDULING REGULAR DEFRAGMENTING
You can put your PC on a steady defrag diet by having the system automatically
defragment your hard drive at a specific time of the week or month. Click Change
Settings in the Optimize Drives dialog box. In the Optimize Drives: Optimization
Schedule dialog box, click the Run on a Schedule check box and click the
Frequency you want: Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.

You can also click or tap the Choose button to select the drives you want to
optimize following this schedule. Click OK to save your settings, and Disk
Defragmenter will run automatically as you specified to keep your files as com-
pact as possible.

Note that a particular type of hard drive, called an SSD, has much different rules
for how it manages data (to avoid wearing it out). Windows 10 recognizes which
type of drive you have and adapts accordingly.
 Encrypting Your Device 311

Encrypting Your Device

Encryption is a file protection protocol that secures your files so that others
can’t get into them without authorization. By default, device encryption is
turned on in Windows 10 Fall Creators Update. You can change that setting if
you like (although for the best security, that’s not recommended).

What Is BitLocker?
Windows 10 uses an encryption tool known as BitLocker to securely encrypt
the files on your device. You can learn more about BitLocker at https://
www.pcworld.com/article/2308725/encryption/a-beginners-guide-to-
bitlocker-windows-built-in-encryption-tool.html.

1
Changing Encryption
Settings
You can change your encryption
settings—turning encryption off if
you choose–by making a change in
Update & Security settings.

1. Display the Update & Security

window in Settings.

2. Click Device Encryption.

3. Click Turn Off. Windows 10

2 3
prompts you to confirm that you
want to disable encryption.

4. Click Turn Off if you are sure you

want to turn off encryption.

5. Click Cancel to leave encryption in

place.
4 5

Learn More About Encryption

You can find out more about Microsoft’s approach to device encryption in Windows
10 Fall Creators Update by reading “Overview of BitLocker Device Encryption in
Windows 10,” which is available online at https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/
device-security/bitlocker/bitlocker-device-encryption-overview-windows-10.
This page intentionally left blank
 Index

accounts
Symbols email
3D modeling with Paint 3D app, 268 adding, 252-253
drawing in, 270 changing settings, 254
launching, 268 user, 148
Mixed Reality and, 271 adding new, 148-150
Remix 3D and, 272 changing settings from Start
saving in, 271-272 menu, 59
screen elements, 269-270 Microsoft Accounts versus Local
tools, viewing names of, 269 Accounts, 150
switching, 151
Action Center, 55, 75
A notifications, viewing, 138
accent colors, changing, 112 activating Battery Saver app, 45-46
accessibility adding
High Contrast settings, 113 appointments in Calendar app, 256
Narrator tool, 27 apps
Night Light feature, 216 to multiple desktops, 81-82
accessing to taskbar, 68
Microsoft Store account, 176 app tiles to Start menu, 60
OneDrive, 199 contacts
account picture, changing, 125-126 in People app, 248
in People Hub, 244-245
in Skype, 241
 314 Index adding

Cortana skills, 95-98 on Start menu, 18

devices, 39 choosing, 159
email accounts in Mail app, 252-253 creating app groups, 163
extensions in Microsoft Edge, 219-220 in Tablet mode, 158
Favorites to Microsoft Edge, 222 launching, 161
Home button in Microsoft Edge, 207 moving, 160-162
notes to web pages in Microsoft Edge, naming app groups, 164
228 organizing in folders, 60
phone to Windows 10, 43-44 pinning, 159-160
user accounts, 148-150 removing, 164
Add Notes feature (in Microsoft Edge), 207 resizing tiles, 163
Address bar (in Microsoft Edge), 207-208 switching, 165
address book, connecting in Skype, 242 tiles on Start menu
albums (music), playing in Groove Music adding, 60
app, 278 removing, 61
albums (Photos app), 262 resizing, 61-62
alerts (security), changing, 140 turning off live tiles, 62, 120
all-day appointments, creating in Calendar uninstalling, 177
app, 256 universal apps, 157
antivirus programs, Windows Defender and, window features, 167-169
141 updating from Microsoft Store, 176
appointments in Calendar app viewing startup impact, 172
adding, 256 windows of, 165
sending invitations, 257 elements of, 166-167
viewing, 255-256 arranging
apps, 15 apps in multiple windows, 169-170
adding file display within folders, 193
to multiple desktops, 81-82 windows, 73
to taskbar, 68 arrow keys, 21
closing, 30, 171 articles, saving to Reading List in Microsoft
finding on computer, 160 Edge, 227
full screen, 170 audiobooks, ebooks as in Microsoft Edge,
installing from Microsoft Store, 174-175 226
managing from Microsoft Store, 175-176 AutoComplete in Microsoft Edge, 208
in Microsoft Store, 17
opening, 56-58 B
privacy settings, 152
changing, 153 Back button (in Microsoft Edge), 209
location information, 152-155 background, personalizing
removing from taskbar, 68 color
searching in Microsoft Store, 174 changing, 110
snapping, 169-170 creating custom, 110-111
 browsing data 315

in Mail app, 251 features list, 204-205

picture, changing, 109 history, clearing, 218
backing up Home button, adding, 207
Favorites in Microsoft Edge, 222 Hub, 218
files, 304-305 InPrivate Browsing, 212
choosing files for, 306 keyboard shortcuts, 208
restoring from backup, 306-307 launching, 206
badges, 114 navigation tools, 209-210
Battery Saver app, activating, 45-46 new features, 204
BitLocker, 311 notes, adding to web pages, 228
page view, zooming, 217
blocking in Microsoft Edge
Reading view, 224
cookies, 230-231
searching in, 212
phishing websites, 235
changing search providers, 214-215
pop-ups, 234
with Cortana, 213
Bluetooth, Dynamic Lock, 137
OpenSearch standard, 215
books in Microsoft Edge
security
as audiobooks, 226
blocking cookies, 230-231
downloading, 225
blocking pop-ups, 234
picking up where left off, 227
clearing browsing data, 232-233
reading, 226
Do Not Track feature, 230
brightness
managing passwords, 234
changing, 47
saving passwords/form entries, 234
Night Light settings, 113-114
SmartScreen, 235
broadcasting games in Xbox app, 294-296 start page, choosing, 217-218
browsers (Microsoft Edge), 16, 55 tabs
Address bar, 208 customizing New Tab window, 210
articles, saving to Reading List, 227 hiding, 211
AutoComplete, 208 opening, 210
eBooks pinning, 211
as audiobooks, 226 previewing, 211
downloading, 225 themes, choosing, 216
picking up where left off, 227 tools in, 206-207
reading, 226 web pages, printing, 229
extensions browsing data, clearing in Microsoft Edge,
adding, 219-220 232-233
enabling, 221
usage, 221
Favorites
adding, 222
importing, 223
 316 Index Calendar app

child keys, 23-24

C choosing
Calendar app apps on Start menu, 159
appointments files/folders, 190-191
adding, 256 for backup, 306
sending invitations, 257 messaging services in Skype, 243
viewing, 255-256 multiple items, 19
reminders, setting from sticky notes, 80 start page in Microsoft Edge, 217-218
switching to Mail app, 255 themes in Microsoft Edge, 216
Call History pane (in Skype), 240 touch keyboard type, 24
call notifications in Skype, 240 clearing in Microsoft Edge
Camera app, 267 browsing data, 232-233
cell phone history, 218
finding with Cortana, 101 Click to Call feature (Skype), 239
linking to Windows 10, 43-44 clicking links in Microsoft Edge, 210
changing Close button, 70
accent colors and transparency, 112 closing
account picture, 125-126 apps, 30, 171
account settings from Start menu, 59 multiple desktops, 82
background color, 110-111 cloud storage with OneDrive
background picture, 109 accessing, 199
email account settings in Mail app, 254 on-demand access, 199-200
encryption settings, 311 in Start menu, 201
firewall settings, 146 storage space available, 200
game settings, 292-294 support for, 199
location settings, 154 in task bar, 201
Lock screen picture, 115-116 collections (Photos app), 262
Most Used list (Start menu), 120-121 Collections tool (Cortana), 89
passwords, 131-133
color
PIN logon, 135
accent colors, changing, 112
power management settings, 47-48
background
privacy settings, 153
changing, 110
screen brightness, 47
creating custom, 110-111
search providers in Microsoft Edge,
High Contrast settings, 113
214-215
compressing files, 198-199
security alerts, 140
Start menu settings, 122 connecting
to Tablet mode manually, 63-64 address book in Skype, 242
themes, 118-119 devices, 39
time, 124-125 troubleshooting USB connections, 40
to wireless networks, 41-42
 customizing 317

contacts setting up voice commands, 87-88

adding shutting down Windows 10, 34
in People app, 248 tools in, 89
in People Hub, 244-245 creations in Photos app, 265
in Skype, 241 creating, 266
communicating with editing, 267
in People Hub, 245-246 viewing, 267
in Skype, 242 Creators Update
connecting address book in Skype, 242 installing, 12
connecting other lists in People app, 247 new features, 3-4
finding upgrading to, 8
in People Hub, 244-245 custom background color, creating, 110-111
in Skype, 241 customizing
managing in People app, 247 background in Mail app, 251
removing from People Hub, 246 Cortana information, 94-95
Content area (in Skype), 240 Groove Music app, 278
contextual tabs (File Explorer ribbon), 186 Microsoft Edge
controls (of windows), 166 choosing start page, 217-218
cookies choosing themes, 216
blocking in Microsoft Edge, 230-231 zooming page view, 217
types of, 232 New Tab window in Microsoft Edge, 210
copying files, 195-196 Start menu in Tablet mode, 65
Cortana, 13, 55 startup, 14
capabilities of, 85-86 Windows 10
creating tasks in, 99-100 accent colors and transparency, 112
finding phone with, 101 background color, 110-111
games and jokes, 105 background picture, 109
Help Me Pick Up Where I Left Off feature, changing account picture, 125-126
99 changing time, 124-125
information collected by, 90 displaying settings for, 108
with keyboard shortcuts, 88 game settings, 292-294
limiting, 104 High Contrast settings, 113
on lock screen, 100 Lock screen, 114-118
managing notifications, 103 Night Light settings, 113-114
managing permissions, 101-103 saving changes, 108
Notebook tool, 92-93 Start menu, 120-123
adding skills, 95-98 themes, 118-119
personalizing information, 94-95
searching with, 90-91, 213
 318 Index default settings

devices
D adding, 39
default settings, restoring in power man- removing, 40
agement, 48 troubleshooting, 41
definitions, updating in Windows Defender, unrecognized, 40
144 USB connections, troubleshooting, 40
defragmentation, 309-310 viewing installed, 39
desktop, 13-14, 54 Devices tool (Cortana), 89
items on, 54-55 dictating with touch keyboard, 25
multiple desktops, 80 digital assistant. See Cortana
adding apps to, 81-82 disabling location information, 152
closing, 82
displaying
creating, 81
Most Used list (Start menu), 121
switching, 82
notifications, 76
Notifications tool, 75
Personalization settings, 108
checking notifications, 76
Start menu in Tablet mode, 64
turning on/off notifications, 77
Task view, 75
power user menu, 57
Windows Ink Workspace, 78
Start button, 56
Do Not Track feature (in Microsoft Edge),
Start menu, 57-58 230
adding app tiles, 60
downloading
changing account settings, 59
eBooks in Microsoft Edge, 225
organizing app tiles in folders, 60
games in Xbox app, 296-298
removing app tiles, 61
drawing in Paint 3D app, 270
resizing, 58
Dynamic Lock, 137
resizing app tiles, 61-62
turning off live app tiles, 62
taskbar, 67 E
adding apps, 68
Ease of Access options, High Contrast
jump lists, 69 settings, 113
removing apps, 68
eBooks in Microsoft Edge
Task view, 75
as audiobooks, 226
windows
downloading, 225
arranging, 73
picking up where left off, 227
elements of, 70-71
reading, 226
moving, 71
Edge browser, 16, 55
resizing, 72-74
Address bar, 208
shortcuts, 74
articles, saving to Reading List, 227
switching, 72
AutoComplete, 208
Details pane (in File Explorer), 182, 191
hiding/viewing, 184
 Favorites in Microsoft Edge 319

eBooks pinning, 211

as audiobooks, 226 previewing, 211
downloading, 225 themes, choosing, 216
picking up where left off, 227 tools in, 206-207
reading, 226 web pages, printing, 229
extensions edge gestures, 67
adding, 219-220 editing
enabling, 221 creations in Photos app, 267
usage, 221 photos
Favorites in image editors, 264
adding, 222 in Photos app, 263-264
importing, 223 email. See also Mail app
features list, 204-205 accounts
history, clearing, 218 adding, 252-253
Home button, adding, 207 changing settings, 254
Hub, 218 messages
InPrivate Browsing, 212 creating, 250-251
keyboard shortcuts, 208 marking as junk, 255
launching, 206 organizing, 254
navigation tools, 209-210 emoji keyboard, 26
new features, 204
enabling extensions in Microsoft Edge, 221
notes, adding to web pages, 228
encryption, 311
page view, zooming, 217
events. See appointments
Reading view, 224
Expand the Ribbon tool, 71
searching in, 212
changing search providers, 214-215 Expand tool (Cortana), 89
with Cortana, 213 expanding Groove Music toolbar, 277
OpenSearch standard, 215 extended keyboard, 24
security extensions in Microsoft Edge
blocking cookies, 230-231 adding, 219-220
blocking pop-ups, 234 enabling, 221
clearing browsing data, 232-233 usage, 221
Do Not Track feature, 230 extracting files, 198-199
managing passwords, 234
saving passwords/form entries, 234
SmartScreen, 235
F
start page, choosing, 217-218 facial recognition, Windows Hello, 130-131
tabs Family Options (in Windows Defender), 148
customizing New Tab window, 210 Favorites in Microsoft Edge
hiding, 211 adding, 222
opening, 210 importing, 223
 320 Index Favorites button (in Microsoft Edge)

Favorites button (in Microsoft Edge), 207 rating, 192

Feedback tool (Cortana), 89 restoring from backup, 306-307
File Explorer, 55 selecting, 190-191
files/folders sharing, 196-197
arranging folder display, 193 tagging, 192
compressing/extracting, 198-199 viewing additional details, 194
copying, 195-196 viewing information, 191
finding, 189 finding. See also searching
moving, 197 apps on computer, 160
rating, 192 contacts
selecting, 190-191 in People Hub, 244-245
sharing, 196-197 in Skype, 241
tagging, 192 files/folders, 189
viewing additional details, 194 file types, 189
viewing file information, 191 phone with Cortana, 101
launching, 180 firewalls (Windows Firewall), 145
libraries in, 188 changing settings, 146
panes, viewing/hiding, 184 checking settings, 145
Quick Access area, 182-183 types of firewalls, 145
Quick Access toolbar, 187 folders
ribbon, 184 arranging file display within, 193
tabs in, 185-186 finding, 189
viewing/hiding, 186-187 merging when restoring files, 307
screen elements, 181-182 organizing app tiles in Start menu, 60
searches, saving, 190 pinning to Quick Access area, 183
This PC area, 183-184 selecting, 190-191
ToolTips in, 188 unpinning from Quick Access area, 183
file information, viewing in Photos app, 263 viewing additional details, 194
File tab (File Explorer ribbon), 185 viewing file information, 191
file types, finding, 189 forgotten passwords, 133
files forgotten picture passwords, 136
arranging folder display, 193 form entries, saving in Microsoft Edge, 234
backing up, 304-305 Forward button (in Microsoft Edge), 209
choosing files for, 306 full screen apps, 170
compressing/extracting, 198-199
copying, 195-196
encryption, 311
G
finding, 189 Game bar (Xbox app), 290-291
moving, 197 keyboard shortcuts, 294
on-demand access with OneDrive, Game mode, turning on, 291
199-200
 keyboards 321

games, 17. See also Xbox app High Contrast settings, 113
broadcasting, 294-296 history, clearing in Microsoft Edge, 218
changing settings, 292-294 HoloLens, 268
checking network status, 298-299 Home button (in Microsoft Edge), 207
with Cortana, 105 Home tab (File Explorer ribbon), 185
finding and downloading, 296-298
Home tool (Cortana), 89
playing, 290-291, 294
Hub (in Microsoft Edge), 207, 218
gestures, 27
edge gestures, 67
new trackpad gestures, 32 I
pinch zoom, 31 icons on taskbar, 13
single tap, 28 image editors, 264
swipe down, 30
importing
swipe left, 29
Favorites to Microsoft Edge, 223
swipe right, 29
photos in Photos app, 264-265
swipe up, 30
Ink feature, 77
tap and hold, 28
creating sticky notes, 79
Get Help (in File Explorer), 182
displaying Windows Ink Workspace, 78
Groove Music app, 17, 275
InPrivate Browsing, 212
creating playlists, 279-280
installed devices, viewing, 39
opening, 276
installing
personalizing, 278
apps from Microsoft Store, 174-175
playing music, 276-278
Windows 10 Creators Update, 12
toolbar, 277
Internet access, connecting to wireless
Groove Music Service, 17, 276
networks, 41-42
groups for apps on Start menu
invitations, sending in Calendar app, 257
creating, 163
naming, 164
J
H jokes with Cortana, 105
jump lists, 69
hard disk, optimizing, 309-310
junk mail, marking email messages as, 255
help
searching for, 32-33
Tips app, 33-34 K
Help button, 71 keyboards
Help Me Pick Up Where I Left Off feature layout, 22
(Cortana), 99
navigation shortcuts, 21-22
hiding touch keyboard
File Explorer panes, 184 dictating with, 25
File Explorer ribbon, 186-187 emoji keyboard and, 26
tabs in Microsoft Edge, 211
 322 Index keyboards

moving, 26 changing picture, 115-116

types of, 24 creating slideshow, 117-118
usage, 23 stopping slideshow, 118
writing pad, 25 logging in, 12-13, 130
keyboard shortcuts passwords, changing, 131-133
with Cortana, 88 picture passwords
for Game bar, 294 creating, 135-137
in Microsoft Edge, 208 removing, 137
PIN
L changing, 135
creating, 134
launching removing, 135
apps, 56-58 security versus simplicity, 130
on Start menu, 161 Skype, 239
File Explorer, 180 Windows Hello, 130-131
Groove Music app, 276 Xbox app, 288
Mail app, 249
Microsoft Edge, 206
Movies & TV app, 281
M
Paint 3D app, 268 Mail app, 248
People app, 246-247 background, personalizing, 251
Photos app, 260 email accounts
Skype, 238 adding, 252-253
troubleshooters, 308 changing settings, 254
libraries, 183 email messages
in File Explorer, 188 creating, 250-251
limiting Cortana, 104 marking as junk, 255
linking phone to Windows 10, 43-44 organizing, 254
links, clicking in Microsoft Edge, 210 launching, 249
maximizing window, 249
live app tiles, turning off, 62
screen elements, 249-250
Local Accounts, Microsoft Accounts versus,
150 switching to Calendar app, 255
Location bar (in File Explorer), 181 managing
apps from Microsoft Store, 175-176
location information
contacts in People app, 247
changing settings, 154
notifications in Cortana, 103
dangers of, 155
passwords in Microsoft Edge, 234
disabling, 152
permissions in Cortana, 101-103
locking computer, Dynamic Lock, 137
marking email messages as junk in Mail
Lock screen
app, 255
Cortana on, 100
Maximize button, 70
personalizing, 114-115
 mouse usage 323

maximizing Mail app window, 249 searching in, 212

MCE (Windows Media Center Edition), 280 changing search providers, 214-215
Media Center, 280 with Cortana, 213
merging folders when restoring files, 307 OpenSearch standard, 215
messages (email) in Mail app security
creating, 250-251 blocking cookies, 230-231
marking as junk, 255 blocking pop-ups, 234
organizing, 254 clearing browsing data, 232-233
Do Not Track feature, 230
messaging services, choosing in Skype, 243
managing passwords, 234
microphone, setting up, 91
saving passwords/form entries, 234
Microphone icon (touch keyboard), 25
SmartScreen, 235
Microsoft Accounts, 13
start page, choosing, 217-218
Local Accounts versus, 150
tabs
Microsoft Edge, 16, 55 customizing New Tab window, 210
Address bar, 208 hiding, 211
articles, saving to Reading List, 227 opening, 210
AutoComplete, 208 pinning, 211
eBooks previewing, 211
as audiobooks, 226 themes, choosing, 216
downloading, 225 tools in, 206-207
picking up where left off, 227 web pages, printing, 229
reading, 226
Microsoft Store, 17, 55, 173
extensions
accessing account, 176
adding, 219-220
installing apps, 174-175
enabling, 221
managing apps, 175-176
usage, 221
searching for apps, 174
Favorites
updating apps, 176
adding, 222
Minimize button, 70
importing, 223
Minimize Ribbon tool, 71
features list, 204-205
minimizing ribbon in File Explorer, 182
history, clearing, 218
Home button, adding, 207 Mixed Reality, 268, 271
Hub, 218 Mixer, 296
InPrivate Browsing, 212 modeless windows, 165
keyboard shortcuts, 208 Most Used list (Start menu)
launching, 206 changing, 120-121
navigation tools, 209-210 displaying, 121
new features, 204 mouse usage, 19
notes, adding to web pages, 228 navigation shortcuts, 20
page view, zooming, 217 power user menu, 20
Reading view, 224 selecting multiple items, 19
 324 Index movies

movies Network & Internet Settings, 42

searching for, 282-283 network status, checking in Xbox app,
watching, 283-284 298-299
Movies & TV app, 17, 280 Networks tool, wireless network con-
opening, 281 nections, 42
searching the Microsoft Store, 282-283 new features
toolbar, 281-282 in Microsoft Edge, 204
watching shows in, 283-284 in Windows 10 Creators Update, 3-4
moving new gestures, 32
apps on Start menu, 160-162 New Tab window (in Microsoft Edge), cus-
files, 197 tomizing, 210
touch keyboard, 26 Night Light feature, 216
windows, 71 settings, 113-114
multiple desktops, 80 Notebook tool (Cortana), 89, 92-93
adding apps to, 81-82 adding skills, 95-98
closing, 82 personalizing information, 94-95
creating, 81 notes, adding to web pages in Microsoft
switching, 82 Edge, 228
multiple items, selecting, 19 notifications
multiple windows, arranging apps in, badges, 114
169-170 call notifications in Skype, 240
music managing in Cortana, 103
Groove Music app, 17, 275 viewing, 138
creating playlists, 279-280 Notifications tool, 13, 55, 75
opening, 276 checking notifications, 76
personalizing, 278 turning on/off notifications, 77
playing music, 276-278
toolbar, 277 O
Groove Music Service, 17, 276
on-demand access with OneDrive, 199-200
My People hub, 13, 16
OneDrive
accessing, 199
N on-demand access, 199-200
naming app groups, 164 in Start menu, 201
Narrator tool, 27 storage space available, 200
Navigation pane (in File Explorer), 181 support for, 199
hiding/viewing, 184 in task bar, 201
navigation shortcuts onscreen keyboard
with keyboard, 21-22 dictating with, 25
with mouse, 20 emoji keyboard and, 26
moving, 26
navigation tools in Microsoft Edge, 209-210
 personalizing 325

types of, 24 managing in Microsoft Edge, 234

usage, 23 picture passwords
opening creating, 135-137
apps, 56-58 forgotten, 136
on Start menu, 161 removing, 137
File Explorer, 180 saving in Microsoft Edge, 234
Groove Music app, 276 strong, 133
Mail app, 249 pausing movies and TV shows, 284
Microsoft Edge, 206 pen usage with writing pad, 25
Movies & TV app, 281 People app
Paint 3D app, 268 contacts
People app, 246-247 adding, 248
Photos app, 260 connecting other lists, 247
Skype, 238 managing, 247
tabs in Microsoft Edge, 210 launching, 246-247
troubleshooters, 308 People Hub
OpenSearch standard, 215 contacts
optimizing hard disk, 309-310 adding, 244-245
organizing communicating with, 245-246
app tiles in folders in Start menu, 60 finding, 244-245
email messages in Mail app, 254 removing, 246
photos in Photos app, 262 setting up, 243-244
permissions
P managing in Cortana, 101-103
webcam permissions in Skype, 238
Page Down key, 21 persistent cookies, 232
Page tab (in Microsoft Edge), 207 personal digital assistant. See Cortana
Page Up key, 21 personalizing
page view, zooming in Microsoft Edge, 217 background in Mail app, 251
Paint 3D app, 268 Cortana information, 94-95
drawing in, 270 Groove Music app, 278
launching, 268 Microsoft Edge
Mixed Reality and, 271 choosing start page, 217-218
Remix 3D and, 272 choosing themes, 216
saving in, 271-272 zooming page view, 217
screen elements, 269-270 New Tab window in Microsoft Edge, 210
tools, viewing names of, 269 Start menu in Tablet mode, 65
panes (File Explorer), hiding/viewing, 184 startup, 14
passwords Windows 10
changing, 131-133 accent colors and transparency, 112
forgotten, 133 background color, 110-111
 326 Index personalizing

background picture, 109 picture passwords

changing account picture, 125-126 creating, 135-137
changing time, 124-125 forgotten, 136
displaying settings for, 108 removing, 137
game settings, 292-294 pictures. See also photos
High Contrast settings, 113 account picture, changing, 125-126
Lock screen, 114-118 background picture, changing, 109
Night Light settings, 113-114 Lock screen picture
saving changes, 108 changing, 115-116
Start menu, 120-123 creating slideshow, 117-118
themes, 118-119 stopping slideshow, 118
phishing websites, blocking in Microsoft pinch-zoom gesture, 31
Edge, 235 PIN logon
phone changing, 135
finding with Cortana, 101 creating, 134
linking to Windows 10, 43-44 removing, 135
phone calls. See Skype pinning. See also adding
photos. See also Photos app; pictures apps on Start menu, 159-160
editing folders to Quick Access area, 183
in image editors, 264 Recycle Bin to Start menu, 123
in Photos app, 263-264 tabs in Microsoft Edge, 211
file information, 263 playing
importing, 264-265 games in Xbox app, 290-291, 294
organizing, 262 movies and TV shows, 283-284
viewing, 262 music in Groove Music app, 276-278
Photos app playlists, creating in Groove Music app,
creations, 265 279-280
creating, 266 pop-ups, blocking in Microsoft Edge, 234
editing, 267 power management, 44-45
viewing, 267 Battery Saver app, activating, 45-46
launching, 260 changing settings, 47-48
photos restoring default settings, 48
editing, 263-264 power plans, 47-48
file information, 263
Power tool, 34
importing, 264-265
restarting Windows 10, 35
organizing, 262
shutting down Windows 10, 35
viewing, 262
Sleep mode, 35
screen elements, 261
power user menu, 57
video projects, creating, 266
accessing, 20
Preview pane (in File Explorer), 182
hiding/viewing, 184
 screen brightness 327

previewing tabs in Microsoft Edge, 211 contacts from People Hub, 246
printing web pages in Microsoft Edge, 229 devices, 40
privacy picture passwords, 137
InPrivate Browsing in Microsoft Edge, PIN logon, 135
212 programs from Most Used list, 121
webcam permissions in Skype, 238 resetting Windows 10, 48-50
privacy settings, 152 resizing
changing, 153 app tiles on Start menu, 61-62, 163
location information, 152-155 Start menu, 58, 123
Privacy Statement, 154 windows, 72-74
private appointments, creating in Calendar restarting Windows 10, 35
app, 257 restoring
programs. See also apps default settings in power management,
removing from Most Used list, 121 48
uninstalling, 121 files from backup, 306-307
reviewing system status, 138-139
Q ribbon (in File Explorer), 184
minimizing, 182
Quick Access toolbar, 71 tabs in, 185-186
in File Explorer, 181-183, 187 viewing/hiding, 186-187
Quiet Hours (notifications), 77 ribbon (of windows), 166
Ribbon tabs, 71
R rolling back Windows 10 to previous
version, 50
rating files, 192
reading eBooks in Microsoft Edge, 226
Reading List (in Microsoft Edge), saving
S
articles to, 227 saving
Reading view (in Microsoft Edge), 207, 224 articles to Reading List in Microsoft
Recycle Bin, 13, 55 Edge, 227
pinning to Start menu, 123 Favorites in Microsoft Edge, 222
Refresh button in Paint 3D app, 271-272
in File Explorer, 181 passwords/form entries in Microsoft
in Microsoft Edge, 209 Edge, 234
reminders, setting from sticky notes, 80 personalization changes, 108
searches, 190
Remix 3D, 272
scanning with Windows Defender, 143-144
removing
apps scheduling defragmentation, 310
on Start menu, 61, 164 screen brightness
from taskbar, 68 changing, 47
Night Light settings, 113-114
 328 Index scrollbars

scrollbars (of windows), 167 PIN logon

scrolling in Microsoft Edge, 210 changing, 135
Search box, 55 creating, 134
on desktop, 13 removing, 135
in File Explorer, 181, 189 privacy settings, 152
finding apps, 160 changing, 153
search providers, changing in Microsoft location information, 152, 154-155
Edge, 214-215 simplicity versus, 130
Search tool on websites, 210 system status, reviewing, 138-139
searches, saving, 190 UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware
Interface), 130
searching
User Account Control, 139
for apps in Microsoft Store, 174
user accounts, 148
with Cortana, 90-91
adding new, 148-150
for games in Xbox app, 296-298
switching, 151
for help, 32-33
Windows Defender, 141
in Microsoft Edge, 212
Family Options, 148
changing search providers, 214-215
other antivirus programs and, 141
with Cortana, 213
scanning with, 143-144
OpenSearch standard, 215
Security Center, 142
for movies and TV shows in Microsoft
Store, 282-283 updating definitions, 144
Windows Firewall, 145
security
changing settings, 146
alerts, changing, 140
checking settings, 145
Dynamic Lock, 137
types of firewalls, 145
in Microsoft Edge
Windows Hello, 130-131
blocking cookies, 230-231
Windows SmartScreen, 147
blocking pop-ups, 234
clearing browsing data, 232-233 Security and Maintenance window
Do Not Track feature, 230 changing alerts, 140
managing passwords, 234 reviewing system status, 138-139
saving passwords/form entries, 234 Security Center (Windows Defender), 142
SmartScreen, 235 selecting. See choosing
passwords semantic zoom. See pinch-zoom gesture
changing, 131-133 sending invitations in Calendar app, 257
forgotten, 133 session cookies, 232
strong, 133 setting
picture passwords reminders from sticky notes, 80
creating, 135-137 Tablet mode options, 65-66
forgotten, 136
removing, 137
 Start menu 329

setting up Skype
Cortana voice commands, 87-88 call notifications, 240
microphone, 91 Click to Call feature, 239
People Hub, 243-244 contacts
settings adding, 241
Start menu, changing, 122 communicating with, 242
syncing, 197 connecting address book, 242
Windows Firewall finding, 241
changing, 146 launching, 238
checking, 145 messaging services, choosing, 243
Settings tool (Cortana), 89 screen elements in, 240
limiting Cortana, 104 signing in, 239
managing webcam permissions in, 238
notifications, 103 Sleep mode, 35
permissions, 101-103 slideshows on Lock screen
Share tab (File Explorer ribbon), 185 creating, 117-118
sharing files, 196-197 stopping, 118
shortcuts smartphone
navigation shortcuts finding with Cortana, 101
with keyboard, 21-22 linking to Windows 10, 43-44
with mouse, 20 SmartScreen (in Microsoft Edge), 235
window operations, 74 snapping apps, 169-170
shutting down Windows 10 sparks, 296
with Cortana, 34 Spotify, 276
with Power tool, 35 Start button, 13, 55-56
signing in, 12-13, 130 power user menu, 20, 57
passwords, changing, 131-133 Start menu, 13, 15, 57-58
picture passwords adding app tiles, 60
creating, 135-137 apps, 18
removing, 137 choosing, 159
PIN creating app groups, 163
changing, 135 launching, 161
creating, 134 moving, 160-162
removing, 135 naming app groups, 164
security versus simplicity, 130 pinning, 159-160
Skype, 239 removing, 164
Windows Hello, 130-131 resizing tiles, 61-62, 163
Xbox app, 288 changing account settings, 59
simplicity, security versus, 130 OneDrive in, 201
single tap gesture, 28 organizing app tiles in folders, 60
skills (Cortana), adding, 95-98
 330 Index Start menu

personalizing, 120
changing settings, 122
T
Most Used list, 120-121 Tab key, 21
resizing, 123 Tablet mode, 63
turning off app tiles, 120 changing manually, 63-64
removing app tiles, 61 edge gestures, 67
resizing, 58 starting in, 158
in Tablet mode, 64, 158 Start menu in, 64
displaying, 64 displaying, 64
personalizing, 65 personalizing, 65
setting options, 65-66 setting options, 65-66
turning off live app tiles, 62 tabs
start page, choosing in Microsoft Edge, in File Explorer ribbon, 185-186
217-218 in Microsoft Edge
startup customizing New Tab window, 210
impact of apps, viewing, 172 hiding, 211
personalizing, 14 opening, 210
in Tablet mode, 158 pinning, 211
sticky notes previewing, 211
creating, 79 tagging files, 192
setting reminders from, 80 tap and hold gesture, 28
stopping Lock screen slideshows, 118 tap gesture, 28
Store app. See Microsoft Store Task Manager
strong passwords, 133 closing apps, 171
swipe-down gesture, 30 viewing startup impact of apps, 172
swipe-left gesture, 29 Task view, 55, 75
swipe-right gesture, 29 taskbar, 13, 67
swipe-up gesture, 30 apps
switching pinning, 68, 159-160
apps, 165 removing, 68
between desktops, 82 jump lists, 69
between Mail and Calendar apps, 255 OneDrive in, 201
user accounts, 151 tasks, creating in Cortana, 99-100
windows, 72 themed slideshows on Lock screen,
Sync Your Settings tool, 197 creating, 118
syncing settings, 197 themes
system status, reviewing, 138-139 changing, 118-119
choosing in Microsoft Edge, 216
third-party cookies, 232
This PC area (in File Explorer), 183-184
three-finger swipe gesture, 32
 updating 331

thumbs keyboard, 24 forgotten picture passwords, 136

tiles on Start menu games, checking network status,
adding, 60 298-299
organizing in folders, 60 launching troubleshooters, 308
removing, 61 Skype webcam permissions, 238
resizing, 61-62 USB connections, 40
turning off live updates, 62 with Windows Recovery Environment,
307
time, changing, 124-125
TruePlay feature (game settings), 294
Tips app, 33-34
turning off
title bar, 70, 166
app tiles, 120
in Skype, 240
live app tiles, 62
toolbar
notifications, 77
in Groove Music app, 277
turning on
in Movies & TV app, 281-282
Game mode, 291
in Xbox app, 288-289
notifications, 77
tools
TV shows. See also Movies & TV app
in Cortana, 89
searching for in Microsoft Store, 282-283
in Paint 3D app, viewing names of, 269
watching, 283-284
ToolTips in File Explorer, 188
touch gestures, 27. See also Tablet mode
new trackpad gestures, 32 U
pinch zoom, 31 UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware
single tap, 28 Interface), 130
swipe down, 30 uninstalling
swipe left, 29 apps, 177
swipe right, 29 devices, 40
swipe up, 30 programs, 121
tap and hold, 28 universal apps, 157
touch keyboard window features, 167-169
dictating with, 25 unpinning
emoji keyboard and, 26 app tiles from Start menu, 120
moving, 26 folders from Quick Access area, 183
types of, 24 unrecognized devices, 40
usage, 23
updates
trackpad, new gestures, 32 checking for, 302-303
transparency, changing, 112 setting options for, 303
Troubleshooter tools, 41 updating
troubleshooting apps from Microsoft Store, 176
copy conflicts, 196 definitions in Windows Defender, 144
devices, 41
forgotten passwords, 133
 332 Index upgrading to Windows 10 Creators Update

upgrading to Windows 10 Creators Update, AutoComplete, 208

8 eBooks
USB connections, troubleshooting, 40 as audiobooks, 226
User Account Control, 139 downloading, 225
user accounts, 148 picking up where left off, 227
adding new, 148-150 reading, 226
changing settings from Start menu, 59 extensions
Microsoft Accounts versus Local adding, 219-220
Accounts, 150 enabling, 221
switching, 151 usage, 221
Favorites
V adding, 222
importing, 223
versions of Windows 10 features list, 204-205
determining installed version, 8 history, clearing, 218
explained, 2 Home button, adding, 207
Video app. See Movies & TV app Hub, 218
video projects, creating in Photos app, 266 InPrivate Browsing, 212
viewing keyboard shortcuts, 208
additional folder details, 194 launching, 206
appointments in Calendar app, 255-256 navigation tools, 209-210
creations in Photos app, 267 new features, 204
File Explorer panes, 184 notes, adding to web pages, 228
File Explorer ribbon, 186-187 page view, zooming, 217
file information, 191 Reading view, 224
in Photos app, 263 searching in, 212
installed devices, 39 changing search providers, 214-215
notifications, 138 with Cortana, 213
photos in Photos app, 262 OpenSearch standard, 215
startup impact of apps, 172 security
tool names in Paint 3D app, 269 blocking cookies, 230-231
View tab (File Explorer ribbon), 186 blocking pop-ups, 234
voice commands with Cortana, setting up, clearing browsing data, 232-233
87-88 Do Not Track feature, 230
managing passwords, 234
W saving passwords/form entries, 234
SmartScreen, 235
waking from Sleep mode, 35 start page, choosing, 217-218
watching movies and TV shows, 283-284 tabs
web browsers (Microsoft Edge), 16, 55 customizing New Tab window, 210
Address bar, 208 hiding, 211
articles, saving to Reading List, 227 opening, 210
 Windows 10 333

pinning, 211 logging in, 12-13, 130

previewing, 211 changing password, 131-133
themes, choosing, 216 changing PIN, 135
tools in, 206-207 creating picture password, 135-37
web pages, printing, 229 creating PIN, 134
web pages removing picture password, 137
adding notes, 228 removing PIN, 135
printing, 229 security versus simplicity, 130
webcam permissions in Skype, 238 Windows Hello, 130-131
websites optimizing hard disk, 309-310
adding as Favorites, 222 personalizing
importing as Favorites, 223 accent colors and transparency, 112
Search tool on, 210 background color, 110-111
windows background picture, 109
of apps, 165 changing account picture, 125-126
elements of, 166-167 changing time, 124-125
universal apps, 167-169 displaying settings for, 108
arranging, 73 game settings, 292-294
elements of, 70-71 High Contrast settings, 113
moving, 71 Lock screen, 114-118
multiple, arranging apps in, 169-170 Night Light settings, 113-114
resizing, 72-74 saving changes, 108
shortcuts, 74 Start menu, 120-123
switching, 72 themes, 118-119
resetting, 48-50
Windows 10
restarting, 35
desktop, 13-14, 54
rolling back to previous version, 50
items on, 54-55
shutting down
multiple desktops, 80-82
with Cortana, 34
Notifications tool, 75-77
with Power tool, 35
power user menu, 57
Sleep mode, 35
Start button, 56
startup in Tablet mode, 158
Start menu, 57-62
troubleshooting
taskbar, 67-69
launching troubleshooters, 308
Task view, 75
with Windows Recovery Environment,
windows, 70-74
307
file encryption, 311
updates
Game mode, 291
checking for, 302-303
Ink feature, 77
setting options for, 303
creating sticky notes, 79
versions of
displaying Windows Ink Workspace, 78
determining installed version, 8
linking phone to, 43-44
explained, 2
 334 Index Windows 10 Creators Update

Windows 10 Creators Update Windows Phone, linking to Windows 10, 44

installing, 12 Windows Phone App, 44
new features, 3-4 Windows Recovery Environment, 307
upgrading to, 8 Windows SmartScreen, 147
Windows Action Center, 55, 75 wireless networks, connecting to, 41-42
notifications, viewing, 138 work area (of windows), 167
Windows Defender, 141 writing pad, 25
Family Options, 148
other antivirus programs and, 141
scanning with, 143-144
X–Y–Z
Security Center, 142 Xbox app
updating definitions, 144 broadcasting games, 294-296
Windows Explorer. See File Explorer checking network status, 298-299
Windows Firewall, 145 finding and downloading games,
changing settings, 146 296-298
checking settings, 145 Game bar, 290-291
types of firewalls, 145 keyboard shortcuts, 294
Windows Hello, 130-131 playing games, 290
Windows Ink Workspace, displaying, 78 signing in, 288
Windows key, 21 toolbar, 288-289
Windows Media Center Edition (MCE), 280
zooming
Windows Mixed Reality, 268, 271 page view in Microsoft Edge, 217
Windows Mobility Center, 51 with pinch-zoom gesture, 31
This page intentionally left blank
Register Your Product at informit.com/register
$FFHVVDGGLWLRQDOEHQHȴWVDQGsave 35% on your next purchase

• Automatically receive a coupon for 35% off your next purchase, valid for
30 days. Look for your code in your InformIT cart or the Manage Codes
section of your account page.
• Download available product updates.
• Access bonus material if available.*
• Check the box to hear from us and receive exclusive offers on new
editions and related products.

*
Registration benefits vary by product. Benefits will be listed on your account page under
Registered Products.

InformIT.com—The Trusted Technology Learning Source

InformIT is the online home of information technology brands at Pearson, the
world’s foremost education company. At InformIT.com, you can:

• Shop our books, eBooks, software, and video training

• Take advantage of our special offers and promotions
• Sign up to receive special offers and monthly newsletter
• Access thousands of free chapters and video lessons

Connect with InformIT—Visit informit.com/community

Addison-Wesley • Adobe Press • Cisco Press • Microsoft Press • Pearson IT Certification • Prentice Hall • Que • Sams • Peachpit Press
 My
Windows 10 ®

SECOND EDITION

Instructions to access your free copy of My Windows 10

Web Edition as part of the Content Update Program:
If you purchased your book from informit.com, your free Web Edition can be found
under the Digital Purchases tab on your Account page.

If you have not registered your book, follow these steps:

1. Go to informit.com/register.
2. Sign in or create a new account.
3. Enter the ISBN: 9780789759801.
4. Answer a simple question as proof of purchase.
5. Click on the Digital Purchases tab on your Account page to
access your free Web Edition.

InformIT will be updating the My Windows 10 Web Edition periodically, when significant
updates are made to Windows 10 Fall Creator Update release of the software.
To receive an email alerting you of the changes each time the My Windows 10
Web Edition has been updated, opt-in to receive emails from us when you create
your account, or sign up for promotional emails at informit.com/newsletters.
The email address you use to sign up for promotional emails must be the same
email address used for your informit.com account in order to receive the alerts.
If you do not want to receive our emails, you can check your informit.com
account for the latest Web Edition. You can go back and sign up to receive email
notifications at informit.com/newsletters.
When a new edition of this book is published, no further updates will be added to
this book’s Web Edition. However, you will continue to have access to your current
Web Edition with its existing updates.
The Web Edition can be used on tablets that use modern mobile browsers.
Simply log into your informit.com account and access the Web Edition from
the Digital Purchases tab.

For more information about the Content Update Program, visit informit.com/cup
or email our Customer Service department at informit@custhelp.com.